Advertisement
Advertisement
Doors and frames Technical data manual 2020 • rev. 12/02/20 This page intentionally left blank. Home General Information Frames................................................................................................21 General information.........................................................................228 Locations: Hinging, locking, closing...........................................229 Hardware preparations: Nomenclature.................................. 233 Door preps: Locks..............................................................................239 Door preps: Exit devices.................................................................244 Door preps: Inactive leaves.......................................................... 250 Door preps: Hinges............................................................................258 Frame preps: Strikes.........................................................................259 Frame preps: Closers.......................................................................265 Frame preps: Hinges....................................................................... 266 Electric preps: Miscellaneous...................................................... 268 Fire rated products....................................................................269 General information.........................................................................270 Three sided frames........................................................................... 276 Doors.......................................................................................................285 Fire window frames......................................................................... 305 Smoke barrier doors and frames ...............................................313 Smoke and draft control doors and frames per NFPA 105 and UL 1784...........................................................................................313 Performance and finishes....................................................... 315 General information..........................................................................316 Physical endurance...........................................................................316 Insulation factors................................................................................318 Air infiltration.........................................................................................319 Finishes...................................................................................................320 Fire Rated Products Architectural................................................................................. 325 Specifications......................................................................................326 Section 08110 steel doors and frames.................................... 327 SDI selection and usage guide....................................................334 Green buildings construction: LEED certification............... 340 Performance Embossed CE Series.........................................................................126 Dutch doors............................................................................................ 131 Monorail..................................................................................................136 GRAINTECH™...................................................................................... 137 Hardware................................................................................................138 Z Astragal...............................................................................................143 Flat plate astragal.............................................................................. 148 2 piece astragal...................................................................................149 Weather seals.......................................................................................151 Hardware preparations............................................................227 Hardware Doors variations and options................................................ 125 Stainless steel doors and frames................................................216 Sound openings.................................................................................220 Thermal break frames..................................................................... 222 Specialty General door information ...............................................................96 L Series.....................................................................................................99 SL Series................................................................................................ 103 Falcon SZ Series..................................................................................107 B Series................................................................................................... 109 T Series..................................................................................................... 113 CE Series.................................................................................................. 117 A14 Series full glass entrance doors........................................... 121 Specialty products..................................................................... 215 Tornado Doors.................................................................................................. 95 PW Series doors.................................................................................203 FP14 Series flush frames............................................................... 209 Approvals............................................................................................... 212 Lights and louvers....................................................................... 153 • iii Architectural General information..........................................................................154 Glazing kit options..............................................................................155 Flush door glass lights......................................................................156 Special glass lights............................................................................163 Embossed door glass lights...........................................................165 Louver prep........................................................................................... 169 Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Technical data manual • Hurricane Profile Variations..................................................................................60 Dutch doors..............................................................................................71 Communicating frames.....................................................................73 Hospital stops........................................................................................74 Head reinforcement, 12 gauge full width channel.................75 Lead lined.................................................................................................76 Rough buck frames.............................................................................. 77 Applied stops.........................................................................................78 Hardware..................................................................................................79 Thick doors.............................................................................................80 Weather seals........................................................................................ 81 Throat fillers........................................................................................... 82 Kerf frames............................................................................................. 83 Anchoring systems..............................................................................84 Tornado resistant openings...................................................201 Elevations Frame variations and options................................................ 59 General test Information.................................................................192 H16 and H14 Series flush doors....................................................193 HE16 Series embossed doors....................................................... 197 Approvals............................................................................................. 200 Lights and Louvers General information............................................................................22 F Series flush...........................................................................................25 FN Series 1" flush face....................................................................... 29 MU Series multi-use............................................................................33 FE Series double egress.....................................................................37 DE Series double egress.................................................................... 41 DW Series drywall............................................................................... 45 K Series drywall.................................................................................... 49 C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend)....................... 53 Hurricane resistant openings..................................................191 Doors Introduction...............................................................................................6 Technical publications..........................................................................7 Handing procedures diagrams.........................................................11 Nomenclature.........................................................................................12 Typical hardware locations.............................................................. 14 Comparative hinge and strike locations..................................... 18 General information...........................................................................172 Architectural sticks............................................................................. 175 Typical elevations...............................................................................182 Installation details............................................................................. 189 Variations General Information....................................................................... 5 Elevations..........................................................................................171 Frames Technical product support.........................................................iv Variations Contents Frames Doors Technical product support • Technical product support Phone: (877) 671-7011, Option 2 then Option 5 E-Mail: [email protected] Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home iv • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors General Information Introduction....................................................................................... 6 Standards and SDI Certified..............................................................6 Dimensioning............................................................................................6 Terminology...............................................................................................6 Literature....................................................................................................6 Errors and omissions.............................................................................6 Technical publications...................................................................7 Lights and Louvers SDI Technical publications..................................................................7 HMMA Technical publications..........................................................9 ANSI Technical publications............................................................ 10 Handing procedures diagrams.................................................11 Nomenclature..................................................................................12 Elevations Frame nomenclature...........................................................................12 Door nomenclature...............................................................................13 Typical hardware locations.......................................................14 3 Hinges (1 1/2 Pair)................................................................................ 14 4 Hinges (2 Pair)....................................................................................15 5 Hinges (2 1/2 Pair)............................................................................... 16 Dutch doors.............................................................................................. 17 Tornado 1 3/4” Doors and frames with 4 1/2” x 4 1/2” hinges...................... 19 45 mm doors and frames with 114 mm x 114 mm hinges (metric dimensions).......................................................................... 20 Hurricane Comparative hinge and strike locations............................. 18 Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 5 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 06/08/17 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home General Information • Introduction Introduction After more than seven decades of quality, craftsmanship and service leadership, Steelcraft continues to be recognized as the world’s leading manufacturer of steel doors and frames. Steelcraft manufactures the most complete line of steel doors and frames. These products are produced from the highest quality of commercial carbon steel or galvannealed steel as specified. Steelcraft frames are designed for virtually all types of wall construction. The flush frame is primarily intended for installation as part of the wall framing system(s), while the Drywall Frames are specifically designed for drywall construction. Steelcraft Metric Policy Jobs ordered in metric dimensions will be supplied to the actual dimensions indicated on orders placed to Steelcraft. No dimensions will be considered nominal, unless they are clearly indicated and supported by a clearly stated metric dimensional standard. All critical, installation and functional tolerances will be in accordance with the industry tolerance published in and by the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA). Terminology The terms covered in this manual are in accordance with those published by: Steelcraft also offers the broadest line of labeled (Fire Rated) doors and frames for either Positive or Neutral fire test environments. Steelcraft continues to be very active in assisting building code officials in the adoption of more stringent and realistic codes for Fire Doors and Frames. SDI ANSI A250.7 Nomenclature for: Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames HMMA HMMA 801-05 Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames The Steelcraft Architectural Stick System consists of standard frame components that are pre-engineered for assembly and fabrication by the local Steelcraft distributor. This allows for unlimited opportunities to meet the architectural and aesthetic needs of extensive window wall, store front and entrance units. Literature Steelcraft is devoted to the manufacture, service and continuous improvement of steel doors, frames and their components. A measure of this commitment can be found in the great number of door and frame innovations that are now common in the industry-pioneered, designed, developed, and in certain products, patented by Steelcraft. This Technical Manual is designed to provide Architects, Engineers, Specification Writers, End Users and Distributors with the necessary information to specify the correct Steelcraft product to meet the application and functional needs of the project. In addition to providing the industry with the highest quality of steel doors, frames and components, Steelcraft offers the widest selection of sizes, styles and designs to compliment virtually any architectural, aesthetic, security or safety requirement. Standards and SDI Certified Steelcraft products are SDI Certified (www.steeldoor.org/sdicertified.php). Steelcraft is a long-standing and very involved member of several training and industry organizations, which are also dedicated to the continual improvement of the Commercial Door and Frame Markets. Some of the major trade associations of which Steelcraft is an active member include: SDI Steel Door Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association DHI The Door and Hardware Institute Dimensioning All dimensions shown in this manual are based on the imperial (feet and inches) dimensions system, with the equivalent metric (millimeters) shown in parentheses. Steelcraft has and does supply projects globally in both Imperial and Metric dimensioning. It is the responsibility of the architect, specifier and purchaser of the doors and frames to clearly indicate the dimensional system required to be met. With the multitude of building components interfacing with the door and frame installations, this is extremely critical and requires a clearly stated and understood dimensioning policy. 6• Literature or standards referenced in this manual can be obtained directly from the publisher of that literature. To obtain any standard referenced in this manual, refer to the organizations listed. Downloadable documents may be obtained by connecting to the organization’s website. Organization Website ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials www.astm.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute csinet.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association, Division of NAAMM www.naamm.org NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. www.ul.com WH Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO) www.interteck.com Errors and omissions Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this Steelcraft Technical Manual. This manual is for use by qualified persons only. The information herein is subject to some interpretation, and from time to time, the data sheets will be updated whenever it is deemed necessary as new tests are conducted, new products and technologies are introduced and as specifications are revised. Similarly, there may be recommendations provided in this manual concerning hardware or construction procedures. Specific hardware, code, and specific industry standards and instructions should always be followed. Any differences should be fully understood by the architect and contractors. For these reasons, and because of the nature and scope of the subject, Steelcraft and its employees can assume no responsibility or liability for the absolute accuracy of the material contained herein or its use. The information in this Technical Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steelcraft. Please contact the Steelcraft Technical Service Department if you identify an error or omissions. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information General Information • Technical publications Variations Doors Listed here, and on the following page, are the current Technical publications available from the Steel Door Institute. Frames SDI Technical publications Variations Technical publications All documents in this list are part of the SDI Fact File. Free downloads of these documents are available from SDI’s Website: www.steeldoor.org SDI Technical publications Pub No. SDI 108-04 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors This document was developed to establish guide criteria for the selection and usage of standard steel doors in such building types as apartment, dormitory, hotel/motel, hospital/ nursing home, industrial, office and school. SDI 109-04 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document contains a listing of hardware from various hardware manufacturers that is compatible for use on standard steel doors and frames. It covers various types of locks, exit devices, closers, holders, hinges, roller latches, flush bolts, and electric strikes. SDI 110-84 (R2000) Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction This document contains information in respect to, as the title indicates, the installation of standard steel doors and frames in modular masonry construction. The basic module covered in the document as developed by the industry is 4”. SDI 111-00 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and Accessories (A through H): SDI 111-A Recommended Standard Steel Door Frame Details Covers Recommended steel door frame details as they are affected by common wall conditions. SDI 111-B Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors Standard dimensions for dutch doors. SDI 111-C Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors This document discusses, explains and details a variety of louver designs and size available for standard steel doors. SDI 111-D Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for Standard Steel Doors and Frames Contains a suggested door, frame and hardware schedule form and defines “handing”. SDI 111-E Recommended Guidelines for The Use of Gasketing and Thresholds for Standard Steel Doors and Frames Contains details which represent the recommendations of the SDI in respect to weatherstripping of standard steel doors and frames. SDI 111-F Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard Steel Doors and Frames A guide for architects to aid them in recognizing available options to the traditional sub buck detail which has been widely used in the past. It illustrates anchoring systems which are available in regular and labeled frames. SDI 111-G Recommended Standard Preparation for Double Type (Interconnected) Locks On Standard Steel Doors and Frames Dimensions for standard door and frame preparation for double type (interconnected) locks. SDI 111-H High Frequency Hinge Preparations for Frames Specifications for steel frames used in extremely high frequency or high use areas which need to be supplied with additional reinforcing to eliminate potential door sag. SDI 112-97 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/ Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document provides information regarding the galvanized sheet used in standard steel door and frame construction when a requirement for galvanized doors and frames is specified. SDI 113-13 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies This document establishes a minimum standard and a method of test for thermal effectiveness of steel door and frame assemblies under circumstances that might reasonably be considered normal field applications and conditions. SDI 117-00 Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document is intended to furnish users and prospective users of standard steel doors and frames with practical information regarding mortise and manufacturing tolerances for both doors and frames. SDI 118-02 Basic Fire Door Requirements This document contains rules and other information in a condense simplified manner in respect to code requirements for the design and use of fire doors. SDI 122-99 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document covers field installation problems most commonly experienced with standard steel door and frame installations. Most problems encountered are because of inappropriate application of the products and/or improper installation. SDI 124-98 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document is intended to serve as a general outline of maintenance activities needed for hollow metal doors and frames. Hardware Performance Architectural 7 Fire Rated Products • Specialty Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 09/21/16 • Technical data manual • Tornado Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature Hurricane SDI 106-99 Elevations Description This document contains Standard door type nomenclature ranging from flush (Type F) to Dutch doors (Type D). The use of the Standard nomenclature contained in the document will greatly simplify architectural drawing takeoff process and will do much to avoid confusion and errors which result from misinterpretation of these details. Lights and Louvers Title General Information Home General Information • Technical publications Frames Doors Pub No. Title Description SDI 127 Series: Industry Alerts (A through J): SDI 127A-99 End Closure Location Industry Alerts - End Closure SDI 127B-99 Door Edge Cutouts Industry Alerts - Door Edge Cutouts SDI 127C-99 Frame Cutout Limits Industry Alerts - Frame Cutout Limits SDI 127D-99 Electric Strikes In Stud Walls Industry Alerts - Electric Strikes in Stud Walls SDI 127E-01 Prime Painted Materials Alert Industry Alerts - Prime Painted Materials Alert SDI 127F-02 Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes Industry Alerts - Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes SDI 127G-02 Environmental Considerations Relating to Factory Painted Steel Doors and Frames Industry Alerts - Environmental Considerations Relating to Factory Painted Steel Doors and Frames SDI 127H-02 Water Penetration Industry Alerts - Water Penetration SDI 127I-04 Grouting Frames in Drywall Industry Alerts - Grouting Frames in Drywall Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames Industry Alerts - Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames SDI 128-97 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames This document shall provide guidelines for the specifying, designing, installing, and adjusting of standard steel doors and frames in Sound Control applications. SDI 129-04 Hinge and Strike Spacing A reference of standard locations used in the manufacture of steel door and frames by SDI member companies for a variety of door sizes. SDI 130-05 Electronic Hinge Preparations Practical information regarding an acceptable method for preparing frames for 4 1⁄2” electric hinges. This document will allow frame manufacturers to provide frames prior to having knowledge of the specific electric hinge being used. SDI 131-15 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors This test procedure provides manufacturers with a method of quickly testing the performance of doors. Drywall Slip-On Frames This document illustrates step by step how to install Drywall Frames in less than 10 minutes. It also lists the many advantages of drywall slip-on frames. Tornado SDI 127J-04 Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations SDI Technical publications 8• • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/18/18 Home General Information General Information • Technical publications HMMA Technical publications Frames Variations Doors Free downloads of these documents are available from the HMMA/NAAMM Website: naamm.org/hmma/ Variations Listed here, and on the following page are the current Technical publications available from the Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, a Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. HMMA Technical publications Title Description HMMA 800-96 Introduction to Custom Hollow Metal It is the purpose of this manual to provide authoritative and unbiased technical information regarding the manufacture, design and use of custom hollow metal doors and frames. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 801-05 Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Defines commonly used terms in connection with Hollow Metal Work as they specifically apply to hollow metal doors and frames. These terms may be defined differently by other industries. HMMA 802-07 Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames This publication details the types of steel materials used and fabrication processes, including shearing, blanking, brake forming, limitations of break forming, welding and painting. HMMA 803-97 Steel Tables Values of minimum steel thicknesses taken from the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication for gauge number and equivalent thickness are shown. ASTM and ANSI do not list gauge numbers in their standards which was the standard of referral prior to 1970. HMMA 810-87 Hollow Metal Doors This document reviews basic sizes, types, designs and construction of hollow metal doors. HMMA 820-87 Hollow Metal Frames This document details various elevation types, profiles, assembly and anchoring of Knock-Down (KD) and welded 3-sided and multiple opening hollow metal frames. HMMA 830-02 Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames This publication is intended to acquaint the reader with commonly used door hardware that provides both aesthetic appeal and durable function. HMMA 831-97 Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Recommended locations for hardware on Custom Hollow Metal doors differ from those established for Standard Hollow Metal doors principally with respect to hinges, knobs and strikes. HMMA 840-99 Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A comprehensive review of the delivery, receiving, on-site storage and installation of Knock-Down (KD) and welded hollow metal frames and hanging of hollow metal doors. HMMA 850-00 Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Data on current practices within the industry are presented with emphasis on the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and Model Codes. Fire testing, listing, labeling and certification services are thoroughly covered. HMMA 860-92 Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Apartment Buildings, Dormitories, Military Barracks, and Motels. HMMA 861-06 Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Schools, Hospitals, Industrial Buildings, Office Buildings, Hotels, Nursing Homes, Airports, and Convention Centers. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 862-03 Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Exterior Doors to Schools, Warehouses, Industrial Buildings, or Strip Stores. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863-04 Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Jails, Prisons, Detention Centers, and Secured Areas in Hospitals or Courthouses. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 865-03 Guide Specifications for Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Television, Radio, Recording and Sound Studios, Theaters, and Music Rooms. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 866-01 Guide Specifications for Stainless Steel Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to the use of Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel for highly corrosive, moderately corrosive or aesthetic applications. ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867-06 Guide Specifications for Commercial Laminated Core Hollow Metal Doors and Frames This specification presents the 2004 CSI Format (for the new CSI location for hollow metal doors and frame products) Master Format 2004 Section 08 11 13 and is intended as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job specifications for the application of specific job requirements related to Commercial, laminated core, steel doors, and appropriate frame products Tornado Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural 9 Hurricane • Elevations Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Lights and Louvers Pub No. General Information Home General Information • Technical publications Frames Variations ANSI Technical publications Listed on this page are the current Technical publications available from the American National Standards Institute. Note that although some references to ANSI codes in the following tech data pages of this book do not reference revision dates, they are up to date per the revision dates listed below on this page. Free downloads of these documents are available from SDI’s Website: www.steeldoor.org Tornado Doors Pub No. Title Description A250.3-2007 (R2011) Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for – Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames Prescribes the procedure to be followed in the selection of material, chemical preparation, painting, testing, and evaluation of factory applied finish painted steel surfaces for steel doors and frames. A250.4-2011 Test Procedures and Accepted Criteria for – Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing A standard method of testing the performance of a steel door mounted in a pressed steel or channel iron frame under condition that might be considered an accelerated field operating conditions. A250.6-2003 (R2009) Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames Provides users of standard steel doors and frames with practical information regarding accepted design methods for reinforcing, and Recommended practices for proper field preparation and installation of builders hardware. A250.7-1997 (R2002) Nomenclature for – Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames Detailed definitions of terms common to the Standard Steel Door and Steel Door Frame Industry. 250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames This specification for swinging steel doors and frames offers a number of choices in both regular and fire rated door and frame constructions. The user must select from the specification the specific grades of doors and frames that best apply to the project. This specification covers sizes, types, materials, general construction requirements and finishing of 1 3⁄4” extra heavy duty steel doors, 1 3⁄4” heavy duty steel doors, 1 3⁄4” and 1 3⁄8” standard duty steel doors, together with frames and accessories. They are intended to be standard items not subject to variations. A250.10-2011 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for – Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames Procedures for the selection of material, chemical preparation, painting, testing and evaluation of prime painted steel surfaces for steel doors and frames. A250.11-2012 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames This document includes information in respect to storage of frames on the jobsite, grouting and back painting of frames and assembly of frames. It contains instructions in respect to bracing frames before wall construction and the installation of frames in masonry, steel stud wall construction, wood stud wall construction and drywall construction. A250.13-2014 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies This standard provides procedures for testing and establishing load ratings (design load in pounds per square foot or pounds force) for components of exterior swinging door assemblies. It is the intent of this document to test the protection of openings during severe windstorm conditions, such as a hurricane, that produces sustained wind speeds or gusts in a range of 110 to 150 miles per hour as defined by ASCE 7-02. It is not intended to simulate wind forces generated by tornadoes. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations ANSI Technical publications 10 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information General Information • Handing procedures diagrams • Storm Shutter doors likewise are handed with the outside as the storm side. Shutters are typically straight handed and will always be straight handed there(swing is glass in) in the opening. Left Right Hand Door LeftHand HandDoor Door(swing (swingin) in) Right Handif Door (swing in) If the door swings to the viewer, the door is reverse swing, i.e., right hand reverse swing or left hand reverse swing. For door handing in Tornado shelter door openings, the outside is always the storm side. While uncommon, if the key side is on the safe side of the door, as in a corridor shelter, this handing rule still applies. In this case, you must clarify in your order so that latching hardware preps will be correctly addressed, and the keyside will be recognized on the reverse hand (inside) as instructed. Right Hand Right Hand Frame Right Hand Door (swing in) Right Hand Door (swing in) All Steelcraft Doors and Frames are Frame handed according to the following chart: RH RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb RH RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Key KeySide Side RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb Key KeySide Side RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Outside Outside Right RightHand HandReverse ReverseBevel BevelDoor Door(swing (swingout) out) Left Frame LeftHand Hand Frame Right Bevel Door RightHand HandReverse Reverse Bevel Door(swing (swingout) out) Right reverse bevel door (swing out)out) Right RightHand Handhand Reverse Reverse Bevel Bevel Door Door (swing (swing out) Left Hand Frame Left Hand Frame Left hand frame Left LeftHand Hand Frame Frame Right RightHand HandReverse Reverse Bevel Bevel Door Door(swing (swingout) out) Inside Left LeftHand Hand Frame Frame Inside Inside Inside Outside Inside Inside Outside LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Key Side Key SideLH Outside Outside Inside Inside Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Pair of doors - LH active (swing in) Pair of –door LH Active (swing in) Pair ofDoors Doors –Frame LHframe Active (swing in) Double Door –– LH Active Double Door Frame LH Active Double - LH active Pair Pair of of Doors Doors – – LH LH Active Active (swing (swing in) in) Double Door Frame – LH Active Double Door Frame – LH Active Double Double Door Door Frame Frame – – LH LH Active Active Pair Pairof ofDoors Doors––LH LHActive Active (swing (swingin) in) Inside Inside KK Inactive Double DoubleDoor DoorFrame Frame – –LH LHActive Active Inactive Inside Inside Outside Outside LH Astragal LHInside Astragal Inside LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inactive Inactive LH LH Astragal Astragal LH LH Hinge Hinge Jamb Jamb Inside Inside Inactive Inactive LHRB LHRBLock Lock LH LHAstragal Astragal LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inactive Inactive LHRB LHRBActive Active LHRB Lock Lock KK KK Inactive Inactive KK Outside Outside Indicates key side of the active door Key KeySide Side K K RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Key KeySide Side LHRB LHRBActive Active Lock Lock LHRB LHRBActive Active LHRB LHRBLock Lock LHRB LHRBActive Active Left LeftHand HandReverse ReverseBevel BevelDoor Door(swing (swingout) out) Right Frame RightHand Hand Frame Left Bevel Door LeftHand HandReverse Reverse Bevel Door(swing (swingout) out) hand reverse door (swing out) out) Left LeftLeft Hand Hand Reverse Reverse Bevel Bevel Door Door (swing (swing out) Right Hand Frame Rightbevel Hand Frame Right hand frame Right RightHand Hand Frame Frame Left Left Hand HandReverse Reverse Bevel Bevel Door Door(swing (swing out) out) RH Strike Jamb RH Hinge Jamb RH Hinge Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH Strike Jamb Right RightInside Hand HandFrame Frame RH Inside RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb RH Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Inside Inside Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Key KeySide Side Outside Outside Key KeySide Side KK KK KK KK RH RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb LHRB LHRBLock Lock LHRB LHRBLock Lock LHRB LHRBLock Lock LHRB LHRBLock Lock Pair Pairof ofDoors Doors––RH RHActive Active(swing (swingin) in) Pair of doors - RH active (singe in) Pair of Doors – RH Active (swing in) Pair of Doors – RH Active (swing in) Double Door Frame – RH Active Double Door Frame – active RH Active Double door frame - RH Pair Pair of ofDoors Doors ––Frame RH RHActive Active (swing (swing in) in) Double Door ––RH Active Double Door Frame RH Active Double Double Door Door Frame ––RH RH Active Active Pair Pair of ofDoors Doors ––Frame RH RHActive Active (swing (swing in) in) Inside Inside KK Inactive Inactive Double DoubleDoor Door Frame Frame RHActive Active Inside Inside KK ––RH Inactive Inactive Inside Inside LH LH Inactive Inactive Astragal Astragal Inside Inside LH LH Inactive Inactive Astragal Astragal LH LH Astragal Astragal LH LH Astragal Astragal KKOutside Outside KK Key Side Key Side Outside Outside RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RH Hinge Hinge Jamb Jamb RH Lock RH Lock Key Side Key Side Outside Outside RH Active Active Lock RHRH Lock Key KeySide Side RH RH Hinge Hinge Jamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Outside Outside RH RHActive Active Lock Lock Key KeySide Side RH RHActive Active RH RHLock Lock RH RH Active Active Pair ––- RHRB Active (swing out) Pairof ofDoors Doors RHRB Active (swing out) Pair of doors RHRB active (swing out) LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Double door frame - LH Pair Doors – Active Pairof of Doors –RHRB RHRB Active (swing out) Double Door Frame ––active LH Active Double Door Frame LH(swing Activeout) Pair Pairof of Doors Doors – – RHRB RHRB Active Active (swing out) Double Active DoubleDoor DoorFrame Frame––LH LH(swing Activeout) Double Double Door Door Frame Frame – – LH LH Active Active Inside Pair Pairof ofDoors Doors––RHRB RHRB Active(swing (swingout) out) Inside Active RH Astragal RHInside Astragal LH RH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inside Double DoubleDoor Door Frame Frame––LH LHActive Active RH Astragal RHInside Astragal LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inside RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inactive Inactive RH RH Astragal Astragal LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Inside Inside Outside Outside Inactive Inactive RHRB RHRBActive Active RH RH Astragal Astragal LH LH Hinge Hinge Jamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Inactive Inactive RHRB RHRBLock Lock RHRB Active Active Key Side Key Side Outside Outside RHRB RHRBLock Lock Active Active Inactive Inactive Key KeySide Side RHRB RHRBLock Lock Outside Outside RHRB RHRBActive Active Key KeySide Side active door RHRB RHRBK Lock Lock --indicates K indicatesKey Keyside sideof ofthe the active door KK KK KK KK KK--indicates indicatesKey Keyside sideof ofthe theactive activedoor door Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • • 11 Architectural KK--indicates indicatesKey Keyside sideof ofthe theactive activedoor door KK--indicates indicatesKey Keyside sideof ofthe theactive activedoor door Performance RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb LH Outside Outside Fire Rated Products Double door frame -RH active Pair of ––LHRB Active (swing PairDouble ofDoors Doors LHRB Active (swing out) Door Frame –– RH Active Double Door Frame RH Activeout) Pair PairDouble of of Doors Doors – – LHRB LHRB Active Active (swing (swing out) Active DoubleDoor DoorFrame Frame––RH RH Activeout) Double Double Door Door Frame Frame – – RH RH Active Active Inside Pair Pairof ofDoors Doors––LHRB LHRBActive Active (swingout) out) Inside (swing LH Astragal LHInside Astragal RH Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RHHinge Hinge Jamb Door Inside Double Double DoorFrame Frame ––RH RHActive Active Key KeySide Side Hardware KK Inactive Inactive KK KK Inside Inside Outside Outside LH RH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RH Inactive Inactive Key Side Key Side Astragal Outside Astragal Outside Inside Inside LH RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RH Inactive Inactive Side Key Side Astragal Outside Outside Astragal LH LHHinge HingeLH Jamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb Lock LH Lock Key RH RH KeySide Side Astragal LH Active LH Active Lock Lock Key Outside Outside Astragal LH LHHinge HingeLH Jamb Jamb RH RHHinge HingeJamb Jamb RH RH LH LHActive Active Key Lock Lock KeySide Side Astragal Astragal LH LHActive Active LH LHLock Lock LH LH Active Active Pair Doors ––LHRB (swing Pairof of Doors LHRB Active (swing out) Pair of doors LHRBActive active (swing out) out) LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb Specialty KK Key KeySide Side Outside Outside KK Key Key Side Side KK RHRB RHRBLock Lock KK Pair LH Pairof ofDoors Doors–– LHActive Active(swing (swingin) in) Key KeySide Side Tornado LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb RHRB RHRBLock Lock RHRB RHRBLock Lock RHRB RHRBLock Lock LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb LH LHHinge HingeJamb Jamb KKLH Lock KK LHLock LHLock Lock KKLH LH StrikeJamb Jamb KK LHStrike Inside Inside Outside Inside Inside Outside Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Inside Inside Key Side Key Side Outside Outside Hurricane LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb LH LHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb K Left hand door (swing in) Left hand frame LH LHLock Lock Left Left Hand Hand Frame Frame Inside Inside Elevations KK KK Inside Inside K Outside RH RHLock Lock K Outside Inside Inside Side Key Side Outside RH Outside KK Key RHStrike StrikeJamb Jamb Inside Inside Right hand frame RH RHLock LockRight Right Hand Hand Frame Frame Inside Inside RH RHLock Lock Left LeftHand Hand Frame Left Door (swing LeftHand Hand DoorFrame (swingin) in) Left LeftHand Hand Door DoorFrame (swing (swingin) in) Left LeftHand Hand Frame Left Left Hand Hand Frame Frame LH Lock LHin) Lock Left LeftHand HandDoor Door(swing (swing in) Lights and Louvers Right Right Hand Hand Door DoorFrame (swing (swingin) in) Right Hand Right Hand Frame Right Right Hand Hand Frame Frame RH Lock RHRight Lock Right Hand Hand Door (swing (swing in) Right handDoor door (swing in)in) Doors If the door swings away from the viewer, the hand is regular hand, i.e., right or left hand. Variations • • • Frames To determine the hand of a door, view the door from the outside (the side that hinges are on is the hand of the door). Variations Handing procedures diagrams Frames Doors General Information • Nomenclature Nomenclature Frame nomenclature Notes: Steelcraft frames are described and marked with easy to follow product identification nomenclature. The markings identify the frames by frame series, gauge (decimal and metric), fire rating, door thickness, overall depth, door opening height/width, hardware preps, component and handing. 1. The following is a brief guide to the nomenclature used by Steelcraft: F 16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 SJ R 3. Refer to the hardware section of this manual for preps and nomenclature not covered on this sheet. F 16 UL 4 5 3⁄4” The nomenclature designation shown on this page is for education, example and reference only. 2. Refer to the individual Technical Data Manual sheets to develop options related to the specific frame series. 70 SJ R ASA STRIKE PREP Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home ASA CYL RPD VPD SPCL = = = = = R L D DR DL = = = = = SJ HJ HD = = = 4 7⁄8” (124 mm) Strike With Lip 2 3⁄4” (70 mm) Strike With Lip Rim Exit Device Reinf. Vertical Rod Exit Device Reinf. Special Strike Application Right Hand Left Hand Double Door Double Door, Right Hand Active Double Door, Left Hand Active Tornado COMPONENT Strike Jamb Hinge Jamb Head DOOR OPENING HEIGHT / WIDTH Designated In Feet and Inches 68 70 30 = = = 5 3/4” = 4 8 CO = = = UL WH = = 16 14 12 = = = C / CK DE DW F FE FN FP FT K MU = = = = = = = = = = 6’8” (2032 mm) 7’0” (2134 mm) 3’0” (914 mm) JAMB DEPTH Specialty Hurricane Elevations HANDING In 1⁄8” (3 mm) Increments DOOR THICKNESS 1 3⁄4” (45 mm) 1 3⁄8” (35 mm) Cased Open Frame Profile Hardware FIRE RATING Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO) GAUGE OF STEEL 16 gauge [ 0.053” (1.3 mm)] 14 gauge [ 0.067” (1.7 mm)] 12 gauge [ 0.093” (2.3 mm)] Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products FRAME TYPE 12 • Casing-ready (no backbend) Double Egress: 2 step jambs Drywall (Adjustable Base Anchor) Flush 2” (51 mm) face Double Egress: 3 step jambs Flush 1” (25 mm) face Paladin Thermal Break Drywall (Screw Base Anchor) Multiple Use 2” (51 mm) face • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/09 Home General Information General Information • Nomenclature Door nomenclature Notes: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L LOCK PREP = = = = = = = R L = = Right Hand Left Hand RHR LHR DR DL = = = = Right Hand Reverse Left Hand Reverse Double Door, Right Hand Active Double Door, Left Hand Active F G V N FG FG2 PV/PN = = = = = = = Lights and Louvers Cylindrical Knob (Bored) Lock Prep Cylindrical Lever (Bored) Lock Prep Mortise Lock Prep Mortise Lock Edge Prep Rim Exit Device Vertical Rod Exit Device Special Lock Application HANDING Elevations DOOR TYPE Tornado Full Flush: No Light Half Glass Light Vision Light Narrow Light Full Glass Full Glass 2 Lights Paladin vision/narrow light options NOMINAL DOOR OPENING: HEIGHT Specialty Designated In Feet and Inches 68 = 6’8” (2032 mm) 70 = 7’0” (2134 mm) Hurricane 161 61L 86 86ED RPD VRPD SPCL Doors The following is a brief guide to the nomenclature used by Steelcraft: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L Variations The nomenclature designation shown on this page is for education, example and reference only. 2. Refer to the individual Technical Data Manual sheets to develop options related to the specific door series. 3. Refer to the hardware section of this manual for preps and nomenclature not covered on this sheet. 4. Refer to the lights and louvers section for additional information. Frames 1. Variations Steelcraft doors are described and marked with easy to follow product identification nomenclature. The markings identify the doors by door series, gauge (decimal and metric), fire rating, door thickness, width, height, glass design, hand and lock preps. NOMINAL DOOR OPENING: WIDTH Designated In Feet and Inches 30 = 3’0” (914 mm) DOOR THICKNESS = UL WH = = 20 18 16 14 = = = = 1 3⁄4” (45 mm) Hardware FIRE RATING Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO) GAUGE (Thickness of Metal Face Panel) 20 gauge [ 0.032” (0.8 mm)] 18 gauge [ 0.042” (1.0 mm)] 16 gauge [ 0.053” (1.3 mm)] 14 gauge [ 0.067” (1.7 mm)] DOOR TYPE • 13 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 • Technical data manual • Performance A = Full glass entrance door construction B = Steel stiffened door construction with edge seams CE = Embossed door construction with edge seams H = Hurricane door with edge seams HE = Hurricane door with embossed door panels L = Laminated door construction with edge seams PW = Paladin: tornado door construction with welded hinge and lock seams SL = Laminated door construction with edge seams, non-handed (square edge) SZ = Falcon non handed (square edge) laminated door T = Temperature Rise Rated door construction with edge seams TH = Temperature Rise Rated door with hurricane door construction LF/BF/CF/TF/HF = L, B, CE, T, or H Series with filled hinge and lock edge LW/BW/TW/HW = L, B, T, or H Series with welded hinge and lock edge Fire Rated Products 4 Frames Variations General Information Home General Information • Typical hardware locations Typical hardware locations 3 Hinges (1 1/2 Pair) 9-5/8" (244mm) Doors Lights and Louvers Variations 9-3/4" (248mm) A A Net Door Height Finished Opening Height A Elevations A 39 - 9/16” for cylindrical locks 39 - 3/16” for mortise locks 40-5/16" (1024mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) 10-3/8" (264mm) Tornado Hurricane 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame TYPICAL FRAME ELEVATION 1. Dimension “A” 6’8” (2032 mm) 29 15/16” (760 mm) 7’0” (2134 mm) 31 15/16” (811 mm) 7’2” (2184 mm) 32 15/16” (837 mm) 7’6” (2286 mm) 34 15/16” (887 mm) 3 hinges (1 1/2 pair) are standard on 6’8”, 7’0”, 7’2”, and 7’6” openings 2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with standard 3/4” undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in Table 1. 3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the door. 4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension “A” will vary accordingly. Hardware Specialty Notes Typical Hardware Preps: Table 1 Door opening height TYPICAL DOOR ELEVATION Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and most prep details. 14 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 09/18/14 Home General Information General Information • Typical hardware locations 4 Hinges (2 Pair) Finished Opening B Height Net Door B Height 39 - 9/16” for cylindrical locks 39 - 3/16” for mortise locks B 40-5/16" (1024mm) Elevations 9-5/8" (244mm) 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame TYPICAL FRAME ELEVATION Dimension “B” 6’8” (2032 mm) 19 61/64” (507 mm) 7’0” (2134 mm) 21 19/64” (541 mm) 21 61/64” (558 mm) 23 19/64” (592 mm) 7’8”(2337 mm) 23 61/64” (608 mm) 24 5/8” (625 mm) 8’0” (2438 mm) 25 19/64” (643 mm) 8’2” (2489 mm) 25 61/64” (659 mm) 8’4” (2540 mm) 26 5/8” (676 mm) 8’6” (2591 mm) 27 19/64” (693 mm) 8’8” (2642 mm) 27 61/64” (710 mm) 8’10” (2692 mm) 28 5/8” (727 mm) 9’0” (2743 mm) 29 19/64” (744 mm) 9’2” (2794 mm) 29 61/64” (761 mm) 30 5/8” (778 mm) 9’6” (2896 mm) 31 19/64” (795 mm) 9’8” (2946 mm) 31 61/64” (812 mm) 9’10” (2997 mm) 32 5/8” (829 mm) 10’0” (3048 mm) 33 19/64” (846 mm) 2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with standard 3/4” undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in Table 2. 3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the door. 4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension “B” will vary accordingly. 5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and most prep details. Fire Rated Products 9’4” (2845 mm) 4 hinges (2 pair) are standard on openings over 7’6” in height and up to and including 10’0” in height. Hardware 7’10” (2388 mm) 1. Specialty 7’2” (2184 mm) 7’6” (2286 mm) Notes Tornado Door opening height TYPICAL DOOR ELEVATION Hurricane Typical Hardware Preps: Table 2 Lights and Louvers B Doors B Variations B Frames 9-5/8" (244mm) Variations 9-3/4" (248mm) Performance • 15 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home General Information • Typical hardware locations Frames 9-3/4" (248mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) C Variations Doors Variations 5 Hinges (2 1/2 Pair) C Lights and Louvers C C Finished Opening Height Net Door Height C C 40-5/16" 39 - 9/16” for cylindrical locks 39 - 3/16” for mortise locks C Tornado Hurricane Elevations C Specialty 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame TYPICAL FRAME ELEVATION 1. Dimension “C” 10’2” (3049 mm) 25 15/32” (647 mm) 10’4” (3154 mm) 25 31/32” (660 mm) 10’6” (3200 mm) 26 15/32” (672 mm) 10’8” (3251 mm) 26 31/32” (685 mm) 10’10” (3302 mm) 27 15/32” (698 mm) 11’0” (3353 mm) 27 31/32” (710 mm) Fire Rated Products Hardware Notes Typical Hardware Preps: Table 3 Door opening height TYPICAL DOOR ELEVATION 5 hinges (2 1/2 pair) are standard on openings over 10’0” in height. 2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with standard 3/4” undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in Table 3. 3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the door. 4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension “C” will vary accordingly. Architectural Performance 5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and most prep details. 16 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Home General Information General Information • Typical hardware locations Dutch doors 9-5/8" (244mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) 23-7/8" (606mm) 36-5/8" (937mm) 35-7/8" (905mm) 43-1/8" (1095mm) 10-3/8" (264mm) Elevations 23-7/8" (606mm) 3/16" (5mm) Lights and Louvers Net Door Height Doors E D Finished Opening 19-7/16" Height (494mm) Variations D Frames 9-5/8" (244mm) Variations 9-3/4" (248mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) Tornado DUTCH DOOR ELEVATION Door opening height Dimension “D” Dimension “E” 6’8” (2032 mm) 16 9/16” (421 mm) 35 13/16” (910 mm) 7’0” (2134 mm) 20 9/16” (522 mm) 39 13/16” (1011 mm) 7’2” (2184 mm) 22 9/16” (573 mm) 41 13/16” (1062 mm) 1. 4 hinges (2 pair) are standard on dutch door openings. 2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with standard 3/4” undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in Table 4. 4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimensions “D and E” will vary accordingly. 5. Fire Rated dutch doors: additional locking hardware is required. Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual. Fire Rated Products 6. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and most prep details. Hardware 3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the door. Specialty Notes Typical Hardware Preps: Table 4 Hurricane 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame Performance • 17 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information • Comparative hinge and strike locations E H (D) Hinge Spacing (D) Hinge Spacing B Strike Location Lights and Louvers Elevations Opening Height Comparative hinge and strike locations A Frames Variations Doors Variations General Information Home C G Tornado Notes DOOR & FRAME BACKSETS A. See page 19 for foot/inch Comparative Hinge and Strike Locations for 1 3/4” Doors and Frames with 4 1/2” x 4 1/2”Hinges. B. See page 20 for metric Comparative hinge and strike locations for 45 mm Doors and Frames with 114 mm x 114 mm Hinges. Frame F = Frame Hinge Backset C. Dimensions for hinge and strike locations of the SDI Manufacturers shown on pages 19 and 20 are to the centerline of the preparation. Hinge J Hardware Specialty Hurricane 3/4” (19mm) undercut K = Door Hinge Backset Door Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 1-3/4” (45mm) 18 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information General Information • Comparative hinge and strike locations 1 3/4” Doors and frames with 4 1/2” x 4 1/2” hinges E F Manufacturer Strike Bottom hinge from floor 10 3/8” 8’0” 3 @ 25 19/64” 10 3/8” 5/16” 9 5/8” 9 5/8” 1/8” 1/4” 2 @ 29 15/16” 9 5/8” 1/16” 3/16” 8 7/8” 1/8” 1/4” 7 1/8” 1/8” 1/4” 7 1/8” 1/8” 1/4” 7 1/8” 1/8” 1/4” 7 1/8” 3/32” 7/32” 9 5/8” 2 @ 31 15/16” 8’0” 10 5/16” 3 @ 25 15/16” 9 3/4” 5/16” 11 5/8” 9 9/16” 2 @ 31” 2 @ 33” 9” 2 @ 34” 7’10” 3 @ 25 21/64” 8’0” 3 @ 26” 9” 5/16” 7 1/4” 5/16” 8 1/4” 2 @ 30 1/4” 12 1/4” 2 @ 32 1/4” 2 @ 33 1/4” 40” 11 5/8” 3 @ 24 7/8” 11 1/2” 8’0” 12 1/4” 3 @ 25 1/2” 11 5/8” 2 @ 30 1/4” 7’0” 2 @ 32 1/4” 7’2” 2 @ 33 1/4” 40 5/16” 12 1/4” 7’10” 24 7/8” 24 3/4” 24 7/8” 8’0” 3 @ 25 1/2” 5/16” 7 1/4” 5/16” 11 1/2” 7’0” 12 1/4” 2 @ 32 1/4” 2 @ 33 1/4” 40 5/16” 11 1/2” 7’10” 10 1/4” 3 @ 25 1/2” 9 1/2” 8’0” 12 1/4” 3 @ 25 1/2” 11 1/2” 2 @ 30 1/4” 6’8” 12 1/4” 2 @ 32 1/4” 2 @ 33 1/4” 38” 11 5/8” 7 1/4” 5/16” 7’10” 12 5/16” 3 @ 24 13/16” 11 11/16” 8’0” 12 1/4” 3 @ 25 1/2” 11 5/8” 2 @ 30 1/4” 6’8” 7’0” 2 @ 32 1/4” 12 1/4” 2 @ 33 1/4” 3 @ 24 53/64” 8 ‘0” 3 @ 25 1/2” 6’8” 2 @ 30 1/4” 7’0” 7 1/4” 5/16” 11 1/2” 7 1/8” 1/8” 1/4” 7 1/4” 3/8” 11 1/2” 7 1/8” 1/16” 1/4” Fire Rated Products 40 5/16” 7’10” 7’2” Hardware 7’0” 7’2” Specialty 7 1/4” 2 @ 30 1/4” 6’8” 7’2” Tornado 12 1/8” Hurricane 7’10” 7’2” Elevations 41 13/16” 6’8” 2 @ 32 1/4” 40 5/16” 12 1/4” 2 @ 33 1/4” 7’10” 3 @ 24 53/64” 8’0” 3 @ 25 1/2” Performance Security metal products 9 3/4” 7 9/16” 7’0” Republic to top of door 3 @ 25 15/16” 6’8” Pioneer to door bottom 2 @ 31 15/16” 7’2” Hinge backset Top hinge 12 3/8” 7’2” Inset (reveal) Bottom hinge 8 5/16” 40 5/16” 7’0” Mesker from underside of head Hinge backset 7’10” 6’8” Deansteel Top hinge Lights and Louvers 7’0” Curries 2 @ 32 15/16” 3 @ 24 5/8” 6’8” Ceco K 2 @ 31 15/16” 40 5/16” 7’10” 7’2” J 2 @ 29 15/16” 7’0” Amweld Hinge spacing to 6’8” 7’2” H Door Height Steelcraft G Doors D Variations C Frames B Frame Variations A All dimensions are current at the time of publication. Refer to SDI-129 for updated dimensions. • 19 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/18/19 • Technical data manual • General Information Home General Information • Comparative hinge and strike locations Frames Variations 45 mm doors and frames with 114 mm x 114 mm hinges (metric dimensions) A B C D E Strike Manufacturer Bottom hinge Doors Variations from floor 2032 mm 2184 mm Hinge spacing 264 mm Lights and Louvers Elevations Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products 244 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 244 mm 1.6 mm 4.7 mm 225 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 181 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 181 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 181 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 181 mm 2.4 mm 5.6 mm 211 mm 3 @ 643 mm 192 mm 2438 mm 253 mm 3 @ 643 mm 244 mm 243 mm 244 mm 248 mm 8 mm 295 mm 2 @ 787 mm 2 @ 838 mm 1062 mm 229 mm 2 @ 864 mm 229 mm 8 mm 210 mm 3 @ 643 mm 3 @ 660 mm 2032 mm 311 mm 2 @ 768 mm 2134 mm 311 mm 2 @ 819 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 2388 mm 308 mm 3 @ 632 mm 292 mm 2438 mm 311 mm 3 @ 648 mm 295 mm 1016 mm 2032 mm 2 @ 768 mm 2134 mm 2 @ 819 mm 1024 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 632 mm - 629 mm - 632 mm 295 mm 295 mm 184 mm 184 mm 8 mm 8 mm 295 mm 292 mm 3 @ 648 mm 2032 mm 311 mm 2 @ 768 mm 2134 mm 311 mm 2 @ 819 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 2388 mm 260 mm 3 @ 648 mm 241 mm 2184 mm 1024 mm 292 mm 292 mm 184 mm 8 mm 292 mm 2438 mm 311 mm 3 @ 648 mm 292 mm 2032 mm 311 mm 2 @ 768 mm 295 mm 2134 mm 311 mm 2 @ 819 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 2388 mm 313 mm 3 @ 630 mm 297 mm 2438 mm 311 mm 3 @ 648 mm 295 mm 2184 mm 965 mm 2032 mm Performance 244 mm 2388 mm 2438 mm 2184 mm 8 mm 295 mm 2 @ 819 mm 1024 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 2388 mm 3 @ 631 mm 2438 mm 3 @ 648 mm 2032 mm 2 @ 768 mm 2134 mm 2184 mm 295 mm 184 mm 2 @ 768 mm 2134 mm Security metal products 8 mm 2 @ 811 mm 2388 mm Republic 248 mm 314 mm 1024 mm 2438 mm Pioneer 2 @ 837 mm 2 @ 811 mm 2388 mm Mesker to top of door 2 @ 760 mm 2134 mm Deansteel to door bottom 264 mm 2184 mm 184 mm 8 mm 292 mm 181 mm 3.2 mm 6.4 mm 184 mm 10 mm 292 mm 181 mm 1.6 mm 6.4 mm 2 @ 819 mm 1024 mm 311 mm 2 @ 845 mm 2388 mm 3 @ 630 mm 2438 mm 3 @ 648 mm All dimensions are current at the time of publication. Refer to SDI-129 for updated dimensions. 20 • Hinge backset Top hinge 2134 mm 2184 mm Inset (reveal) Bottom hinge 3 @ 643 mm 2032 mm Curries from underside of head Hinge backset 264 mm 2184 mm K 3 @ 625 mm 2438 mm Ceco to Top hinge 2032 mm 2184 mm J 2 @ 811 mm 1024 mm 2388 mm Amweld H 2 @ 760 mm 2134 mm Steelcraft G Door Height Architectural F Frame • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/18/19 Home General Information FN Series 1" flush face.................................................................29 K Series drywall............................................................................ 49 MU Series multi-use....................................................................33 C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend)................53 Elevations About the product............................................................................... 49 Installation.............................................................................................. 49 Features and benefits........................................................................ 49 Specification compliance................................................................ 49 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 49 Typical wall construction and anchoring types..................... 49 Standard construction......................................................................50 Standard hardware and corner conditions................................51 Anchoring and installation notes..................................................52 Tornado Specialty About the product............................................................................... 53 Installation.............................................................................................. 53 Features and benefits........................................................................ 53 Specification compliance................................................................ 53 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 53 Typical wall construction and anchoring types..................... 53 Standard construction...................................................................... 54 Standard hardware and corner conditions.............................. 55 Anchoring and installation notes................................................. 56 Hardware About the product................................................................................33 Installation...............................................................................................33 Features and benefits.........................................................................33 Specification compliance.................................................................33 Fire ratings................................................................................................33 Typical wall construction and anchoring types......................33 Standard construction...................................................................... 34 Standard hardware and corner conditions.............................. 35 Anchoring and installation notes................................................. 36 Lights and Louvers About the product............................................................................... 29 Installation.............................................................................................. 29 Features and benefits........................................................................ 29 Specification compliance................................................................ 29 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 29 Typical wall construction and anchoring types..................... 29 Standard construction...................................................................... 30 Standard hardware and corner conditions................................31 Anchoring and installation notes..................................................32 About the product............................................................................... 45 Installation.............................................................................................. 45 Features and benefits........................................................................ 45 Specification compliance................................................................ 45 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 45 Typical wall construction and anchoring types..................... 45 Standard construction...................................................................... 46 Standard hardware and corner conditions...............................47 Anchoring and installation notes.................................................48 Hurricane DW Series drywall....................................................................... 45 About the product................................................................................25 Installation...............................................................................................25 Features and benefits.........................................................................25 Specification compliance.................................................................25 Fire ratings................................................................................................25 Typical wall construction and anchoring types......................25 Standard construction...................................................................... 26 Standard hardware and corner conditions............................... 27 Anchoring and installation notes................................................. 28 Doors F Series flush...................................................................................25 About the product................................................................................ 41 Installation............................................................................................... 41 Features and benefits......................................................................... 41 Specification compliance................................................................. 41 Fire ratings................................................................................................ 41 Typical wall construction and anchoring types...................... 41 Standard construction...................................................................... 42 Standard hardware and corner conditions.............................. 43 Anchoring and installation notes................................................. 44 Variations DE Series double egress.............................................................41 Sizes and performance......................................................................22 Usage and application.......................................................................22 Steel frames............................................................................................23 How they are supplied.......................................................................23 Job site storage......................................................................................23 Installation...............................................................................................23 Profile terminology...............................................................................23 Profile variations....................................................................................23 Anchors.....................................................................................................24 Frames General information..................................................................... 22 Variations Frames FE Series double egress............................................................. 37 Performance • 21 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Fire Rated Products About the product................................................................................37 Installation...............................................................................................37 Features and benefits.........................................................................37 Specification compliance.................................................................37 Fire ratings................................................................................................37 Typical wall construction and anchoring types......................37 Standard construction...................................................................... 38 Standard hardware and corner conditions.............................. 39 Anchoring and installation notes.................................................40 Frames Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Frames • General information General information Steelcraft framing systems are designed to fit virtually all construction requirements for commercial and institutional building applications. Their construction, durability and flexibility have been proven throughout the world in both operation and physical testing of all types. The F, FN, FE, DE, MU and C Series frames are designed for installation as part of the wall framing sequence, and installed in interior and exterior applications. When installed, this frame series will either wrap or butt up against the wall construction. Anchoring will be either into the masonry wall, or to the stud wall framing systems. Note C Series is for wrapping stud walls only. The DW, K and CK Series frames are designed for interior application and for installation in rough openings after the wall is erected and finished. They can be installed in minutes and can be relocated without damage to the frame. When installed, this frame series will wrap the wall construction. Anchorage will be compression fit to the stud systems. F, FN, and C Series frame profiles (install as part of wall framing sequence) F FN Double rabbet Elevations Tornado Hurricane To help simplify the use, selection and specification of Steelcraft framing systems, the following guidelines for base material selection can be used: • 16 gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)]: for Heavy Duty Commercial and Institutional applications with high use. • 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)]: for Extra Heavy Duty Commercial and Institutional applications with the potential of very high use. • 12 gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)]: for Maximum Duty Commercial and Institutional applications with extremely high use (N/A for C and CK Series). Material Selection: In addition to the thickness of base material, commercial quality material types are supplied as specified in ANSI/SDI A250.8 Products > General > Steel Specifications, and are identified by Steelcraft as follows: • • Cold rolled (CRS or CR) for normal/interior openings. • Stainless for exterior, sterile, or special architectural openings. See Specialty > Stainless in this tech data. Galvannealed (GALV) for exterior openings or for interior openings with high humidity / when requiring rust prohibitive properties. Cased open for double swing Architectural 22 • C Casing-ready (welded) MU MU Double rabbet Masonry Single rabbet (narrow double) typ JD < 3 3/4" Cased open FE and DE Series double egress frame construction (for cross corridors) FE Head FE Jambs DE Jambs FE Double egress DE Head DE Double egress for swing clear hinges DW and K Series frame profiles (install in rough openings after wall is built) DW DW DW K K K Double rabbet Single rabbet (narrow double) typ JD < 3 3/4" Cased open Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Material gauge: the following material thicknesses are available: Single rabbet typ JD < 4 1/2" FN MU All framing systems are manufactured and supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as published in ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Usage and application F MU Series frame profiles (multi-use application) MU has backbend returns, but unlike DW/K, has no compression anchors and can be used in masonry or drywall applications Sizes and performance Special size products are available to meet the unique construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the Architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those requirements. F • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 CK Casing-ready (knock-down) Home General Information Frames • General information Steel frames Profile terminology Soffit Rabbet Doors Stop Rabbet 3. Head: horizontal frame member which connects the jambs. Variations Jamb Depth Frames 2. Strike jamb: vertical frame member into which the door latches. [For double doors (pairs), there is no strike jamb, but there are two hinge jambs]. Variations Three sided steel frames are furnished in three pieces (two jambs The frame profile has specific terminology related to each and a head) which are anchored to the wall systems. The most surface. Their jamb depth describes the frame size required. common 3 sided frame components are: It is critical that the throat opening of the frame be compatible with the wall to which it will be attached. 1. Hinge jamb: vertical frame member on which the door is hinged. [For double doors (pairs), there are two hinge jambs Double rabbet: standard profile and no strike jamb]. How they are supplied • • Backbend Back Bend Returns Are Provided on MU, DW, and K Series Frames Throat Opening Backbend Profile variations Steel frames are supplied standard as double rabbet. To accommodate various application needs, the frame profile (in any frame series) can change. Some of the typical variations are as follows: Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Proper frame installation is critical for reliable door and hardware functionality. To insure proper fit, function and reliability, install all frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11 and HMMA 840. Tornado Installation Hurricane Set-Up and welded: Prior to arriving at the job site, the 3 sided frame (with factory miters) is assembled (at the Single rabbet: Jamb depths below 4 1/2" (114 mm) distributor’s fabrication location, or by Steelcraft). The miters are single rabbet due to the dimensional limitations are welded (in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 [SDI 100]), of the profile. Some specifications will require single finished and supplied to the job site ready for installation. rabbet profiles on frames over 4 1/2" (114 mm) in Welded frames are shipped to the job site with temporary jamb depth. shipping bars attached. The temporary shipping bars must be removed prior to installation. When installing frames, Profile as shown will vary on MU, DW, and K Series frames, refer the temporary shipping bars must not be used as spreader to the appropriate data sheets. bars or installation bracing. Cased open: Used for double acting doors (swinging in both directions), sliding doors, bi-fold doors or Job site storage frames used to close-off an opening in a wall when a Frames shall be stored under cover on 4" (101.6 mm) wood sills, door is not required. on the floor, in a manner to avoid contact with moisture, and to Double egress: This is a frame specifically designed prevent rust and damage. Only use vented plastic or canvas. The for cross corridor applications where traffic control is use of no-vented materials, create a humidity chamber, which required. This frame is not available in the Drywall promotes blistering and corrosion. Assembled frames shall be Series (DW and K) or Multi-Use Series (MU). stored in a vertical position, five (5) units maximum in a stack. Provide a 1/4" (6.3 mm) space between the frames to provide air circulation. Elevations Knock Down (KD): Frames are supplied in 3 pieces for assembly prior to installation at the job site by the installing contractor. This is an economical method of supplying the frames, and at the job site, there is less space consumed in staging the products, easier job site movement of material, and, usually less damage to the frame prior to installation. Note 12 gauge frames are not available as knock down. Face Lights and Louvers The connecting corners of the 3 piece frame include precision factory die miters with interlocking tabs and corner clips. The corner miters are specially designed to insure a tight closed corner connection when assembled and installed properly. There are two methods of furnishing 3 sided frames to the job site: Performance • 23 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • General information Frames Variations Typical Frame Frames must be anchored to the applicable wall construction. Wall construction at door openings must be of sufficient construction to support commercial or institutional grade steel doors and frames. Refer to the appropriate frame data sheets since anchor types will vary with frame constructions and noted in this manual. Basic guidelines is as follows: Variations Flush frames: • Base anchors: one located at the bottom of each jamb Lights and Louvers Doors Head Anchors • Jamb anchors: Locate anchors near each hinge location in both hinge and strike jambs. Transom frames require additional anchors above the top hinge. • Head anchors: For wide frame openings usually over 60" in width, an anchor located in the center of the frame head is recommended Drywall frames: Base anchors: two (2) located at the bottom of each jamb Jamb anchors: Drywall frame includes an adjustable compression anchor near the top of each jamb Tornado Hinge Jamb Strike Jamb Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations • • 24 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 5/31/15 Home General Information Frames • F Series flush Die-mitered corner connections: Die-mitered corner connection at the head and jamb insure an attractive, tight and closed mitered connection. The miter includes 4 corner tabs designed with concealed connection eliminating the need for continuous profile welding. 2. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. 5. Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specification compliance 1. Fire ratings The F Series flush frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. Tornado Installation Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft F Series flush frames meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Hurricane F Series 3 sided flush frames are designed to meet requirements for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They are installed in both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. These frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation or welded for installation as a complete unit. Elevations About the product 1. Lights and Louvers 3. Adjustable base anchors allow for installation adjustment when the floor is not level. Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft F Series flush frames offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations F Series flush 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Profile Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors F16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit F14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor F14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry F14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit F12 12 Gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor F12 12 Gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry F12 12 Gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit Fire Rated Products F16 F16 Hardware Typical wall construction and anchoring types Performance • 25 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • F Series flush Frames Variations Standard construction Elevation 2" 2" (50 mm) (50 mm) Standard Double Rabbet Frame 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width *½" (13 mm) 9 3/4" (248 mm) Elevations Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement Throat Opening HINGE Lights and Louvers Doors Variations 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Equal *½" (13 mm) Finished Opening Height 2" (50 mm) 5⁄8” (16 mm) ¾” (19 mm) for F12 Opening Width Single Rabbet Frame STRIKE HINGE *½" (13 mm) Tornado Hurricane Varies Jamb Depth Varies Jamb Depth Throat Opening Equal Specialty 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) *½" (13 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) HINGE 2" (50 mm) Hardware 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Opening Width * 7⁄16" (11 mm) on 5 ¾" frame depth Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series F16 F14 F12 Single Pair 5'0" x 11'0" (1524 mm x 3353 mm) 4'0" x 8'0" (1 219 mm x 2438 mm) Jamb depth availability(profile) Single rabbet Double rabbet Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Return Standard Min. Max. Min. Max. 10'0" x 11'0" (2439 mm x 3353 mm) 3" (76 mm) 20" (508 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 20" (508 mm) 2" (50 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4)concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs 8'0" x 8'0" (2438 mm x 2438 mm) N/A N/A 4 3/4" (121 mm) 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (50 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) Square cut for welded corners * Except 5 3/4" (146 mm) depth, which is 7/16" (11 mm) N/A - Not Available 12 gauge standard profile is equal rabbet 26 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Frames • F Series flush Standard hardware and corner conditions 4 7/8" (124 mm) 5" (127 mm) Optional Doors Welded Corner Variations 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7/8" Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Lights and Louvers 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. Optional 4" (102 mm) Face Head Detail Elevations 2. All F Series frames are supplied standard with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. 3. F Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. 4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended for all exterior applications. Tornado 6. For KD Corner and optional 4" Head, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly (as shown). 7. F Series frames with 4" heads are mainly used in masonry applications when 2" face heads do not match course blocking. Specialty 8. For reinforcement requirements for automatic operators, see "High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series" on page 79. Frame options Frame profile Series F16 F14 Double rabbet Typically for walls less than 3 3/4" (95 mm) thick. Minimum walls thickness 2" (51 mm) N/A KD (Knock-down) SUA (Set-up & weld) Single rabbet Double rabbet 4" (102 mm) heads Single rabbet Double rabbet 3 interlocking corner tabs per factory die-miter. See the KD Corner Detail 4 interlocking corner tabs per factory die-miter. See the KD Corner Detail Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available when specified for KD or SUA applications. N/A N/A Standard Saw Cut and welded, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) For use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. N/A - Not Available Fire Rated Products F12 Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. Corner connections Hardware Single rabbet Hurricane 5. 12 gauge flush frames, F12, are standard equal rabbet profiles with 3/4" stops. Performance • 27 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • F Series flush Frames Variations Doors Variations Standard Anchoring Wire Masonry Anchor Existing Wall Anchor Adjustable Base Anchor Attached with S.M. screws furnished Maximum adjustment 1 3/8" (35 mm) below frame Lights and Louvers 3/16" (5 mm) dia. wire Anchoring and installation notes Anchor for Wood Stud Partition Elevations 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted frames: Tornado Hurricane F16 and F14 Series commercial and Institutional frames are supplied standard with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. 1. Lock-in Anchor • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105. • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting. • Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. Specialty 4. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Framing applications Series Steel type Non-Galvannealed 2 Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware F16 Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 F14 F12 Galvannealed 3 Galvannealed 3 Building type Institutional and Commercial Opening Interior Mainly Exterior Interior Institutional and Commercial Mainly Exterior Institutional and Commercial Interior and exterior 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality cold rolled steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation 5 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit 28 • Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner 5 Heavy to extra heavy duty Extra heavy to maximum duty Maximum duty N/A Applications Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Maximum traffic building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Frames • FN Series 1" flush face Narrow 1" (25 mm) face provides a very slim appearance to the door opening. 2. Die-mitered corner connections Die-mitered corner connection at the head and jamb insure an attractive, tight and closed mitered connection. The miter includes 4 corner tabs designed with concealed connection eliminating the need for continuous profile welding. 4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. 5. Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. 1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FN18, FN16 and FN14 Series flush narrow 1" (25 mm) face frames meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings The FN Series flush narrow 1" (25 mm) face frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual for particular listings. Typical wall construction and anchoring types FN Series 1" (25 mm) flush face frame applications are designed to meet the aesthetic needs of a very slender face dimension, and still maintain the functionality of the conventional flush framing systems. Wall construction Typical wall anchors 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor FN16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FN16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit FN14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor FN14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FN14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit Performance Steel thickness FN16 Fire Rated Products Profile Hardware 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 1. Tornado Installation Specification compliance Hurricane FN Series 3 sided flush narrow 1" (25 mm) face frames are designed to meet requirements for light to extra heavy duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings where a slim face profile is required. They are installed in both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. These frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation or welded for installation as a complete unit. Elevations About the product Lights and Louvers 3. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft FN Series 1" (25 mm) flush face frames offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability. Features can vary depending on the steel thickness of the frame: Frames Features and benefits Variations FN Series 1" flush face • 29 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • FN Series 1" flush face Frames Doors Variations Variations Standard construction Elevation 1" (25 mm) Standard Double Rabbet Frame 1" (25 mm) Finished Opening Width 1" (25 mm) *½" (13 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) 9 ¾" (248 mm) Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement Lights and Louvers HINGE Varies Throat Opening Jamb Depth 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Equal Elevations *½" (13 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) Finished Opening Height 1" (25 mm) STRIKE Tornado * 7⁄16" (11 mm) on 5 ¾" frame depth Note: FN Series 3 sided flush narrow 1" (25 mm) face frames are available as double rabbet only. 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Equal Specialty Hurricane HINGE Opening Width Hardware HINGE 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series FN16 FN14 Single Pair 4'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" (1219 mm x 2439 mm) (2439 mm x 2439 mm) 4'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" (1219 mm x 2439 mm) (2439 mm x 2439 mm) Jamb depth availability (profile) Single rabbet Double rabbet Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Returns Standard Min. Max. Min. Max. N/A N/A 4 1/2" (114 mm) 20" (508 mm) 1" (25 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4)concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs N/A 4 1/2" (114 mm) 20" (508 mm) 1" (25 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4)concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs N/A N/A = Not Available 30 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/12 Home General Information Frames • FN Series 1" flush face Standard hardware and corner conditions 4 7/8" (124 mm) 5" (127 mm) Optional Doors Welded Corner Variations 4 7/8" (114 mm) Standard KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7/8" Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Lights and Louvers 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. Elevations 2. All FN Series frames are supplied standard with masonry wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. 3. FN Series frames are to be installed as part of the framing sequence. 4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions, the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended for all exterior applications. 5. For KD Corner, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly. Tornado Series Single rabbet FN14 Double rabbet N/A Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater N/A Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater KD (Knock-down) Single rabbet Double rabbet N/A 4 interlocking corner tabs per factory die-miter. See the "KD Corner Detail N/A 4 interlocking corner tabs per factory die-miter. See the "KD Corner Detail SUA (Set-up & weld) Single rabbet Double rabbet N/A Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) N/A Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Specialty FN16 Corner connections Frame profile Hurricane Frame options Hardware N/A = Not Available Fire Rated Products Performance • 31 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • FN Series 1" flush face Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring Wire Masonry Anchor Elevations Tornado Weld-in Base Anchor 3/16" (5 mm) dia. wire Anchoring and installation notes FN16 Series narrow 1" (25 mm) Face frames are supplied standard with masonry wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. 1. Hurricane Existing Masonry Anchor 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Installation caution notice: Grouted frames: • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of the frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105. • • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. 4. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. 5. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Framing applications Specialty Series Steel type Non-Galvannealed 2 FN16 Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 Galvannealed 3 Institutional and commercial Institutional and commercial Opening Interior Mainly exterior Interior Mainly exterior 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality cold rolled steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation 5 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner 5 Heavy to extra heavy duty Extra heavy to maximum duty Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware FN14 Building type 32 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Applications Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Home General Information Frames • MU Series multi-use Die-mitered corner connections of the MU Series multiuse flush frame corners lock together once the frame is installed. The tab/lock design: a. prevents the head from rising b. keeps the head and jamb members in alignment Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft MU Series multi-use flush frames offer the following unique features which enhance long-term functionality and durability. Features can vary depending on the steel thickness of the frame: Frames Features and benefits Variations MU Series multi-use c. keeps the miter tight 2. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight 0.180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 3. Adjustable base anchors allow for installation adjustment when the floor is not level. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Specification compliance 1. Overall frame construction for Steelcraft MU Series multi-use flush frames meet the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings MU Series multi-use flush frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Profile Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors Lock-in stud anchor MU16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud MU16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry MU16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing Masonry Bolted through soffit 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Lock-in stud anchor 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry MU14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through soffit Fire Rated Products MU14 MU14 Hardware Typical wall construction and anchoring types Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 5. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Tornado Installation 4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. Hurricane Steelcraft’s MU Series multi-use flush frames are designed for light to extra heavy duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They can be installed in both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. They have a jamb profile similar to the DW frames, but are designed to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be specified and/or supplied as either KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation, or welded for installation as a complete unit. Elevations About the product 1. Lights and Louvers d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to secure miter. Performance • 33 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • MU Series multi-use Frames Doors Elevation 2" (50 mm) Standard Double Rabbet Frame Finished Opening Width 2" (50 mm) 2" (50 mm) Variations Variations Standard construction ½" (13 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) 9 ¾" (248 mm) Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement Throat Opening Elevations Lights and Louvers HINGE 5⁄16" (8 mm) Equal 2" (50 mm) STRIKE Tornado Hurricane Opening Width Single Rabbet Frame for frame depths 4 3⁄8" and narrower ½" (13 mm) 9⁄16" Specialty 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Varies Jamb Depth Throat Opening 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) HINGE Hardware Fire Rated Products 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) Finished Opening Height Equal Performance Jamb Depth ½" (13 mm) HINGE Architectural Varies ½" (13 mm) 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) 2" (50 mm) Opening Width Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series Single Pair 4’0" x 9’0" 8'0" x 9'0" MU16 (1219 mm x 2743 mm) (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 4’0" x 9’0" 8'0" x 9'0" MU14 (1219 mm x 2743 mm) (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 34 • Jamb depth availability(profile) Narrow double rabbet Double rabbet Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Returns Standard Min. Max. Min. Max. 3 1/4" 4 3/8" (83 mm) (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 20" (508 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED with interlocking Soffit tab 3 1/4" 4 3/8" (83 mm) (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 20" (508 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED with interlocking Soffit tab • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/29/18 Home General Information Frames • MU Series multi-use Standard hardware and corner conditions 4 7/8" (124 mm) Standard 5" (127 mm) Optional Lights and Louvers 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. 3. MU Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. 4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended for all exterior applications. Series MU14 Double rabbet Typically for walls less than 3 3/4" (95 mm) thick. Minimum walls thickness = 2" (51 mm) Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. Single rabbet Double rabbet Factory Die-Mitered, Soffit Tab included. Corner clip assembly screws required. SUA (Set-up & weld) Single rabbet Double rabbet Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 4" (102 mm) Heads Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face jambs. Corner Clip assembly screws required. Hardware N/A - Not Available Specialty MU16 Narrow double rabbet Corner connections KD (Knock-down) Tornado Frame options Hurricane 5. MU Series with 4" heads are used mainly in masonry applications when 2" face heads do not match block coursing, or in drywall applications when installed in close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed with a 4" head. Elevations 2. All MU Series frames are supplied standard with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Frame profile Doors Optional 4" (102 mm) Head Detail Variations 4 7/8" (124 mm) Standard KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7/8" (124 mm) Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Fire Rated Products Performance • 35 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • MU Series multi-use Frames Variations Doors Wire Masonry Anchor Existing Masonry Anchor Maximum adjustment 1 3/8" (35 mm) below frame See note #6. 3/16" (5 mm) dia. wire Anchoring and installation notes Anchor for Stud Partition 1. Elevations Lock-in anchor MU16 Series Multi-use flush frames are supplied standard with masonry wire, or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement, and installation flexibility. 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Installation caution notice: Grouted frames: Tornado Hurricane Adjustable Base Anchor Attached with S. M. screws (furnished) Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in the filed with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105. • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting. • Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. 4. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. Specialty 5. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Hardware 6. When using Standard Exiting Wall Anchors the anchor must be field modified (notched) to provide clearance for the backbend return. Framing applications Series Non-Galvannealed 2 Performance Fire Rated Products MU16 Architectural Steel type Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 MU14 Galvannealed 3 Building type Institutional and Commercial Institutional and Commercial Opening Interior Mainly Exterior Interior Mainly Exterior 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality carbon steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation 5 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit 36 • Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner 5 Heavy to extra heavy duty Extra heavy to maximum duty Applications Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Frames • FE Series double egress Die-mitered corner connections Die-mitered corner connection at the head and jamb insure an attractive, tight and closed mitered connection. The miter includes 4 corner tabs designed with concealed connection eliminating the need for continuous profile welding. 2. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. Lights and Louvers 3. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. 4. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specification compliance 1. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings 1. Specialty Installation Tornado The FE Series double egress frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Hurricane The FE Series double egress frames are designed to meet requirements for heavy to extra heavy duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They are installed at interior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. These frames can be specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation or welded for installation as a complete unit. If clear opening width for cross corridor applications is critical, refer to the DE Series Frame. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FE16 and FE14 Series double egress frames meet and exceed the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Elevations About the product Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft FE Series double egress frames offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations FE Series double egress Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Hardware 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Typical wall construction and anchoring types Wall construction Typical wall anchors 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in stud anchor FE16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FE16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through door rabbet FE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in stud anchor FE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through door rabbet • 37 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • Performance Steel thickness FE16 Fire Rated Products Profile General Information Home Frames • FE Series double egress Frames Variations Standard construction 1 3⁄8" (35 mm) 5⁄8" (16mm) HINGE Variations Doors 9 ¾" (248 mm) Lights and Louvers 2 5⁄8" (67mm) Elevation 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width Optional 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7mm)] Closer Reinforcement Jamb Detail 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) *½" (13 mm) Equal Equal Finished Opening Height Throat Opening 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) HINGE Jamb Depth Equal Elevations Equal *½" (13 mm) 1 3⁄8" (35 mm) Tornado 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Head Detail Throat Opening *½" (13 mm) bottom of frame *½" (13 mm) 2" (50 mm) Specialty Hurricane Finished Opening Width 2" (50 mm) HINGE Hardware 5⁄8" (16 mm) 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) finished opening width Jamb Depth * 7/16" (11mm) on 5 ¾" frame depth overall frame width Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the dimension from frame door rabbet to the opposite rabbet. Note: For FE and DE Series double egress frames is 1/8" (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width. Example: 6'0" (1829 mm) head = 71 7/8" net width in lieu of the standard 72". Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Frame sizing options Series Maximum opening size Pair 8'0" x 10'0" FE16 (2439 mm x 3048 mm) 8'0" x 10'0" FE14 (2439 mm x 3048 mm) Jamb depth availability (profile) 3 step jambs x 2 step heads Minimum Maximum 4 3/4" (121 mm) Non-label 14" 5 3/4" (146 mm) Labeled (356 mm) 4 3/4" (121 mm) Non-label 5 3/4" (146 mm) Labeled 14" (356 mm) Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Stop Returns Standard 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4) concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4) concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs Face 1 3/8" (35 mm) on narrow side. 2 5/8" (67 mm) on wide side. 1 3/8" (35 mm) on narrow side. 2 5/8" (67 mm) on wide side. *Except 5 3/4" (146 mm) depth, which is 7/16" (11 mm) 38 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Frames • FE Series double egress Standard hardware and corner conditions 5" (127 mm) Optional Doors 4 7/8" (124 mm) Standard Variations Welded Corner Frames KD Corner Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Lights and Louvers 7 Gauge [0.167" (4.2 mm)] Hinge Reinforcement 2. All FE Series frames are supplied standard with masonry and wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Weld-in stud anchors are an optional add. Elevations Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. 3. FE Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. 6. FE Series with 4" heads are used mainly in masonry applications when 2" face heads do not match block coursing. 7. For reinforcement requirements for automatic operators, see "High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series" on page 79. Specialty Frame options Corner connections Series Frame profile Tornado 5. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward,during assembly (as shown). Hurricane 4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions, the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended for all exterior applications. 4" (102 mm) Heads SUA (Set-up & weld) FE16 Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. KD assembly, slots, and tabs, must be assembled by distributor prior to installation. Available from Steelcraft when specified in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available welded only (welded from factory or by distributor/no KD assembly). FE14 Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. KD assembly, slots, and tabs, must be assembled by distributor prior to installation. Available from Steelcraft when specified in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available welded only (welded from factory or by distributor/no KD assembly). Hardware KD (Knock-down) Fire Rated Products N/A - Not Available Performance • 39 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • FE Series double egress Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchroing Wire Masonry Anchor Existing Masonry Anchor Steel Stud Anchor Anchoring and installation notes FE Series double egress frames are supplied standard with masonry wire and fixed base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement, and installation flexibility. Optional weld-in jamb anchors are available as an add. 1. Tornado Hurricane Elevations 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Installation caution notice: Grouted frames: • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105. • • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting. Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. 4. Special frame anchorage: Frame anchor details shown on this sheet are applicable for Double Egress frames with 2" (50 mm) faces. Anchor details will vary with frame profile changes. 5. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Series FE16 FE14 Steel type Building type Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner 5 Non-Galvannealed 2 Institutional and Commercial Heavy to extra heavy duty High humidity and/or weather exposure Institutional and Commercial Extra heavy to maximum duty High humidity and/or weather exposure Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 Galvannealed 3 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality carbon steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation 5 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit Applications Typical building conditions Typical building conditions Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Framing applications 40 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Frames • DE Series double egress Die-mitered corner connection insures tight fit and assembly. Frame must be welded by prior to installation. 2. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 3. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. 5. Unique design to meet clear width corridor applications. Specification compliance 1. Fire ratings Installation 1. Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Tornado The DE Series double egress frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Hurricane The DE Series double egress frames meet all the design parameters of conventional double egress frames and is specified when cross corridor openings have the additional requirements of maximized clear opening width. The unique design of the DE Series Frame allows for the use of swing clear hinges. This must be considered if your local building code has a minimum clear opening width requirement, typically 44". 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Elevations About the product Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft DE16 and DE14 Series double egress frames meet and exceed the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Lights and Louvers 4. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft DE Series double egress frames offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations DE Series double egress 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Hardware Typical wall construction and anchoring types Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors DE16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in stud anchor DE16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry DE16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through door rabbet DE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in stud anchor DE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry DE14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Bolted through door rabbet Fire Rated Products Profile Performance • 41 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • DE Series double egress Frames Variations Standard construction 2" (50 mm) 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width Optional 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Closer Reinforcement HINGE Doors Variations 9 ¾" (248 mm) Lights and Louvers 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) Elevation 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) Jamb Detail 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) Equal * ½" (13 mm) Finished Opening Height Jamb Depth Throat Opening HINGE 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Equal Elevations * ½" (13mm) 2" (50 mm) HINGE Head Detail bottom of frame Corridor Width *½" (13 mm) Throat Opening *½" (13 mm) Tornado Hurricane 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) 2" (50 mm) 2 5⁄8” (67 mm) Specialty Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) Fire Rated Products Clear Corridor Width Hardware 5⁄8" (16 mm) * 7/16" (11 mm) on 5 ¾" frame depth Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the dimension from frame door rabbet to the opposite rabbet. Note: For FE and DE Series double egress frames is 1/8" (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width. Example: 6'0" (1829 mm) head = 71 7/8" net width in lieu of the standard 72". Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series Pair Performance Jamb Depth Jamb depth availability(profile) 2 step jambs x 2 step heads Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Face Stop Returns Standard 2" (50 mm) on narrow side. 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) Must be welded prior to installation 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2"* (13 mm) Must be welded prior to installation Min. Max. 5 3/4" (146 mm) 14" (356 mm) 2 5/8" (67 mm) on wide side. 14" (356 mm) 2 5/8" (67 mm) on wide side. DE16 8'0" x 10'0" (2439 mm x 3048 mm) Labeled or Non-label DE14 8'0" x 10'0" (2439 mm x 3048 mm) Labeled or Non-label 5 3/4" (146 mm) 2" (50 mm) on narrow side. Architectural *Except 5 3/4" (146 mm) depth, which is 7/16" (11 mm) 42 • Corners • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/17/15 Home General Information Frames • DE Series double egress Standard hardware and corner conditions Doors 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard Variations 7 Gauge [0.167" (4.2mm)] Hinge Reinforcement Frames Welded Corner Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 5" (127 mm) Optional Lights and Louvers Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. 2. Due to the configuration of narrow hinge jambs mating to wider heads, DE Series frames are supplied set-up and welded only. Swing clear hinge 4. DE Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. 5. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Tornado 7. Swing-Clear hinges used with DE Series double egress 2 Step hinge jambs will provide additional cross-corridor width between jambs: • • • removes the thickness of the door from the opening, even when at 90° Hurricane 6. Tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly (as shown). Elevations 3. All DE Series frames are supplied standard with masonry wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Optional weld-in jamb anchors are available as an add. changes the Pivot Point of the door can increase the clear opening width by 5 1/4" (133 mm) Corner connections Frame profile DE16 Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater DE14 Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater 4" (102 mm) Heads KD (Knock-down) SUA (Set-up & weld) NOT AVAILABLE FOR KD INSTALLATION Available from Steelcraft when specified in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Available when specified. Must be welded prior to installation Available from Steelcraft when specified in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) Available when specified. Must be welded prior to installation Die-mitered corners, must be welded by distributor prior to installation NOT AVAILABLE FOR KD INSTALLATION Die-mitered corners, must be welded by distributor prior to installation Hardware Series Specialty Frame options Note: Hinge Jambs for DE Series double egress frames are single rabbet sections and are a smaller jamb depth than the head. 2. The jamb depth of the hinge jambs is shown in the chart below. 3. ALWAYS ORDER DE Series frames BY THE FRAME DEPTH OF THE HEAD. Steelcraft will manufacture the jambs as required. Head Jamb Throat opening Jamb depth Throat opening 5 3/4" (146 mm) 4 7/8" 1 (124 mm1) 3 27/32" (98 mm) 2 31/32" (75 mm) 6 3/4" (171 mm) 5 3/4" (146 mm) 4 11/32" (110 mm) 3 11/32" (85 mm) 7 3/4" (197 mm) 6 3/4" (171 mm) 4 27/32" (123 mm) 3 27/32" (98 mm) 8 3/4" (222 mm) 7 3/4" (197 mm) 5 11/32" (136 mm) 4 11/32" (110 mm) Performance Frame depth 15 3/4" (146 mm) jamb depth frame has 7/16" (11 mm) backbends. All others have 1/2" (13 mm) backbends. • 43 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • Fire Rated Products 1. General Information Home Frames • DE Series double egress Frames Variations Doors Wire Masonry Anchor Fixed Base Steel Stud Anchor Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring Anchoring and installation notes Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations 1. DE Series double egress frames are supplied standard with masonry wire and fixed base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Optional weld-in jamb anchors are available as an add. 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Installation caution notice: Grouted frames: • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105. • • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting. Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. 4. Special frame anchorage: Frame anchor details shown on this sheet are applicable for Double Egress frames with 2" (50 mm) faces. Anchor details will vary with frame profile changes. 5. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Framing applications Series DE14 Building type Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner 4 Non-Galvannealed 2 Institutional and Commercial Heavy to extra heavy duty N/A High humidity and/or weather exposure Institutional and Commercial Extra heavy to maximum duty N/A High humidity and/or weather exposure Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 Galvannealed 3 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality carbon steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation Applications Typical building conditions Typical building conditions N/A = Not available Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware DE16 Steel type 44 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Frames • DW Series drywall Quick and flexible installation of Steelcraft’s DW Series Drywall frames facilitates their installation in minutes and they can be relocated without damage to the frame. 2. Die-mitered corner connections of the DW Series Drywall Frame corners lock together once the frame is installed. The tab/lock design: a. prevents the head from rising Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft DW Series Drywall frames include unique features which enhance long-term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations DW Series drywall b. keeps the head and jamb members in alignment d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are included to secure miter. 3. Adjustable base anchors an allow for attachment directly to the wall sill runner, and facilitates installation adjustment when the floor is not level. 1. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. 1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft DW Series Drywall frames meet and exceed the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings The DW Series Drywall frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Profile Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors DW16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud Compression jamb anchor(s) with adjustable Base Anchor Systems DW14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud Compression jamb anchor(s) with adjustable Base Anchor Systems Hardware Typical wall construction and anchoring types Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Specification compliance Tornado Installation 5. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Hurricane Steelcraft’s DW Series Drywall frames are designed for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They can be installed in rough openings after the wall has been constructed and finished. They are installed in virtually all types of buildings in all interior drywall partition locations using baseboards. To accommodate the installation of the DW Series frames on finished drywall construction, they are supplied with a KD (knock-down) corner for quick installation. Elevations 4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. About the product Lights and Louvers c. keeps the miter tight Fire Rated Products Performance • 45 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • DW Series drywall Frames Doors Elevation 2" 9 ¾" (248 mm) Standard Double Rabbet Frame 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width 2" (50 mm) (50 mm) Variations Variations Standard construction ½" (13 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement Throat Opening Varies Jamb Depth Lights and Louvers HINGE 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄16" (8mm) ½" (13 mm) Equal Elevations 5⁄8" (16 mm) Finished Opening Height HINGE STRIKE Tornado Single Rabbet Frame 9⁄16" (14 mm) ½" (13 mm) 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Equal Specialty Hurricane Opening Width 2" (50 mm) Varies Jamb Depth Throat Opening 5⁄16" (8mm) ½" (13 mm) HINGE Hardware 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) 2" (50 mm) Opening Width Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series Single Pair DW16 4’0" x 9’0" (1219 mm x 2743 mm) DW14 4’0" x 9’0" (1219 mm x 2743 mm) 46 • Jamb depth availability (profile) Single rabbet Double rabbet Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Returns Standard Min. Max. Min. Max. 8'0" x 9'0" (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 3 1/4" (83 mm) 4 3/8" (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED Wedge Lock Corner with interlocking soffit tab 8'0" x 9'0" (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 3 1/4" (83 mm) 4 3/8" (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED Wedge Lock Corner with interlocking soffit tab • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Frames • DW Series drywall Standard hardware and corner conditions 4 7/8" (124 mm) Doors 5" (127 mm) Optional Optional 4" (102 mm) Face Head Detail Variations 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7/8" (124 mm) Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Mortise Hinge Prep Lights and Louvers 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. a. The compression anchor can be easily adjusted with a screw driver or power driver. b. The lock-in base anchor system is provided for attachment directly to the floor runner (sill) when using wall baseboards. Elevations 2. All DW Series frames are supplied standard with field adjustable compression anchors located near the top of each jamb and adjustable base anchors with twist-in strap base anchors in each jamb. 3. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the steel used can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended in areas of high moisture. Tornado 5. DW Series with 4" heads are used mainly when installed in close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed with a 4" head. Hurricane 4. DW Series frames are supplied standard with 4 1/2" standard duty hinge preps. Optional universal 4 1/2" or 5" hinge preps are available. Frame options DW16 Single rabbet Double rabbet Single rabbet Double rabbet Typically for walls less than 3 3/4" (95 mm) thick. Minimum wall thickness = 2" (51 mm) Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. Factory DieMitered, Soffit Tab included. Corner clip assembly screws required on labeled frames. Factory DieMitered, Soffit Tab included. Corner clip assembly screws required on labeled frames. SUA (Set-up & weld) Single rabbet N/A Double rabbet N/A 4" (102 mm) Heads Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face jambs. Corner Clip assembly screws required. N/A - Not Available Hardware DW14 Corner connections KD (Knock-down) Specialty Frame profile Series Fire Rated Products Performance • 47 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/29/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • DW Series drywall Frames Variations Doors Jamb/Compression Anchor Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring Adjustable Base Anchor Optional Security Anchor Located at strike height. See note #2 (below) See note #3 (below) See note #2 (below) Anchoring and installation notes DW16 Series Drywall frames are supplied standard with field adjustable compression anchors in each jamb and adjustable base anchors. DW Series frames are designed especially for use in installations using wall baseboards. 1. 2. For anchoring options (e.g. Masonry T anchors) and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. • Masonry wall: Not recommended 3. Optional security anchor: Security anchors are recommended in frames over 8'0" (2438 mm) high or in frames installed in areas where security is a priority. Locate the security anchor immediately above or below the strike reinforcements, and on both faces of the jamb. Anchors may be used in both the strike and hinge jamb. Also recommend to be used in the head of frames for pairs. 4. Grouting of the DW Series frames is not recommended. 5. Installation Caution Notice: After the frame pieces are slid over the wall, the frame is squared by adjusting the compression anchor screws located in the soffit of the jambs. Turning the screw clockwise will tighten the frame. Check to insure the opening is plumb. 6. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. 7. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Framing applications DW16 DW14 Steel type Building type Opening Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner Applications Non-Galvannealed 2 Institutional and Commercial Interior Heavy to extra heavy duty N/A Typical building conditions with base boards Institutional and Commercial Interior Extra heavy to maximum duty N/A Typical building conditions with base boards Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 Galvannealed 3 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality carbon steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation N/A = Not available Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Series 48 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/14/20 Home General Information Frames • K Series drywall Quick and flexible installation of Steelcraft’s K Series Drywall frames facilitates their installation in minutes and they can be relocated without damage to the frame. 2. Die-mitered corner connections of the K Series Drywall Frame corners lock together once the frame is installed. The tab/lock design: a. prevents the head from rising Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft K Series Drywall frames include unique features which enhance long-term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations K Series drywall b. keeps the head and jamb members in alignment d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to secure miter. 3. Sill attachment is made through the face of the frame directly into the wall sill runner. The frame is supplied with factory countersunk holes for the screw attachment. 1. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. 1. Overall frame construction for Steelcraft K Series Drywall frames meet the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings The K Series Drywall frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Specialty Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Specification compliance Tornado Installation 5. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Hurricane Steelcraft’s K Series Drywall frames are designed for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They can be installed in rough openings after the wall has been constructed and finished. They are installed in virtually all types of buildings in all interior drywall partition locations not using baseboards. To accommodate the installation of the K Series Drywall frames on finished drywall construction, they are supplied with a KD (knock-down) corner for quick installation. Elevations 4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers. About the product Lights and Louvers c. keeps the miter tight Typical wall construction and anchoring types Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors K16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud Compression jamb anchor(s) with factory countersunk holes for screw attachment directly to the wall sill runner K14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud Compression jamb anchor(s) with factory countersunk holes for screw attachment directly to the wall sill runner Hardware Profile Fire Rated Products Performance • 49 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • K Series drywall Frames Doors Elevation Standard Double Rabbet Frame Finished Opening Width 2" 2" (50 mm) (50 mm) Variations Variations Standard construction 9 ¾" (248 mm) 2" (50 mm) ½" (13 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement HINGE Lights and Louvers Varies Throat Opening Jamb Depth 5⁄16" (8mm) 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) ½" (13 mm) Equal Elevations 5⁄8" (16 mm) 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Height STRIKE Tornado Single Rabbet Frame 9⁄16" (14 mm) ½" (13 mm) Throat Opening 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Jamb Depth 5⁄16" (8mm) 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) ½" (13 mm) HINGE Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural Varies Equal Specialty Hurricane HINGE Opening Width 5⁄8" (16 mm) 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) 2" (50 mm) Opening Width Frame sizing options Maximum opening size Series Single Pair K16 4’0" x 9’0" (1219 mm x 2743 mm) K14 4’0" x 9’0" (1219 mm x 2743 mm) 50 • Jamb depth availability (profile) Single rabbet Double rabbet Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Returns Standard Min. Max. Min. Max. 8'0" x 9'0" (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 3 1/4" (83 mm) 4 3/8" (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED Wedge Lock Corner with interlocking soffit tab 8'0" x 9'0" (2439 mm x 2743 mm) 3 1/4" (83 mm) 4 3/8" (111 mm) 4 1/2" (114 mm) 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (51 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED Wedge Lock Corner with interlocking soffit tab • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Frames • K Series drywall Standard hardware and corner conditions 4 7/8" (124 mm) 5" (127 mm) Optional Doors Optional 4" (102 mm) Face Head Detail Variations 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7/8" (124 mm) Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Mortise Hinge Prep Lights and Louvers See note #4 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Elevations Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. 2. All K Series frames are supplied standard with field adjustable compression anchors located near the top of each jamb and factory countersunk holes for direct screw attachment to the wall runner. a. The compression anchor can be easily adjusted with a screw driver or power driver. b. A fastener [typically a drywall screw (by others)] is installed through the factory countersunk hole for attachment directly to the floor runner (sill) when not using wall baseboards. Tornado 4. K Series frames are supplied standard with 4 1/2" standard duty hinge preps. Optional universal 4 1/2" or 5" hinge preps are available. Hurricane 3. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the steel used can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended in areas of high moisture. 5. K Series with 4" heads are used mainly when installed in close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed with a 4" head. Frame profile Series K16 Double rabbet Typically for walls 3 3/4" (95 mm) thickness or greater. KD (Knock-down) Single rabbet Double rabbet Factory Die-Mitered, Soffit Tab included. Corner clip assembly screws required on labeled frames. SUA (Set-up & weld) Single rabbet Double rabbet N/A 4" (102 mm) Heads Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face jambs. Corner Clip assembly screws required. N/A - Not Available Hardware K14 Single rabbet Typically for walls less than 3 3/4" (95 mm) thick. Minimum walls thickness = 2" (51 mm) Corner connections Specialty Frame options Fire Rated Products Performance • 51 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/29/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frames • K Series drywall Frames Variations Doors Jamb/Compression Anchor Elevations Base Anchor Optional Security Anchor Locate at strike height. See note # 3 (below). Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring #8 x 1 1/4" Phillips Flat Head Sheet Metal Screws (2 per jamb) See note #2 (below) Anchoring and installation notes K Series Drywall frames are supplied with field adjustable compression anchors in each jamb. The base of each jamb is anchored to the wall by installing screws through the factory prepared anchor holes. K Series frames are designed especially for use in applications not using base boards. 1. Tornado Hurricane 2. For anchoring applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. 3. Optional security anchor: Security anchors are recommended in frames over 8'0" (2438 mm) high or in frames installed in areas where security is a priority. Locate the security anchor immediately above or below the strike reinforcements, and on both faces of the jamb. Anchors may be used in both the strike and hinge jamb. Also recommend to be used in the head of the frame for pairs. 4. Grouting of the K Series frames is not recommended. Specialty 5. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Framing applications K16 K14 Steel type Building type Opening Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 SUA Corner Applications Non-Galvannealed 2 Institutional and Commercial Interior Heavy to extra heavy duty N/A Typical building conditions where base boards are not being used Institutional and Commercial Interior Extra heavy to maximum duty N/A Typical building conditions where base boards are not being used Galvannealed 3 Non-Galvannealed 2 Galvannealed 3 1 Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 2 Commercial quality carbon steel 3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Series 52 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) No back bends to accommodate architectural trim casing. 2. Frame face anchor holes using nails/screws for quick anchoring in place of or in addition to traditional stud anchors in the frame throat. 3. Die-mitered corner connections have tabs in the head and slots in the jambs to accommodate KD installation with compression anchors (with tabs not bent over) and welded (with tabs bent over). The tab/lock design: b. keeps the head and jamb members in alignment c. keeps the miter tight 4. 14 and 16 gauge for heavy duty commercial applications. Lights and Louvers a. prevents the head from rising 5. Factory prepped for field installed silencers. Steelcraft’s C and CK Series Drywall frames are designed for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. They are installed in virtually all types of buildings for drywall applications where there is a desire to add custom architectural trim casing. These frames do not have backbends and have nail/screw attachment holes in the face. 3. See installation instructions provided in your customer distributor portal. 2. Anchors are Compression anchors and face anchor holes standard (no omit and no jamb anchors). 3. CK base anchor is the bottom face attachment hole nailed/ screwed into the wall sill runner. No countersink. Specification compliance 1. Overall frame construction meets requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. Fire ratings The C and CK Series frames can be rated up to 90 minutes. C series must be welded with weld-in anchors. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings. Fire Rated Products 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Up to 90 minute labels available. CK Series, typically installed after finished walls (sim. to K) 1. KD (knock-down) only. Hardware Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 3. Adjustable base anchors provided for uneven floors. Specialty Installation 2. Anchors are Weld-in wood stud std or omit / use standard face anchor holes. No compression anchors available. Fire rated must use Jamb anchors and frame must be welded. Tornado The CK series frames are installed in rough openings after the wall has been constructed and finished. They are supplied KD (knock-down) and installed using compression anchors with an attachment hole at the bottom of each face serving as base anchors, similar to K series frames, but are anchored also through the nail/screw attachment holes in the face rather than wood or steel stud anchors. This provides a very quick and easy installation while maintaining maximum duty commercial frame standards. C Series, typically installed with the walls (sim. to F) 1. Intended for welded assemblies, available welded or KD. Hurricane The C series frames are typically welded and installed as part of the wall framing sequence using wood or steel stud anchors, building the wall up to the frame. These can be supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly or welded prior to installation as a complete unit, similar to F series frames. 6. Factory applied based on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI 250.10-2011. Elevations About the product 1. Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft’s C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) frames offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) Typical wall construction and anchoring types Wall construction 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Typical wall anchors C14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud built up to installed frames Weld-in stud anchors Face attachment holes CK16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] CK14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Drywall partitions with wood or steel studs built before frames to defined rough opening Compression jamb anchor(s) with factory countersunk holes Face attachment holes Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • • 53 Architectural Steel thickness C16 Performance Profile General Information Home Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement 9 3/4" (248 mm) Throat Opening HINGE Varies Jamb Depth 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Equal 5⁄8" (16 mm) ¾" (19 mm) Finished Opening Height Opening Width 2" (50 mm) STRIKE HINGE Tornado Frames Elevations Standard Double Rabbet Frame 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width Equal 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Specialty Hurricane Elevation 2" (50 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Lights and Louvers Doors 2" (50 mm) Variations Variations Standard construction HINGE Hardware 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Frame sizing options Opening size Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Series Single Pair Min. Max. Min. Max. 1'6" (457 mm) x 2'0" (610 mm) 4'0" (2438 mm) x 9'0" (2743 mm) or 8'0" rated 2'0" (457 mm) or 3'0" with 1'6" typ door min x 2'0" (610mm) 8'0" (2438 mm) x 9'0" (2743 mm) or 8'0" rated C16 C14 CK16 CK14 54 • Jamb depth availability (profile) Single rabbet Min N/A Max. N/A Double rabbet Min 4 5/8" (117.5 mm) Std. profile dimensions Face Stop Corners Return Face No backbend returns DIE MITERED with two(2) concealed tabs locating head and jambs. Tabs are in head, slots are in jambs. Max. 14 3/4" (375 mm) 2" (50 mm) 5/8" • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) Standard hardware and corner conditions 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. Lights and Louvers Fire rated C Series must be welded and must use weld-in jamb anchors. Doors 4 7/8" (124 mm) 5" (127 mm) Optional C Series Welded Corner Variations 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard KD Corner Details (CK shown / compression anchor) Frames 4 7/8" (124 mm) Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Mortise Hinge Prep d. Strike in head e. Roller latch f. Elevations 2. Depending on environment and usage conditions the steel can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed is recommended in areas of high moisture. Coordinator, face mounted and soffit mounted g. Additional Strike preps including ASA, CYL, RPD, and blank 3. For welded frames, bend the tabs outward, not inward, durring assembly. h. High frequency hinge, required over 7'2" (may need to notch/shave drywall ~ 5/8" from open edge of frame) 4. Available options and hardware preps include the following: Electrical preps including Mag switch and electric hinge 5. For options not shown, we may be able to accommodate with an engineering detailed request. Email technical product support at [email protected]. c. Removable mullion prep. Tornado i. b. Surface bolts in face, soffit, self-latching, and universal flush bolt preps Hurricane a. Omit bumper prep. Frame profile jamb depth selection examples wall calculation +0.25 +0.375 +0.5 Stud + Drywall thickness* + HM** 5" 5.125" 5.25" 5.375" 5.5" 3.625" 1.25" (2) 5/8" sheets 0.125" * No backbends so JD is the wall thickness + at least 1/8 for total frame thickness + any extra needed for imperfect wall construction or heavier gauge steel. 2 sheets of drywall for rated openings. 4 5/8" 4.75" 4.875" 5" 5.125" 2.5" 2" (4) 1/2" sheets 0.125" ** 16ga typical (3/16" using max HM tolerance on 14ga) 5 1/8" 5.25" 5.375" 5.5" 5.625" 2.5" 2.5" (4) 5/8" sheets 0.125" 5 3/4" 5.875" 6" 6.125" 6.25" 3.625" 2" (4) 1/2" sheets 0.125" 6 1/4" 6.375" 6.5" 6.625" 6.75" 3.625" 2.5" (4) 5/8" sheets 0.125" *** Adding 1/8" or more to total JD if wall is not perfect or other factors. For 14ga frames consider adding 1/16" (total 3/16") for HM frame thickness based on worst case tolerances (use larger jamb depths at 1/8" increments for imperfect wall conditions/ installation). Fire Rated Products Frame options Frame profile Series C16 C14 CK16 CK14 N/A Corner connections KD (Knock-down) SUA (Set-up & weld) Double rabbet Single rabbet For 4-5/8" thru 14-3/4" JD (thru 13-1/8" for rated frames) N/A Double rabbet 2 locating tabs in jambs per factory die-miter. See the KD Corner Detail. Single rabbet N/A 4" (102 mm) heads Double rabbet Available when specified, and in accordance with A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) • 55 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available when specified for KD or SUA applications. Performance Single rabbet Hardware +0.125 Specialty JD options (1/8" increments)*** JD (wall thickness) General Information Home Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) Frames Variations Doors Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Standard anchoring C Series weld-in wood stud anchor with Face anchor holes C Series Base Anchor CK Series Jamb/Compression Anchor Attached with S. M. screws (furnished) Maximum adjustment 1 3/8" (35 mm) below frame See note #2 for additional anchoring options Anchoring and installation notes 1. CK Series Base Anchor Face anchor holes are supplied standard for both C and CK series frames. a. 5/32" pre-punched for #8 Teks or fine threaded drywall screws for typical steel stud applications, or 10D-12D nails max for wood stud applications, not included b. Holes are punched at 16" on center max, spaced evenly the total height of heads and jambs. Typically located 5/8" from open edge of 2" face, 1/2" from bottom and 5/8" from corners. 2. For stud, frame, and casing installation details see the next 2 pages. Additional details can be found in the C/CK Installation Guide at us.allegion.com/en/home/products/ brands/steelcraft.html. Tornado C Series CK Series 1. 1. Fire Rated Products Frames are supplied as part of the wall framing sequence (prior to completing stud walls/studs extend into the jamb throat and anchored). 2. Anchors a. Supplied with standard weld-in wood stud anchors (snip off or bend in ears if using steel studs or steel studs with no wood stud supports). Face anchor holes may be used in addition to or instead of standard anchors. Rated frames must use weld-in stud anchors and must have welded corners at the factory or in the field. c. Optional weld-in jamb anchors include steel stud, nailing strap, flush steel stud, recessed steel stud z-anchors. Anchors available loose. Frames are supplied KD to be installed in the rough opening after the wall has been constructed (and typically already finished). Rough opening is Nominal opening width plus 2" and Nominal opening height plus 1" (same as max dimensions for DW/K series). See installation guide for additional notes. 2. Anchors a. Supplied with standard field adjustable compression anchors near the top of each jamb. b. Face anchor holes provide direct screw attachment to the wall runner. c. Lowest face anchor hole serves as base anchor. This is similar to K series base anchors but does not include countersink since several options are available to avoid interference with trim casing (see C/CK Installation Guide). d. No anchor options available. b. Weld-in adjustable base anchors standard, option weld-in floor anchor (not adjustable). 3. Additional notes and images of CK installation provided in C/CK Installation Guide on your distributor portal. Framing applications Performance Architectural See note #1 and CK note 2.c (below) 4. Notching/shaving of drywall may be necessary to avoid interference (e.g. for RA/TJ closer reinforcements and for auxillary hinges at top hinge if opening over 7'2"). Hardware Specialty Hurricane 3. Standard anchoring shown. For anchoring options and applications, refer to "Anchoring systems" on page 84. Series Steel type C16 Non-Galvanealled 2 CK16 Galvanelled 3 C14 Non-Galvanealled 2 CK14 Galvanelled 3 Building type Institutional and Commercial Opening Interior Usage frequency 1 KD Corner 4 Heavy to extra heavy duty Yes Extra heavy duty to maximum duty Yes SUA Corner N/A N/A Applications Typical building conditions where there is a need for no backbend frames or a need for frames that can accept custom architectural trim casing, rated or non-rated 1. Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 3. Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 2. Commercial quality carbon steel 4. Knock-Down for field assembly prior to or during installation 56 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) Selection Guide Variations Doors Face anchor holes standard* Frames CK (Easy-install, Installed after finished wall) No backbend profile Variations C (Installed with stud wall framing) Tabs in head, slots in jambs Similar to F Series (but no backbends) Similar to K Series (but no backbends) KD or Welded (intended for welded assemblies) KD only No compression anchors Compression anchors only Weld-in F anchors / Weld-in wood stud std / may omit No weld-in anchors Typical F Series base anchors / adjustable base std CK base anchor (K Series type with no dimple) Rated 90 min/must be welded & weld-in anchors Rated up to 90 minutes 5/32" pre-punched for #8 fine thread screws for steel studs or 10D-12D nails max for wood studs, not included Wall Construction C Series frames are installed as part of the stud wall framing sequence. The studs (typically steel studs in commercial applications) are installed tight against the jambs A B CK Series frames are installed after the stud walls. The rough opening height dimension (E) is the nominal frame opening height (D) plus 1" • Jamb depth (C) is at least 1/8" greater than wall thickness. See "Frame profile jamb depth selection examples" on page 55. • Casing inside dimension width (F) and height (G) are approximately 1/4" less than the nominal opening width and 1/8" less than the nominal opening height resulting in about about 1/8" distance to rabbets (see example on next page). Tornado • C Hurricane The rough opening width dimension (A) is the nominal frame opening width (B) plus 2" Elevations • Lights and Louvers * Specialty G Hardware D F E Fire Rated Products Performance • 57 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Frames • C and CK Series casing-ready (no backbend) C Series Welded Frames Install the 3-sided corner welded frames into the opening with the walls, pushing studs up tight against jamb anchors. Use temporary low and mid-height spreader bars, and check plumb, level, square, and twist throughout installation. Using default wood stud anchors • Steel stud anchors (without straps) may be specified in order Doors Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations 1/8" gap 2" Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products 5" JD (increase for greater margin of error) 5/8" to face holes custom wood casing by others 4 7/8" wall thickness 3 5/8" metal stud* 5/8" drywall caulk joints/gaps 1 3/4" door 1" area for Z-anchor and hardware 2" 31/32" 5/8" custom wood casing by others face anchor 5" JD (increase for greater margin of error) 4 7/8" wall thickness 3 5/8" metal stud* 5/8" drywall caulk joints/gaps CK Series knock down frame with compression anchors 1 3/4" door 1" Rabbet to rough opening compression anchor 2" 1" Performance 1/8" gap If straps are not desired, snip off or order steel stud anchors (similar design but without straps). 1/8" gap Architectural 1 3/4" door Using optional recessed steel stud Z-anchors • This layout also applies for omitting jamb anchors (non‑rated only). 5/8" custom wood casing by others face anchor 5" JD (increase for greater margin of error) 4 7/8" wall thickness 3 5/8" metal stud* 5/8" drywall caulk joints/gaps C/CK Notes: 1. Examples use 3 5/8" steel studs with 5" JD and has no margin of error in wall construction— consider greater JD's such as 5 3/8". For other choices, see "Frame profile jamb depth selection examples" on page 55. 2. See C/CK Installation Guide on your distributor portal. 3. Size and gauge of steel stud, as well as resulting need for a single versus back-to-back studs should be recommended by architect, engineer, or building contractor. Fire rated openings 1. C/CK must use double wood/steel studs around the opening. C series only must be welded and use jamb anchors. 2. Holes in frame face not covered by drywall must be filled using fire rated caulk, typically addressed during trim casing installation. 3. Install trim casing using non-invasive methods (structural adhesive, tape, magnets). Use rated caulks under trim to seal any mechanical fastener or other holes. Acceptable tapes for rated applications are 3M’s #969, #950, #444. 58 • Install wall before frame. Hold head in place, then slide in each jamb so that head tabs are inserted securely into jamb slots. Adjust compression anchors and add lower and mid-height spreader bars, locking into place with face anchor holes. Check proper location in rough opening, plumb, level, square, and twist throughout installation. Face anchor attachment options: 1. 1 5/8" Teks Screws (shown). 2. Countersink and use narrow threaded drywall screws. 3. If using wood studs, nails may be used (predrill studs). Custom wood casing attachment options 1. Adhesive caulk or tape (rated openings must use rated caulks/tapes). 2. Screws (predrill or metal-piercing screws). 3. Nails if using wood studs (if using metal studs, you may back with caulk and use finish nail gun with appropriate technique). 4. Magnet style casing. Options if your wood casing will not lie flat enough 1. Use cored out type casing. 2. Use caulk to hide gaps. 3. Countersink and use fine threaded drywall screws. 4. Remove material on back of casing at screw heads. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Hospital stops................................................................................. 74 Lead lined.........................................................................................76 Tornado Head reinforcement, 12 gauge full width channel......... 75 Hurricane Terminated or sanitary steps...........................................................74 F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series Flush Frames..............................84 Anchor Locations:................................................................................ 85 Stud wall applications...................................................................... 85 DW and K Series drywall frames..................................................86 Wire masonry........................................................................................88 Masonry T...............................................................................................88 Yoke & strap masonry.......................................................................88 Butterfly existing wall........................................................................89 Hat spacer existing wall...................................................................89 Tube & strap existing wall ..............................................................89 Universal stud........................................................................................90 Wood stud .............................................................................................90 Wood stud .............................................................................................90 Closed steel stud.................................................................................. 91 Flush steel stud .................................................................................... 91 Recessed steel stud............................................................................ 91 Field adjustable base......................................................................... 92 Fixed base .............................................................................................. 92 Compression jamb.............................................................................. 92 Security anchor (optional) for DW and K Series.................. 93 Adjustable base for DW Series ..................................................... 93 Base for K Series.................................................................................. 93 Mullion base .......................................................................................... 94 Sill section base .................................................................................. 94 Corner post base ................................................................................ 94 Elevations Communicating frames............................................................. 73 Anchoring systems...................................................................... 84 Lights and Louvers Non-labeled.............................................................................................71 Labeled..................................................................................................... 72 Doors Dutch doors...................................................................................... 71 Variations Standard F Series double rabbeted............................................60 F Series frames...................................................................................... 61 F Series 4" heads: F16, F14............................................................... 62 FE Series frames options................................................................. 63 FE Series double egress frames.................................................... 64 Application.............................................................................................64 Purpose.................................................................................................... 64 Product availability............................................................................. 64 DE Series frames.................................................................................. 65 DE Series double egress frames...................................................66 Standard DW, K, and MU Series double rabbeted frames.67 DW, K, and MU Series frames........................................................68 4" Head: DW, K, and MU Series frames.....................................69 Silencer preparations......................................................................... 70 Frames Profile Variations...........................................................................60 Variations Frame variations and options Clips............................................................................................................76 Specialty Rough buck frames.......................................................................77 Applied stops..................................................................................78 Hardware..........................................................................................79 High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series..........79 Automatic operators...........................................................................79 Hardware Thick doors. .....................................................................................80 3 Over 1 ⁄4" thru 3" thick......................................................................80 Weather seals................................................................................. 81 PS-074™ Surface applied weatherstrip..................................... 81 Throat fillers.....................................................................................82 Fire Rated Products Rigid vinyl................................................................................................. 82 Kerf frames...................................................................................... 83 Integral...................................................................................................... 83 Performance • 59 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Profile Variations Standard F Series double rabbeted Standard double rabbet frame Welded corner 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Throat Opening Lights and Louvers Doors Variations *½" (13 mm) Varies Jamb Depth Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) *½" (13 mm) KD corner detail F Series unequal rabbet frames Gauge: 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 4 1/2" (121 mm) min. thru 20" (508 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Face: Standard 2" (50 mm). Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Miter: 45° die miter with 4 interlocking tabs for welded Notes: 1. F Series (2" face) and FN Series (1" face) are available KD or welded. All other frames with custom face dimensions must be welded prior to installation. 2. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 5⁄8" (16 mm) 2" (50 mm) 60 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Profile Variations F Series frames 1-15/16˝ (49 mm) Varies 1-15/16˝ (49 mm) Varies 1-15/16˝ (49 mm) 5/8˝ (16 mm) 5/8˝ (16 mm) Face Doors Jamb Depth Variations Jamb Depth Frames F Series single rabbet frames Variations F Series equal rabbet frames Face * 1/2˝ (13 mm) * 1/2˝ Throat Opening (13 mm) * 1/2˝ (13 mm) 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 4 7/8" (124 mm) min. thru 20" (508 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments * 1/2˝ (13 mm) Gauge: 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 3" (76 mm) min. thru 20" (508 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Standard 2" (50 mm). Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Miter: 45° die miter with 4 interlocking tabs for welded Miter: 45° die miter with 4 interlocking tabs for welded Notes: Face: 1. F Series cased open frames Jamb Depth F Series (2" and 1 1/2" face) and FN Series (1" face) are available KD or welded. All other frames with custom face dimensions must be welded prior to installation. Specialty Face * 1/2˝ (13 mm) Gauge: 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 3" (76 mm) min. thru 20" (508 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Hardware * 1/2˝ (13 mm) Throat Opening Tornado Face: Hurricane Standard 2" (50 mm). Elevations Gauge: Lights and Louvers Throat Opening Standard 2" (50 mm). Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Miter: 45° die miter with 4 interlocking tabs for welded Fire Rated Products Face: Performance • 61 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/12 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Frames Variations F Series 4" heads: F16, F14 No. 8 x 1 1/2" (63.5 mm) Phillips bugle head screw Throat Opening * 1/2˝ (13 mm) * 1/2˝ (13 mm) Tornado Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations 4" (102 mm) 4˝ (50 mm) 5/8˝ (16 mm) 1-15/16˝ (49 mm) 1-9/16˝ (40 mm) Varies Jamb Depth Profile variation: 2" (51 mm) Unequal, equal cased open Jamb depth: 4 1/2" through 20“ in 1/8" increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Miter: Die mitered, tabs vary with profile variations Notes: 1. Frames with 4" heads are used mainly in masonry applications when 2" face heads do not match block coursing. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 2. Tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly (as shown). 62 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/14/20 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Profile Variations FE Series frames options 2˝ (50 mm) 2-5/8˝ (67 mm) *1/2˝ (13 mm) 2-5/8˝ (67 mm) Lights and Louvers Jamb Depth 5/8˝ (16 mm) Jamb Detail Elevations Equal Jamb Depth Throat Opening KD Corner 1-15/16˝ (49 mm) Tornado 1-3/8˝ (35 mm) 5/8˝ (16 mm) Specialty 2˝ (50 mm) Face Finished Opening Width 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 4 3/4" (121 mm) min. thru 14" (356 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Face: Standard 2" (50 mm). Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Miter: 45° die miter with 4 interlocking tabs or welded Hardware Gauge: Fire Rated Products Notes: 1. Hurricane Welded Corner Equal *1/2˝ (13 mm) Doors * 1/2˝ (13 mm) Throat Opening Variations Head Detail Frames *1/2˝ (13 mm) Variations FE Series Conventional double egress frames Conventional FE Series double egress heads have a different profile from the jambs. Both heads and jambs are considered to have a 2" face. Performance 2. Since the door is mounted on the centerline of the jamb depth, the 2" face of the jamb includes an 1 3/8" visible face and a 5/8" additional stop. 3. The door opening dimension of Steelcraft FE Series double egress frames is 1/8" undersized to insure proper door center clearances are maintained. Door widths must be adjusted accordingly when using wood or non-Steelcraft doors. Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • • 63 Architectural 4. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly (as shown). General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Dim “A” Frame Depth Variations Dim “A” Frame Depth Head Detail FE Series Frames Lights and Louvers Doors Variations FE Series double egress frames Jamb Detail FE Series Clear Corridor Width Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Dim “A” = Jamb depth for both head and jamb Finished Opening Width (Door Opening Dimension) Corridor Width Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the dimension from the frame door rabbet to the opposite rabbet. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware • Note: FE and DE Series double egress frames are 1/8" (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width. Example: 6'0" (1829 mm) head = 71 7/8" net width in lieu of the standard 72". Clear Opening Width is the dimension between doors, measured from door face to door face, when both doors are open 90 degrees. • Purpose FE Series double egress frames are used in cross corridor application for traffic and smoke control. Product availability This product option is available for the following Steelcraft frame Series: • FE16 and FE14 in depths from 4 3/4" (121 mm) to 14" (356 mm). Note: This dimension is critical for compliance with handicapped accessibility. Corridor Width is the actual dimension between walls in a corridor. • Note: This dimension is critical in sizing the finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) of the double egress frame. Application FE Series double egress frames are designed for use in cross corridor application where clear opening width is not of major concern. Conventional butt or continuous hinges are used. For applications where clear opening width is critical the DE Series double egress frame is recommended. 64 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Profile Variations DE Series frames Jamb Dimension Throat Opening Double Egress Welded Corner ½" (13 mm) 2" (50 mm) 2" (50 mm) Head Detail 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) 3 11/32" 5 1/4" 3 19/32" 5 3/4" 3 27/32" 6 1/4" 4 3/32" 6 3/4" 4 11/32" 7 1/4" 4 19/32" 7 3/4" 4 27/32" 8 1/4" 5 3/32" 8 3/4" 5 11/32" 9 1/4" 5 19/32" 9 3/4" 5 27/32" 10 1/4" 6 3/32" 10 3/4" 6 11/32" Tornado Frame Depth Jamb dimension 4 3/4" 6 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Notes: Jamb depth: 4 3/4" (121 mm) min. thru 14" (356 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments 1. Face: Standard 2" (50 mm). Non-standard 1" (25.4 mm) thru 4" (102 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth 2. Frame depth varies for head to jambs. This variation allows for larger clear opening widths for handicapped accessibility. Miter: 45° die miter be welded prior to most installation Face dimensions on the DE Series frames are 2" faces for on both heads and jambs. Frame depth (head): This is the jamb depth of the head and is the size specified when ordering. • Jamb dimension (jamb): This is the actual jamb depth of the vertical frame member. This dimension is not specified when ordering. Refer to table for additional clarification. 3. The door opening dimension of Steelcraft DE Series double egress frames is 1/8" undersized to insure proper door center clearances are maintained. Door widths must be adjusted accordingly when using wood or non-Steelcraft doors. • 65 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance 4. Tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly (as shown). Fire Rated Products • Hardware Gauge: Specialty Note: When ordering DE Series frames, Dimension “A” specifies the frame jamb depth. Hurricane 5⁄8" (16 mm) Throat Opening *½" (13 mm) Dimension “B” jamb Frame depth Elevations *½" (13 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) Dimension “A” head Lights and Louvers 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Doors Jamb Detail Variations 2 5⁄8" (67 mm) Frames ½" (13 mm) Variations DE Series double egress frames for clear width corridor applications General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Frames Variations Doors Corridor Width Lights and Louvers Variations DE Series double egress frames Finished Opening Width (Door Opening Dimension) Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Clear Corridor Width Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the dimension from the frame door rabbet to the opposite rabbet. Note: FE and DE Series double egress frames are 1/8" (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width. Example: 6'0" (1829 mm) head = 71 7/8" net width in lieu of the standard 72". Clear Opening Width is the dimension between doors, measured from door face to door face, when both doors are open 90 degrees. • Note: this dimension is critical for compliance with handicapped accessibility. Corridor Width is the actual dimension between walls in a corridor. • Note: this dimension is critical in sizing the finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) of the double egress frame. Purpose DE Series double egress frames are used in cross corridor application for traffic and smoke control. Product availability This product option is available for the following Steelcraft frame Series: • DE16 and DE14 in depths from 4 3/4" (121 mm) to 14" (356 mm) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware • Application DE Series double egress frames are designed for use in cross corridor application where clear opening width is of major concern. Swing clear hinges or pocket pivot hinges are used. For applications where clear opening width is not critical the FE Series double egress frame is recommended. 66 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Standard DW, K, and MU Series double rabbeted frames Frames Variations Doors ½" (13 mm) KD Corner Detail Variations Standard Double Rabbet Frame 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Throat Opening Varies ½" (13 mm) Lights and Louvers 5⁄16" (8 mm) Jamb Depth 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) Elevations 2" (50 mm) Notes: Gauge: 6 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) 1. Jamb depth: DW and K = 4 1/2" (114 mm) thru 14 3/4" (375 mm) in 1/8" increments MU = 4 3/4" (114 mm) thru 20" (508 mm) in 1/8" increments 2. MU Series can be installed KD or welded. Face: Standard 2" (50 mm) Miter: 45° die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip. Tornado DW and K Series are installed KD. 3. Equal rabbet frames are supplied when specified or in communicating frame applications (refer to page 68). Hurricane DW, K, and MU Series 4. Cased open frames are used for double acting door or applied stop applications (refer to page 73). 6. KD Corner includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to secure miter. Screws are supplied for all MU Series label and non-label, and for DW and K Series label only. Specialty 5. Narrow double rabbet frames are used for jamb depths below 4 1/2". Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 67 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Frames Variations DW, K, and MU Series frames DW, K, and MU Series equal rabbet frames Doors Varies Variations Lights and Louvers Jamb Depth Jamb Depth 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Elevations DW, K, and MU Series single rabbet frames 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄16" (8 mm) Throat Opening ½" (13 mm) ½" (13 mm) 16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 4 7/8" (124 mm) min. thru 14 3/4" (375 mm in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Face: Standard 2" (50 mm) Miter: 45° die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip. 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) 5⁄16" (8 mm) ½" (13 mm) Gauge: Throat Opening 2" (50 mm) ½" (13 mm) Gauge: 6 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 3 1/4" (133 mm) min. thru 4 3/8" (111 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Face: Standard 2" (50 mm) Miter: 45° die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip. Notes: 1. DW and K Series are installed KD 2. MU Series can be installed KD or welded. Jamb Depth Tornado Varies 2" (50 mm) DW, K, and MU Series cased open frames Hurricane 9⁄16" 5⁄8" (16 mm) 3. Equal rabbet frames are supplied when specified or in communicating frame applications (refer to page 68). 5⁄16" (8 mm) Face 4. Cased open frames are used double acting door or applied stop applications (refer to page 73). ½" (13 mm) Throat Opening ½" (13 mm) Gauge: 6 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm) Jamb depth: 3 1/4" (133 mm) min. thru 14 3/4" (375 mm) in 1/8" (3.2 mm) increments Face: Standard 2" (50 mm) Miter: 45° die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 5. Single rabbet frames are used for jamb depths below 4 1/2". 68 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 12/31/09 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Profile Variations 4" Head: DW, K, and MU Series frames Variations Doors 4" (50 mm) Frames Apply no. 8 x 2 1/2" (63.5 mm) Phillips bugle head screw ½" (13 mm) Variations Throat Opening ½" (13 mm) 5⁄8" (16 mm) Varies Lights and Louvers 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) Jamb Depth 4" (102 mm) Elevations 2" (51 mm) DW16, DW14, K16, K14, MU16, and MU14 3 1/4" through 14 3/4" in 1/8" increments Tornado Unequal, equal or single rabbet, cased open Jamb depth: Notes: 1. Specialty MU Series frames with 4" heads are used mainly in masonry applications when 2" face heads do not match block coursing. Hurricane Profile variation: 2. DW and K Series with 4" heads are used mainly, when installed in close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed with a 4" head. 3. DW, KD, and MU corners includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to secure miter. Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 69 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Profile Variations Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Silencer preparations Tornado Hurricane Elevations 9/32" (7 mm) dia. hole for field installed silencer F, FN, FE, DE, MU, DW, and K Series frames both open and closed sections Frames are supplied factory prepared for field installed silencers (3 per strike jamb and/or 2 per double door head). Caution: When frames are to be grout filled, it is the responsibility of the installing contractor to guard off the silencer holes. Exceptions: Field applied self adhesive silencers are used on all mullions. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Description: 70 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Dutch doors 16 9/16" (421 mm) 7'0" (2134 mm) 20 9/16" (522 mm) 7'2" (2184 mm) 22 9/16" (573 mm) Lights and Louvers D Finished Opening Height Elevations 19 7⁄16" (494 mm) Tornado 36 5⁄8" (937 mm) Specialty 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Standard Dutch Door Frame Openings are prepared for: High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the top hinge for each door leaf. • • Optional Strike Preparations for the Top Leaf include: • One (1) ASA 2 3/4" (70 mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike aligned for top and bottom leaf, or • One (1) CYL 4 7/8" (124 mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike or one (1) ASA 2 3/4" (70 mm). • F16, F14, FN16, FN14, MU16, and MU14 in depths from 3 1/4" (83 mm) to 20" (508 mm). • DW16, DW14, K16, and K14 in depths from 3 1/4" (83 mm) to 14 3/4" (372 mm). Refer to pages 136-140 in the Door Section of this manual for information of applicable dutch doors. Sizes available from 2'0" (610 mm) x 6'8" (2032 mm) thru 4'0" (1219 mm) x 8'0" (2438 mm). • 71 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/12 • Technical data manual • Performance • One (1) ASA 4 7/8" (124 mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike aligned for top and bottom leaf. Product availability This product option is available for the following Steelcraft frame Series: Fire Rated Products 4 1/2" (114 mm) x 4 1/2" (114 mm) universal hinge reinforcements, 1 pair per leaf. Purpose Together with the use of a dutch door shelf, dutch doors can be viewed as an extension of nearby counter tops as well as allowing the passage of materials without opening the entire door leaf. Hardware Application • Single Swing applications only: no double door configurations. • Hurricane 23 7⁄8" (606 mm) • Doors Dimension “D” 6'8" (2032 mm) Variations 9 ¾" (248 mm) Door opening height Frames Non-labeled Variations Dutch doors General Information Home Frame variations and options • Dutch doors Variations Frames 9 ¾" (248 mm) Finished Opening Height Dimension “D” 6'8" (2032 mm) 16 9/16" (421 mm) 7'0" (2134 mm) 20 9/16" (522 mm) 7'2" (2184 mm) 22 9/16" (573 mm) 14 11⁄16" Elevations 19 7⁄16" (494 mm) 23 7⁄8" (606 mm) Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural Door opening height D Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Labeled 36 5⁄8" (937 mm) 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Labeled application • Refer to pages 136-140 in the Door Section of this manual for information of applicable dutch doors. • • Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 4'0" x 7'2". Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual for fire rated approvals. Purpose Together with the use of a dutch door shelf, dutch doors can be viewed as an extension of nearby counter tops as well as allowing the passage of materials without opening the entire door leaf. • Application • Single Swing applications only: no double door configurations. 72 • 4 1/2" (114 mm) x 4 1/2" (114 mm) universal hinge reinforcements, 1 pair per leaf. • High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the top hinge for each door leaf. Optional Strike Preparations for the Top Leaf include: One (1) ASA 4 7/8" (124 mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike aligned for top and bottom leaf, or One (1) CYL 2 3/4" (70 mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike aligned for top and bottom leaf, or • F16 and F14 in depths from 3" (76 mm) to 14" (356 mm). MU16 and MU14 in depths from 3 1/4" (83 mm) to 14" (356 mm) • • Product availability This product option is available for the following Steelcraft labeled frame Series: • • Hinge preparations for standard dutch door frame openings include: • • One (1) ASA 4 7/8" (124 mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike or one (1) CYL 2 3/4" (70 mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike aligned for the bottom leaf due to the latch bolt from the top leaf projecting into the strike preparation in the bottom leaf (see pages 138-140). Frame head is equipped with a closer reinforcement. Sizes available from 2'0" (610 mm) x 6'8" (2032 mm) thru 4'0" (1219 mm) x 7'2" (2184 mm).. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Communicating frames Frames Variations Doors 1 9/16" (40 mm) Variations Communicating frames or Lights and Louvers 1 15/16" (49 mm) Rabbet Elevations 1 9/16" (40 mm) or 1 15/16" (49 mm) Rabbet Tornado Application These Frames are prepared for hanging a door in each rabbet. Product availability This frame option is available for the following Steelcraft Series of Frames: 1. 1 15/16" (49 mm) rabbets are prepared for 1 3/4" (45 mm) doors. 3. 1 3/8" (35 mm) x 1 3/4" (45 mm) doors can be accommodated. These communicating frames are primarily used in the Hospitality Segment of building types to separate two (2) adjoining rooms. • • FN16, FN14, F16, F14, MU16, and MU 14 for Singles and Pairs. DW16, DW14, K16, and K14 for Single Swing only. Hardware 2. The 1 9/16" (40 mm) rabbets are prepared for 1 3/8" (35 mm) doors. Note: 1. Specialty Purpose Communicating frames provide security for both adjoining rooms: each door is locked from the occupied side of each room. Hurricane Labeled application Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 4'0" x 8'0" single doors or 8'0" x 8'0" pairs. Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual for fire rated approvals. When using DW and K Series Frames, doors are to be hinged on opposite jambs. Fire Rated Products Performance • 73 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Frame variations and options • Hospital stops Hospital stops Terminated or sanitary steps Double rabbet Single rabbet One-piece base anchor/ filler plate Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Elevations 45° hospital stops Single rabbet 90° hospital stops Double rabbet Double rabbet only Tornado Hurricane 4", 5 1/2" or 6" Note: 45° Hospital stops are measured from the bottom of the frame to the bottom of the 45° stop miter. Application • Frames with Hospital stops are primarily used in the health care segment where cleanliness is required. • Frames with optional hospital stop preparations include stops which do not run the full height of the frame. • The stop terminates above the floor line and is closed with a 45° or 90° angle. Product availability This frame option is available for the following Steelcraft Series Frames: • • Single Rabbet 45° only: F16 and F14 • Double Rabbet 90°: FN16, FN14, F16, F14, DW16, DW14, K16, K14, MU16, and MU14 • Weld-in base anchors are included as standard and not available without. Purpose The stop terminating above the floor line allows for easier cleaning and minimizes the build-up of germs, bacteria and residue at the floor level of the door opening. Double Rabbet 45°: FN16, FN14, F16, F14, DW16, DW14, K16, K14, MU16, and MU14 • F and MU Series frames come standard with weld-in one-piece base anchor/filler plates, which are not available as omit. • Standard base anchors for DW and K Series will remain available Labeled application • Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 4'0" x 8'0" single doors or 8'0" x 8'0" pairs. Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual for fire rated approvals Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 1. Architectural 4", 5 1/2" or 6" 74 • • Frames with hospital stop are available for smoke and draft applications. • Only 4" Hospital stops with EMA anchored frames may be labeled. When using EMA anchors, the max height of hospital stop is 4" • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Head reinforcement, 12 gauge full width channel Variations Doors 2 1/2" (64 mm) Frames 16" (407 mm) Variations Head reinforcement, 12 gauge full width channel Lights and Louvers Continuous 12 gauge (2.5 mm) reinforcement Elevations Also available on standard FE or DE Series double egress frames Specialty • Tornado Welded into frame head Minimum 2" (50 mm) face dimension Hardware • • • Product availability This optional frame component is available for the following Steelcraft standard double rabbet profile Series frames: F16, F14, MU16, MU14, DW16, DW14, K16, and K14. Hurricane Application Continuous head reinforcement channels are used at the specifiers’ discretion to safe guard against head sag in door opening usually over 6'0" in width. The 12 gauge continuous head reinforcement is 1" (25 mm) less in length than the nominal head size, i.e., a head for a 6'0" (1829 mm) pair of doors would require a 71" (1803 mm) long continuous head reinforcement: Length, other than standard, must be specified Fire Rated Products Purpose When there is concern for the weight of overhead wall construction, or, when multiple surface applied hardware components are being used, this continuous steel channel has the ability to spread and transfer the load to the floor through the jambs while also providing the necessary strength and thickness for thread engagement. Note: Hollow metal frames, with or without the optional continuous head reinforcement, are not designed as or intended to be a load bearing member of wall construction. Performance • 75 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/12 • Technical data manual • Frames Doors Frame variations and options • Lead lined Lead lined Clips (all lead lining supplied by owners) 7/8" (22 mm) Variations Variations General Information Home Clip closed 7/8" (22 mm) 1 5/16" (49 mm) Insert lead under clips and hammer clips closed 1 5/16" (49 mm) Lights and Louvers Form lead, as shown, to fit over guards. Open clips are provided for the installation of the lead. 9/16" (14 mm) Hammer flat Cut lead to fit around base anchor strap Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Base anchor strap Floor to ceiling structural angle by others Tackwelds Heads of the screws used in dimple holes may be filled and ground smooth. Weld frame to structural angles Attach frame directly to wood (or metal) studs with screws. Fit lead around these anchor strap and flatten for the installation of the base anchor. Standard wire masonry anchor Application Lead lined frames are intended for use in the X-ray Room locations in Health Care facilities. Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft labeled or non-labeled F and MU Series Frames. • Frames are supplied knock-down (KD). Frame preparation and installation of lead lining by others. Notes: • Thickness of lead varies as required or specified for the type of equipment being used. • Lead is located on the door side of the frame, covering the inside surfaces of the face, rabbet, stop and part, or all, of the soffit. Lead linings are to be overlapped at the miters of the frame. • It is recommended that the installation of the lead be done by a local lead contractor who may also be installing lead in the walls, floor and ceiling of the room where the lead lined frame is being used. • For masonry wire anchoring applications only with all others being subject to the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Lead supplied by others. 2. CAUTION: Any cutting of lead to fit around hardware reinforcements can cause leakage of X-Rays through the frame. 3. The doors, walls and other perimeter construction must also include integral lead lining. 4. Wire masonry anchors only (labeled and non-labeled) Purpose Attachment clips are furnished for the installation of lead lining in frames used in X-Ray rooms. 76 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Rough buck frames Variations Doors 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7mm)] Rough Buck Frames Typical wall detail Variations Rough buck frames 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7mm)] Rough Buck Holes field drilled in channel and wall. Fasteners by others. 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3mm)] Frame Lights and Louvers Existing wall Holes field drilled in Cabinet Rough Buck installation. Frame and Rough Buck after Frame must be welded. Fasteners by others. Elevations 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3mm)] Frame Tornado Hurricane Specialty Application Rough Buck (Cabinet) frames are specialty frames that include a sub-channel (Rough Buck). The sub-channel is attached to an existing wall condition. The exposed steel (Cabinet Frame) is then attached to the sub-channel with fasteners provided by others. Rough Buck (Cabinet) frames are rarely used. They are usually installed in pre-cast existing masonry wall applications. Hardware Purpose Using this frame application allows contractors to install the Rough Buck relatively early in the construction cycle. The finished frame (Cabinet Frame) is then installed at a later date. Product availability This frame option is available on special order only. It is a Non-Stock item. It is available as a non-labeled frame only. Fire Rated Products Performance • 77 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Frame variations and options • Applied stops Applied stops Cased Open Frame Section Standard Template Hinge Preparation (at standard Steelcraft locations) Tornado Application Frames with applied stops are used in commercial and/or institutional applications where sound control is a consideration. Frames configured as Cased Open sections can be prepared for standard template hinges at standard Steelcraft vertical locations. Applied stops, manufactured by others, can be attached to the center portion of the frame either as a hardware item, for safeguarding acoustical control, weather stripping or for spring adjustable sealing. The field applied stop must provide a 1 9/16" (40 mm) rabbet to accommodate a 1 3/8" (35 mm) thick door, or a 1 15/16" (49 mm) rabbet accommodating a 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick door. Purpose Frames for applied stops provide versatility for the building owner to accommodate security, sound attenuation or weather protection using integrated sealing hardware. Product availability This frame option is available as non-labeled only for the following Steelcraft Series of frames: FN16, FN14, F16, F14, MU16 and MU 14, DW16, DW14, K16, and K14. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home 78 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/09 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Hardware Plaster Guard Plaster Guard Standard or Universal Hinge Reinforcement Tornado Auxiliary Hinge Reinforcement 3HR0102P001-GL The frame face • The soffit section The auxiliary reinforcement is primarily applicable to the top hinge reinforcement of 4 1/2" (114 mm) or 5" (127 mm) hinge reinforcements, but may be used on other hinge locations when specified. The 7 gauge (4.7 mm) hinge reinforcement (projection welded to the frame at the factory) Product availability High frequency hinge reinforcements are available factory installed, or, may be installed in the local Steelcraft distributor’s fabrication shop and is applicable to all series of Steelcraft labeled and non-labeled steel frames. Automatic Operators, such as those from LCN http://us.allegion.com/en/home/support/library.html (search "automatic operators" filtered by LCN; Catalogs) or any manufacturer, place a great deal of stress on the hinges of a frame and can cause failure. When using automatic operators with butt hinging systems any frame used must include all of the following: • • • High frequency hinge reinforcing installed Performance • Fire Rated Products Automatic operators 14 gauge steel 5" heavy weight hinges • 79 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 03/07/16 • Technical data manual • Hardware • • Purpose The optional high frequency hinge reinforcement provides additional strength to the 4 1/2" (114 mm) or 5" (127 mm) hinge reinforcement specified for use in high abuse openings, including dutch doors, and doors with automatic operators. Specialty Application High frequency hinge reinforcements are installed in frames located in high abuse areas of commercial and/or institutional facilities formed to match the contour of the frame, the 10 gauge (3 mm) auxiliary hinge reinforcement is arc welded in 3 locations of the frame: Hurricane Auxiliary Hinge Reinforcement 3HR0103P002-GL Elevations Arc Weld 3 Places Each Reinforcement Lights and Louvers Standard or Universal Hinge Reinforcement Doors Arc Weld 10 Gauge 3 Places Auxiliary Hinge Each Reinforcement Reinforcement Variations 10 Gauge Auxiliary Hinge Reinforcement Frames High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series Variations Hardware Frames Variations Doors Frame variations and options • Thick doors Thick doors 3 Over 1 ⁄4" thru 3" thick Throat Opening Elevations 2˝ (50mm) 5/8˝ (16mm) Door Thickness plus (3/16˝ (5mm) Varies 1-9/16˝ (40mm) Tornado Jamb Depth Specialty Hurricane * 1/2˝ (13mm) * 1/2˝ (13mm) Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" Frame depth Application • Door rabbet to be equal to the door thickness plus 3/16" (5 mm) for clearances Backset on Hinge preparation must be specified: • • • • Regular Weight Heavy Weight Backset on Strike preparation must be specified Frame must be welded Purpose To accommodate the varying thickness of Specialty doors requiring a standard frame profile. Product availability This special frame option is available for Labeled and Nonlabeled 16 gauge (1.3 mm) and 14 gauge (1.7 mm) Steelcraft F and FN Series frames. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware • 80 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Weather seals Doors Flexible Leg Lights and Louvers Rigid Leg Variations SECTION OF WEATHERSTRIP Approximately 1/16˝ lap Frames PS-074™ Surface applied weatherstrip Variations Weather seals Strike Jamb/Head Corner Elevations STRIKE JAMB Tornado HINGE JAMB ASTRAGAL Specialty Application The Weatherstrip is manufactured from a flexible, black plastic material (TPE) that is resistant to paint migration, impervious to fatigue and capable of withstanding extreme temperatures: • PS-074™ should not be applied when the temperature is below 50°F (10°C) or above 100°F (38°C). • Warranted shelf life of adhesive is 12 months when stored at 70°F (21°C) and 50% relative humidity. • When tested in accordance with ASTM E-283 (air infiltration) and ASTM E-331 (water resistance) PS-074 Weatherstrip had an air infiltration rate of .074 cubic feet per minute, per lineal foot of crack, and, no water leakage. Fire Rated Products Ideal temperature range to apply PS-074 Weatherstrip is 70° to 90°F (21° to 32°C). Hardware • Purpose Steelcraft PS074 Weatherstrip, when applied to frames and overlapping astragals, will perform as an effective seal against adverse weather conditions. Performance Product availability This product is available from factory inventory and can be applied to the full line of Steelcraft frames. Application to label frames is subject to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. • 81 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • Hurricane HEAD Frames Variations Doors Frame variations and options • Throat fillers Throat fillers Rigid vinyl 1/2˝ (13mm) 1/2˝ (13mm) Jamb Filler Elevations Throat Reduced by 1/8˝ (3mm) Double Face Tape Jamb Filler Thick Leg Toward Inside of Throat Opening Tornado Typical Frame Section with 2 Throat Fillers Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Head Filler Typical Frame Section with 1 Throat Filler Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Throat Reduced by 1/4˝ (6mm) Application The Steelcraft Throat filler is made of extruded rigid vinyl: • Sections supplied with double faced tape applied to the inside lip for installation on frame backbends. • Standard length of Throat filler sections is 87" (2210 mm) to ensure continuous sections that accommodate heights up to 7'2" (2184 mm). • To be applied to the backbend(s) of frames after they have been installed on the wall: • Jamb filler(s) are to be equal to the overall length of the jamb backbend. • Head filler(s) are to be 1" (25 mm) less than the overall length of the head backbend. Product availability This optional frame component is available from factory inventory and is applicable to Steelcraft non-labeled DW and K Series frames. Purpose When wall thickness is between 1/8" (3 mm) to 1/4" (6 mm) less than the frame throat dimension, Throat filler section(s) can be used to fill the gap, assuring the proper amount of grip required to complete the installation. 82 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Kerf frames Throat Opening Throat Opening Throat Opening Doors * 1/2˝ (13mm) Variations * 1/2˝ (13mm) * 1/2˝ (13mm) Frames Integral Variations Kerf frames 5/16˝ (8mm) Varies 1-9/16˝ (40mm) Jamb Depth 5/8˝ (16mm) Varies 2-1/8˝ (54mm) Jamb Depth: 5˝ – 14-3/4˝ 1-9/16˝ (40mm) Jamb Depth 2˝ 5/8˝ (16mm) 5/8˝ (16mm) Jamb Depth: 5˝ – 14-3/4˝ F, MU, DW, and K Series: 5" (127 mm) min. through 14 3/4" (375 mm) for standard profile. • F Series: 4 1/8" (105 mm) min. through 14 3/4" (375 mm) for single rabbet • Note: EMA anchors require minimum jamb depth of 5 5/8" for standard profile frames. Miter: 45° die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip. Opening Size: 8'0" x 8'0" (2439 mm x 2439 mm) maximum. Profile Options: 1 15/16" (49 mm) or 1 9/16" (40 mm) equal rabbet profiles or single rabbet profiles. The kerf gasketing specifically fits Steelcraft frame kerf profiles, is rated 3 hours in hollow metal, and is supplied and available for replacement from the Parts section of the price manual. Available in lengths of 38", 86", and 97" in bronze (brown) color only. If shorter door openings are ordered, the next longer length gasketing is supplied to be trimmed in the field to desired fit. For openings over 8', an additional piece of gasketing is supplied. Product availability This optional frame feature is available for the following Steelcraft frame series: • • Equal and unequal rabbet F16, MU16, DW16 and K16 Single rabbet F16 Labeled application Maximum 3 hour fire rating approval up to an 8'0" x 8'0" opening size. Fire Rated Products *Backbend: 7/16" (11 mm) for 5 3/4" frame jamb depth on F Series only. Jamb Depth: 4-1/8˝ – 14-3/4˝ Hardware Face: Standard 2" (51 mm) face head and jamb dimensions with 4" (102 mm) face head optional on equal and unequal rabbet only. Jamb Depth Performance Application The Integral Kerf frame is intended for use in areas, interior or exterior, which require a further reduction in air flow from the door and frame. The kerf material is manufactured from a durable, UV-resistant, polyethylene cladding covering the urethane foam. The gasket material complies with UL 10C. They have also passed the water penetration test up to 34 mph per ASTM E-331. • Frames are supplied knock-down as standard with gasket material shipped loose for insertion into frame by others. • 83 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/14/20 • Technical data manual • Specialty • Varies Tornado Jamb Depth: 2-1/8˝ (54mm) Hurricane • Gauge: 16 Ga. (1.3 mm) F Series Face Elevations 2-1/8˝ (54mm) MU, DW, and K Series Face Lights and Louvers F Series Frames Anchoring systems F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series Flush Frames 4. Special Frame Anchors: Anchor details and availability of lock-in anchors will vary with the following frame profile changes: • • • Elevations Tornado • Existing Masonry Walls: Specifically designed (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are used to add support for bolting the frame into the rough opening of an existing wall. • Wood Stud Walls: Lock-in (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are designed to be attached to the wood studs of a rough opening. • Steel Stud Walls: Lock-in (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are designed to be attached to the webbing of the closed steel studs which are built around the frame. • Universal Stud Wall Anchors: Universal lock-in (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are designed for use in either wood or steel stud wall applications. Maximum jamb depth is 9 1/2". Fire Rated Products Specialty 2. Anchoring Applications: Hardware Hurricane Anchoring and installation notes 1. All Frames in this category are supplied standard with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Masonry Wall: Masonry wire anchors (3/16" [5 mm] diameter) provide maximum engagements in mortar joints, and allow for full internal grouting during installation. The anchor is to be spread wider than the jamb depth and twisted into position. Adjustable base anchors are attached directly to the floor and adjusted. The wall is built around the anchored frame. Performance Double Rabbet: weld-in anchors required over 9 1/2" jamb depth. FE and DE Series Double Egress Frames: Anchor details will vary due to frame and application conditions. 6. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted Frames: • Architectural Single Rabbet: all details will vary. 5. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, and HMMA 84. Lights and Louvers Doors Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Variations Variations General Information Home • When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of the frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. • When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to grouting. • Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in drywall. 7. All Fire Rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Adjustable Base Anchors: • Field attached (16 Ga.) base anchors provides direct attachment and adjustability for out of level base surface conditions. • If frame is NOT to be set directly on the floor (slab) adjust base anchor UPWARD as required. 84 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home Existing Wall Anchor HINGE HINGE 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire Doors Masonry “T” Anchor Variations HINGE HINGE Wire Masonry Anchor Frames HINGE HINGE HINGE Variations Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors are supplied Masonry Wall Applications Masonry wall applications on standard F Series frames having 2” faces Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors areare supplied Masonry Wall Applications Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors supplied Masonry Wall ApplicationsMasonry “T” Anchor Wire Masonry Anchor Existing Wall Anchor onon standard F Series frames having 2” faces standard F Series frames having 2” faces Wire Masonry Anchor Masonry “T” Anchor Existing Wall Anchor Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors are suppliedare supplied Masonry Wall Applications Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors are supplied Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors Masonry Wall Applications Masonry Wall Applications Wire Masonry Anchor Masonry “T” Anchor Existing Wall Anchor on standard F Series frames having 2” faces on standard F on Series frames havingframes 2” faces standard F Series having 2” faces WireMasonry Masonry Anchor Masonry “T” Anchor“T” Anchor Existing Wall Anchor Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors are supplied Wire Anchor Masonry “T” Anchor Existing Wall Anchor Wire Masonry Anchor Masonry Existing Wall Anchor Masonry Wall Applications on standard F Series frames having 2” faces General Information Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Stud Wall Stud wallApplications applications HINGE HINGE STRIKE STRIKE HINGE HINGE STRIKE STRIKE 3/16˝ (5mm) dia. wire Stud Wall Applications Stud Wall Applications Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor for Wood Stud Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor forfor Wood Stud Partition Partition Stud Wall Applications Stud Wall Applications Stud Wall Applications Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor Wood Stud Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Partition Partition Partition Partition Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor for Wood Stud Stud Wall Applications Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor for Wood Stud Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud AnchorLock-In for Wood Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor AnchorStud Lock-In Anchor Partition Partition Lock-In Anchor Partition PartitionLock-In Anchor Partition Partition Universal Stud Anchor Anchor for Steel Stud Anchor forLock-In WoodAnchor Stud Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Anchor Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Anchor Lock-In Lock-In Anchor Partition Partition HINGE HINGE HINGE HINGE HINGE Lock-In Anchor Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard Adjustable SillSill Anchors areare provided as as standard Adjustable Anchors provided standard HINGE Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard Tornado Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard Attached with S.M. screws furnished Attached with S.M. Attached with S.M. screws furnished screws furnished Attached with S.M. Attached with S.M. Attached with S.M. screws furnished screws furnished screws furnished Attached with S.M. screws furnished Hurricane HINGE Lock-In Anchor Elevations Lock-In Anchor Lights and Louvers HINGE HINGE HINGE STRIKE STRIKE STRIKE Anchor Quantities: • 3 per jamb through 7´6" height 4 per jamb over 7´6" to 12´0" height 1 adjustable base anchor per jamb Anchor Locations: Locate all anchors on hinge jamb as close to top of hinge reinforcement as possible. • Locate anchors on strike jamb in the corresponding position as the hinge jamb. Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors Fire Rated Products Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors Sill Anchors Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors SillSill Anchors Specialty Weld-In Jamb Anchors are supplied for custom frames and special wall applications when specified. Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors Anchors Masonry Wall Application Stud wall anchors Sill anchors Masonry wall application Stud Wall Anchors Sill Anchors Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors Sill AnchorsSill Anchors Masonry Wall Application Stud Wall Anchors Sill Anchors 85 Architectural • Performance Existing Weld-In Tube & Strap Weld-In Yoke “Z” Steel Stud WeldWeld-In Wood Weld-In Weld-In Wood Wall Anchor Anchor Special & Yoke In for Special Stud Anchor Floor Anchor Stud Base Anchor Existing Weld-Infor Tube & Strap Strap Weld-In “Z”Anchor Steel Stud WeldWeld-In Wood Weld-In Weld-In Wood Existing Weld-In Tube & Strap Masonry Weld-In Yoke “Z” Steel Stud WeldWeld-In Wood Weld-In Weld-In Wood Profile Frames Wall Anchor Profile AnchorFrames for Special Strap & Anchor In Anchor for Special Stud Anchor Floor Anchor Stud Base Anchor Wall Anchor Anchor for Special Strap & In Anchor for Special Stud Anchor Floor Anchor Stud Base Anchor Existing Weld-In Tube & Strap Weld-In Yoke “Z” Steel Stud WeldWeld-In WoodWeld-In WoodWeld-In Weld-In Weld-In WoodWeld-In Wood Profile Frames Masonry Anchor Profile Frames Existing Weld-In Tube &Weld-In Strap Weld-In Yoke “Z” Steel Stud WeldWeld-In Weld-In Wood Existing Tube & Strap Weld-In “Z” Steel Stud Weld-Wood Weld-In Profile Frames MasonryYoke Anchor Profile Frames Wall Anchor Anchor Anchor Special Strap Anchor Special Stud Anchor Stud Anchor Floor Floor Anchor Floor Stud Base Anchor Wall Anchor forfor Special Strap && In In Anchor forfor Special Stud Anchor Anchor Stud Base Anchor Wall Anchor Anchor for Special Strap & In Anchor for Special Anchor Stud Base Anchor Existing Weld-In & Strap Weld-In Yoke “Z” SteelFrames Stud WeldWeld-In Wood Weld-In Weld-In Wood Profile Frames Masonry Anchor Profile Frames Profile Frames Masonry Anchor Profile Frames ProfileTube Frames Masonry Anchor Profile Wall Anchor Anchor for Special Strap & In Anchor for Special Stud Anchor Floor Anchor Stud Base Anchor Profile Frames Masonry Anchor Profile Frames Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • Hardware • Maximum adjustment 1-3/8˝ (35mm) Maximum adjustment Maximum adjustment below bottom of frame 1-3/8˝ (35mm) 1-3/8˝ (35mm) Maximum adjustment Maximum adjustment Maximum adjustment below bottom of of frame below bottom frame 1-3/8˝ (35mm) 1-3/8˝ (35mm) 1-3/8˝ (35mm) Maximum adjustment below bottom of frame below bottombelow of frame bottom of frame 1-3/8˝ (35mm) below bottom of frame Specialty • • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Frames Variations Doors Tornado Anchoring and installation notes 1. Drywall Frames are supplied standard with field adjustable compression anchors in each jamb and adjustable base anchors. DW Series Frames are designed especially for use in installations using wall baseboards. 2. Anchoring Applications: • • Masonry Wall: Not recommended. • Optional Security Anchor: Security Stud Anchors are recommended in frames over 8´0" (2438 mm) high or in frames installed in areas where security is a priority. Locate the Security Stud Anchor immediately above or below the strike reinforcements, and on both faces (secure and entrance sides) of the jamb. Security Stud Anchors may be used in both the strike and hinge jambs. They are also recommended to be used in the head of frames for pairs of doors. Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations DW and K Series drywall frames Wood and Steel Stud Walls: Adjustable compression anchors are factory located near the top of each jamb. These anchors can be easily adjusted with either a screw driver or power driver. Adjustable lock-in base anchors are provided for attachment directly to the wall floor (sill) runner. 3. Grouting of the DW and K Series Frames is not recommended. 4. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, and HMMA 840. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 5. Installation Caution Notice: • After the frame pieces have been installed over the wallboard, the frame is squared by adjusting the compression anchor screws located in the soffit of the jambs. Turning the screw in a clockwise direction will tighten the frame. • • DO NOT over tighten the compression anchors. Check to insure the opening is plumb. 6. All Fire Rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 86 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems STRIKE Lights and Louvers HINGE Doors Jamb/Compression Anchor (refer to page 93) Variations Stud Wall Applications (refer to page 93) Frames HINGE Variations Standard Field Adjustable Compression Jamb Anchors are supplied as standard for DW & K Series frames having 2” faces Optional Security Applications (refer to page 93) Elevations HINGE Tornado Either Adjustable Sill Anchors or Counter Sunk Sill Anchor Holes are provided as standard Specialty • • Hurricane Anchor Quantities: • 1 compression anchor per jamb through 9"depth 2 compression anchors per jamb for 9"depth and greater 2 twist-in strap base anchors per jamb Anchor Locations: Compression anchors are factory installed near the top of each jamb. • The twist-in anchors are installed into the Base Anchor Attaching Strap that is factory installed at the bottom of each jamb. Anchor Options: • Security Jamb Anchor See description on the previous page K Series Base Anchor (refer to page 94) Fire Rated Products • • DW Series Adjustable Lock-in Base Anchor (refer to page 94) Hardware • See details on Page 93 Performance • 87 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Frames Variations Wire masonry Material 3/16" (5 mm) dia. wire Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, and DE SR Single Rabbet Masonry T Frame depths 3" through 14 3/4" Face variations Fits all face variations Frame attachment Lock-in Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Wall construction Masonry block or brick Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. Yoke & strap masonry Tornado Elevations CO Cased Open Hardware Specialty Hurricane DR Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) NOTE profile must have back bends Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Profile variations Material 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Material 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Supplied Factory welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE, FP for new masonry (additional methods shown in "FP14 Series flush frames" on page 209.) Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE SR: Single Rabbet Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Profile variations SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations CO: Cased Open DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must havebackbends DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Frame depths All frame depths For frame depths over 12 3/4" 2 anchors welded at each anchor location Frame depths All frame depths Ordered specifically to fit frame depths Face variations Fits all face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Face variations Fits all face variations Frame attachment Arrives to jobsite welded into frame Frame attachment Lock-in Application Factory welded Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Wall construction Masonry block or brick Wall construction Masonry block or brick Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. 88 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Butterfly existing wall SR: Single Rabbet Doors F Variations Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series Frames 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Variations Material DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Profile variations CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend 4 3/4" through 9 1/8" Adjustable Frame depths Fits all depths up to 9 1/8" Single Rabbet up to 3 3/4" Lock-in or factory welded Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed. When specified welded, arrives to jobsite welded into frame. Wall construction Masonry block, brick, existing or pre-cast Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor Additional butterfly anchor used as the base anchor Material 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Material 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Welded in prior to shipment Supplied Welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE, FP for new masonry (additional methods shown in "FP14 Series flush frames" on page 209.) Tornado Tube & strap existing wall Hurricane Hat spacer existing wall Elevations 2" face only. Frame attachment Lights and Louvers Face variations Specialty Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations All frame depths Frame depths For frame depths over 9 1/4" 2 anchors welded at each anchor location DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Fire Rated Products CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend Hardware SR: Single Rabbet CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend Frame depths All frame depths For frame depths over 9 1/4" 2 anchors welded at each anchor location Factory welded Face variations Fits all face variations Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Frame attachment Factory welded Wall construction Masonry block, brick, existing or pre-cast Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Wall construction Masonry block, brick, existing or pre-cast Base anchor Additional Hat Spacer anchor used as the base anchor Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor Additional Tube & Strap anchor used as the base anchor Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 • Technical data manual • • 89 Architectural Fits all face variations Frame attachment Performance Face variations General Information Home Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Frames Variations Universal stud Lock-In Anchor Material 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series F, MU DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Profile variations CO: Cased Open Wood stud Doors Frame depths 4 3/4", through 9 1/2" Ordered specifically to fit frame depths Face variations 2" only Frame attachment Lock-in Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Wall construction Wood stud or steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor Additional wood stud anchor used as the base anchor Wood stud Lock-In Anchor Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations NOTE: profile must have a backbend Hardware Specialty Lock-In Anchor Material 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Material 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Supplied Welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series F Applicable Frame Series F, MU, FE, DE, C DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Profile variations CO: Cased Open DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Profile variations Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products NOTE: profile must have a backbend CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a return Frame depths 4 3/4", 5 3/4", 6 3/4", 7 3/4", 8 3/4" non-adjustable Frame depths Face variations 2" only Face variations Frame attachment Lock-in Application Must be welded to frame Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Frame attachment Wall construction Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Wood stud walls Application Fire label applications Wood stud walls UL/WH 3 hour max. Wall construction UL/WH 3 hour max. Additional wood stud anchor used as the base anchor Fire label applications Base anchor Base anchor Additional wood stud anchor used as the base anchor All frame depths Fits all face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Lock-In Anchor 90 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/16/20 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Closed steel stud F DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Profile variations Doors Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series Variations 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Frames Material Variations Lock-In Anchor CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a return 4 3/4", 5 3/4", 6 3/4", 7 3/4", 8 3/4" non-adjustable Face variations 2" only Frame attachment Lock-in Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Wall construction Closed steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. Lights and Louvers Recessed steel stud Elevations Flush steel stud Frame depths Tornado Material 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Welded in prior to shipment Supplied Welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE, C Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE, C SR: Single Rabbet CO: Cased Open SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations NOTE: profile must have a return Frame depths Face variations All frame depths Fits all face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Must be welded to frame Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Wall construction Closed steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a return Frame depths All frame depths Face variations Fits all face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Frame attachment Must be welded to frame Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Wall construction Closed steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Base anchor See page 92 for base anchor details. Fire Rated Products Frame attachment DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Hardware Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Specialty 18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Hurricane Material Performance • 91 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Frames Variations Field adjustable base Attached with S.M. screws furnished Maximum adjustment 1-3/8˝ (35mm) below bottom of frame Fixed base Doors 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series F, MU Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Frame depths All frame depths Ordered to specifically fit frame depths Face variations Fits all face variations Frame attachment Retaining clip is factory welded into each jamb. Adjustable anchor is field attached and adjusted during installation. Application Anchor angle ship loose to jobsite, field attached and adjusted. Adjustable base anchors are manufactured to fit the frame profile, depth and profile variations which must be specified when ordering this anchor. Wall construction Masonry block or brick, steel stud Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Compression jamb Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Maximum adjustment 1-3/8˝ (35mm) below bottom of frame Material Material 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series F, FN, MU, FE, DE SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations CO: Cased Open Ordered to specifically fit frame depths Fits all face variations Frame attachment Must be welded to frame Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Wall construction Masonry block or brick, steel stud Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. 92 • 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Factory welded in prior to shipment Applicable Frame Series DW, K SR: Single Rabbet All frame depths Face variations Performance Fire Rated Products Frame depths Architectural DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Material Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend All DW & K frame depths Frame depths For frame depths over 9", 2 anchors welded at each anchor location Face variations 2" face only Frame attachment Must be welded to frame Application Arrives at jobsite welded into frame Wall construction Wood or steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 1 1/2 hour max. Base anchor See page 94 for sill anchor details • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 Home General Information Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Security anchor (optional) for DW and K Series SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations Doors DW, K Variations Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series Frames 24 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Variations Material DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend 2" face only Frame attachment Lock-in Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Wall construction Wood or steel stud walls Security anchor is field installed in the strike jamb directly above or below the strike preparation. Fire label applications UL/WH 1 1/2 hour max. Adjustable base for DW Series Base for K Series Elevations All frame depths Face variations Lights and Louvers Frame depths Factory prepared holes: screws by others Tornado Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series DW SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) #8 Phillips Flat Head Sheet Metal Screws (2 per jamb). Supplied by others. Supplied Base of each jamb is factory prepared with a countersunk hole to accept a #8 Phillips Flat Head Screw. Supplied by others. Applicable Frame Series K CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend All frame depths Face variations 2" face only Frame attachment Retaining clip is factory welded into each jamb. Adjustable anchor is field attached and adjusted during installation. Application Anchor angle ship loose to jobsite, field attached and adjusted. Wall construction Wood or steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 1 1/2 hour max. SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Fire Rated Products Frame depths Hardware Material Specialty 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied Hurricane Material CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile must have a backbend All frame depths Face variations Fits all face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Frame attachment Counter sunk holes pierced onto the face at the factory Application Field attached Wall construction Wood or steel stud walls Fire label applications UL/WH 1 1/2 hour max. • 93 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 • Technical data manual • Performance Frame depths General Information Home Frame variations and options • Anchoring systems Frames Variations Doors Sill section base Tornado Material: 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Material 16 Ga. Galvannealed Steel Supplied: Shipped loose for field installation Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series: F Series Hollow Metal Mullions Applicable Frame Series F, FN, SR: Single Rabbet Profile variations: DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) SR: Single Rabbet DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) All frame depths Frame depths All frame depths Face variations: Ordered specifically to fit face Face variations Fits all pace variations Frame attachment: Anchor to floor, mullion slides over Frame attachment Anchor to floor, sill snaps on top Application: Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Floor construction: All Floor construction All Fire label applications: UL/WH 3 hour max. Fire label applications UL/WH 3 hour max. Material 12 Ga. Galvanized Steel Supplied Shipped loose for field installation Applicable Frame Series Corner posts Profile variations DR: Double Rabbet (equal & unequal) Frame depths All frame depths Face variations Ordered specifically to fit face Frame attachment Attached to floor, corner post slides over Application Ship loose to jobsite, field installed Floor construction All Fire label applications UL/WH Approved Corner Post Anchor Corner post base (2- and 3-way posts) Corner post anchor (2- and 3-way posts) Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural Profile variations Frame depths: Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Mullion base Mullion base anchor Space equal to jamb depth minus 1/8˝ (3mm) 94 • Anchor dimension • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 Home General Information A14 Series full glass entrance doors................................... 121 About the product............................................................................... 121 Installation.............................................................................................. 121 Features and benefits........................................................................ 121 Specification compliance................................................................ 121 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 121 Standard hardware preparations................................................ 123 Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions.............................. 123 Standard glass design options.....................................................124 Glass light options .............................................................................124 Specialty Hardware About the product..............................................................................107 Installation.............................................................................................107 Features and benefits.......................................................................107 Specification compliance...............................................................107 Fire ratings..............................................................................................107 Options....................................................................................................107 Door construction.............................................................................. 108 Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions............................. 108 About the product............................................................................... 117 Installation.............................................................................................. 117 Features and benefits........................................................................ 117 Specification compliance................................................................ 117 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 117 Laminated core.....................................................................................118 Standard hardware preparations.................................................119 Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions...............................119 Door edge construction...................................................................120 Embossed Pattern Designs............................................................120 Glass light options..............................................................................120 Tornado Falcon SZ Series.......................................................................... 107 CE Series...........................................................................................117 Hurricane About the product............................................................................. 103 Installation............................................................................................ 103 Features and benefits...................................................................... 103 Specification compliance.............................................................. 103 Fire ratings............................................................................................. 103 Standard hardware preparations............................................... 105 Door edge construction.................................................................. 106 Glass light options............................................................................. 106 About the product............................................................................... 113 Installation.............................................................................................. 113 Features and benefits........................................................................ 113 Specification compliance................................................................ 113 Fire ratings............................................................................................... 113 Core construction................................................................................114 Standard hardware preparations.................................................115 Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions...............................115 Door edge construction....................................................................116 Glass light options...............................................................................116 Elevations SL Series..........................................................................................103 T Series............................................................................................. 113 Lights and Louvers About the product...............................................................................99 Installation..............................................................................................99 Features and benefits........................................................................99 Specification compliance................................................................99 Fire ratings...............................................................................................99 Standard hardware preparations.................................................101 Door edge construction...................................................................102 Glass light options .............................................................................102 Doors L Series.............................................................................................. 99 Variations Full flush door construction............................................................96 Full glass entrance door construction ......................................96 Sizes and performance.....................................................................96 Usage and application .....................................................................96 Installation..............................................................................................96 Job site storage.....................................................................................96 Construction notes..............................................................................97 Single door application .....................................................................97 Double door application...................................................................98 Frames General door information ........................................................ 96 Variations Doors B Series........................................................................................... 109 Fire Rated Products About the product............................................................................. 109 Installation............................................................................................ 109 Features and benefits...................................................................... 109 Specification compliance.............................................................. 109 Fire ratings............................................................................................. 109 Core construction................................................................................110 Standard hardware preparations.................................................. 111 Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions................................ 111 Door edge construction.................................................................... 112 Glass light options............................................................................... 112 Performance • 95 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Technical data manual • Tornado Frames Doors Doors • General door information General door information Steelcraft full flush doors are designed for virtually all construction requirements in commercial building applications. Their construction, durability and flexibility have been proven throughout the world in both operation and physical testing of all types. Full flush door construction • • • • Laminated (L and SL Series): Honeycomb core doors are designed for installation in all types of building construction, for both interior and exterior applications. The continuously bonded cores and full height mechanically interlocked edge seams provide attractive, flat and very durable doors to the commercial construction industry. Many options are available in this product Series including edge construction and core variations. Steel Stiffened (B Series): These internally steel stiffened core doors are designed for installation in all types of building construction, for both interior and exterior applications. The internal steel stiffeners are welded to the face sheets. The full height mechanically interlocked edge seams provide attractive and very durable doors to the commercial construction industry. Edge construction options are available. Architectural Usage and application To help simplify the use, selection and specification of Steelcraft door products, the following guidelines for base material selection can be used: Material Gauge: the following base material thickness values were taken from the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication for gauge number and equivalent thickness and describe the sheet steel products available from Steelcraft: • 20 Gauge [0.032" (0.8 mm)]: for Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse. • 18 Gauge [0.042" (1.0 mm)]: for Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with high use. • 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)]: for Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications having the potential of very high use. • 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)]: for Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with extremely high use. Material Selection: In addition to the thickness of base material, commercial quality material types are supplied as specified in ANSI/SDI A250.8 Products > General > Steel Specifications, and are identified by Steelcraft as follows: Embossed (CE Series): The 2, 6, and 8 panel embossed doors, with a polystyrene core, are designed for installation in all types of building construction for both interior and exterior applications. The crisp and deeply embossed panels create the appearance of hand carved doors. The continuously bonded cores and full height mechanically interlocked edge seams provide attractive, flat and very durable doors to the commercial construction industry. • • Cold Rolled Steel (CRS or CR) for normal/interior use. • GRAINTECH™ woodgrain embossment for hand stained steel available in 18 or 16 gauge galvanealled only, limited to series L, CE, T. Temperature Rise (T Series): T Series doors are equipped with a mineral core and are designed for use in locations requiring a temperature rise rating. The use of this door series is usually dictated by the local building code. Steelcraft T Series doors carry a 250° F (121° C) temperature rise Listing. Edge construction options are available. • Stainless for exterior, sterile, or special architectural openings. See Specialty > Stainless in this tech data. Full glass entrance door construction The A14 Series doors are specifically designed for entrances and applications requiring full glass designs. They are an attractive and very durable alternative to aluminum entrance doors. Sizes and performance All doors are manufactured and supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as published in ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Special size products are available to meet the unique construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those requirements. Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Galvannealed Steel (GALV) for exterior openings or for interior openings with high humidity / when requiring rust prohibitive properties. Note: For recommendations on material and door types, refer to the product specification tables in the Architectural section of this manual, "SDI selection and usage guide" on page 334. Installation Installation of all Steelcraft frames and doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All Fire Rated doors must be installed and maintained in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80, and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Job site storage Store doors under cover, in a dry area and in an upright position. All ferrous metal products should be stored where they will not be exposed to, or come in contact with water. This is particularly true of products such as doors, which have large flat surfaces on which water may collect if they are stacked horizontally. Only use vented plastic or canvas. The use of no-vented materials, create a humidity chamber, which promotes blistering and corrosion. Place no more than 5 doors in a group, with all material on planking or blocking at least 4 in. (100 mm) off the ground, 2 in. (50 mm) off a paved area or the floor slab. Provide a least 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) space (wood strip) between all units to permit air circulation. 96 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Doors • General door information Construction notes Single door application Header Frame Rabbet Net Door Width 1⁄8" (3 mm) 3⁄32" (2 mm) 4. Optional edge seams are prepared prior to the application of factory, baked-on primer paint. Doors Nominal Door Width 3⁄32" (2 mm) 3. Top and bottom edges of all doors are closed with 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] welded channels. Exterior applications require the addition of top caps to protect against weather infiltration. Lock Jamb Frame Rabbet Variations Hinge Jamb Frame Rabbet 2. Hardware Preparations: to meet specifications, doors can be prepared for all commercial mortised hardware, and can be factory reinforced for surface applied hardware applications. Frames Doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. Variations 1. 5. Standard hardware preparations, mortised and reinforced for the following: • Nominal Door Height Universal Hinge Preps: 4 1/2" (114 mm) patented preparation which allows for easy and quick field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) to heavy weight .180" (4.5 mm) hinges. Locks: a multitude of standard lock preps are available. The most commonly used with a 4 7/8" (124 mm) strike are 161, 61L and 86. Lights and Louvers • Net Door Height Elevations 6. Glass Lights with Dezigner® Trim: for doors with glazed cutouts, see the Lights and Louvers section of this Manual. Bottom of Frame 7. Louvers: for doors with attached louvers, see the Lights and Louvers section of this Manual. ¾" (19 mm) Bottom (at the Floor) = 3/4" (19 mm) to bottom of frame. Hinge Side = 3/32" (2 mm) to rabbet or jamb; Tornado Lock Side = 3/32" (2 mm) to rabbet or jamb; SL and SZ series square edge door Hinge side and Lock side clearances are 1/8" (3 mm) to rabbet or jamb. Specialty • • • • Hurricane Standard Operating Clearances (Installed in frame) • Top (at the Head) = 1/8" (3 mm) to bottom of head or transom panel; Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 97 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 9/7/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • General door information 3⁄32" (2 mm) Nominal Door Height Net Door Height Elevations Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Lock Jamb Frame Rabbet Nominal Door Width Active Inactive 3⁄32" (2 mm) 1⁄8" (3 mm) Header Frame Rabbet Variations Frames Hinge Jamb Frame Rabbet Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Double door application Bottom of Frame 3⁄32" (2 mm) ¾" (19 mm) Both leaves of double door elevations employ the same construction features as single swing and could include an optional overlapping astragal. Meeting Edges • A 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] "Z" astragal is furnished loose for installation in the field by others. Hardware Preparations: the inactive leaf can be prepared for hardware as specified. Standard Operating Clearances (installed in frame) • Head = 1/8" (3 mm) to bottom of head or transom panel. • Overlapping astragal kits are available to convert an active leaf to an inactive leaf. • • • • When an astragal is not used, the width of the inactive leaf is increased 3/32" (2 mm) when specified. • Hinge Side = 3/32" (2 mm) to rabbet on jamb. Bottom = 3/4" (19 mm) to bottom of frame. Meeting Edges = 3/32" (2 mm) with or without astragal. For openings without an astragal, a wide inactive leaf is used. Meeting edge details Refer to pages 143 - 150 for all standard astragal applications. Inactive Active 3⁄32" (2 mm) Active 3⁄32" (2 mm) Without Astragal (Wide Inactive Leaf) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 3⁄16" (2 mm) With Z Astragal (Typical) Wide Inactive 98 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 Home General Information Doors • L Series Core Systems that enhance the structural integrity of the door: Honeycomb (standard): 1" (25 mm) cell kraft honeycomb configuration that increases structural integrity while reducing overall weight • Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal performance • Polyurethane (optional): extreme thermal performance 2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: 1. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840s. 4. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. 5. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. 6. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. 7. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specification compliance 1. Door construction for Steelcraft L Series full flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings L Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). • 99 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 • Technical data manual • Performance 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. 3. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. Fire Rated Products Installation Welded Edge Seam (optional add to standard): intermittently welded using 1" long welds, then seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Option available on L18, L16 and L14 doors. Hardware L Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. • Specialty To meet application, specification and performance requirements, the L Series door offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations. Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min Tornado This premium door construction combines the strength and dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the laminate core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding marks. Tests have proven that the L Series door has high resistance to impact damage, low thermal conductivity and high STC ratings. • Hurricane The L20, L18, and L16 Series flush doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for full flush doors. The L14 Series flush doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for maximum duty full flush doors. Refer to the Architectural section for specifications and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges Elevations About the product • Lights and Louvers • Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft’s L Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations L Series Frames Variations Doors Doors • L Series Rigid Honeycomb Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core • 1" (25 mm) cell, Kraft honeycomb Optional Polystyrene Core • 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density slab • • • • • • Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion Phenol formaldehyde free Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond Optional cores are polystyrene or polyurethane Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Labeled applications Optional Polyurethane Core 1.8 pound (816.5g) per ft3 density slab • • • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Non-Labeled applications Tornado 3/4˝ 3/4˝ 3/4˝ (19mm) 3/4˝(19mm) (19mm) (19mm) Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Hardware Standard Premium Edge Construction • Beveled hinge & lock edges • • • Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam standard Seamless edge optional Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels • • Projection welded to both face sheets For optional caps, see "Weather seals" on page 151. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Door application and usage Series Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency L20 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel Standard Duty L20 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse Heavy Duty L18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel L18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use L16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel Extra Heavy Duty L16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use L14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel Maximum Duty L14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with extremely high use 100 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Doors • L Series Standard hardware preparations Inactive Leaf ASA Optional 14 Gauge Inactive Inactive Inactive Leaf Leaf Leaf ASA ASA ASA Optional Optional Optional 14Gauge 14 Gauge 14 Gauge Gauge Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Optional 14 Closer Inactive Leaf ASA Optional 14 Gauge Strike Prep with Closer Reinforcement Strike Strike Strike Prep Prep Prep with with with Closer Closer Closer Reinforcement Reinforcement Reinforcement Prep with Astragal attached Reinforcement Strike Prep with Closer Reinforcement Astragal attached Astragal Astragal Astragal attached attached attached Astragal attached • A multitude of standard lock preparations are available. The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • • Optional reinforcements for surface and concealed Closers are available. Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for: • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" (127 mm) x .146" (3.7 mm) standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges is also available. Lights and Louvers 86 Lock 86 86 86 Lock Lock Lock 86 Lock 86 Lock Doors 61L Lock 61L 61L 61L Lock Lock Lock 61L Lock 61L Lock Variations Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement 77Gauge 77 Gauge Gauge Universal Universal hinge hinge hinge reinforcement reinforcement reinforcement 7Universal Gauge Universal hinge 7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement reinforcement Frames Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Universal Universal Universal Mortise Mortise Mortise Hinge Hinge Hinge Prep Prep Prep Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Special hardware applications are available. In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Level Model Edge Construction Description Edge Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Level 1: Light Commercial L20 LF20 1 1 Full Flush Visible 3'-0" x 8'-0" 6'-0" x 8'-0" 18 Gauge [0.042" (1.0 mm)] 2 Seamless Filled 914 mm x 2438 mm 1829 mm x 2438 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] L18 LF18 2 LW18 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'-0" x 10'-0" 8'-0" x 10'-0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Hardware Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional Specialty Series Tornado • Hurricane Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Steelcraft product selection for L Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations. Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional L16 3 LW16 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'-0" x 10'-0" 8'-0" x 10'-0" 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] 4'-0" x 10'-0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 8'-0" x 10'-0" 2438 mm x 3048 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Level 4: Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional L14 LF14 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded • 101 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • Performance LW14 4 Fire Rated Products LF16 1 General Information Home Doors • L Series Frames Doors Variations Variations Door edge construction Optional Edge Seams available in the L Series doors: • L: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges. • • LF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. LW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. Standard visible edge seam Optional seamless edge L Series visible seam features Full height mechanical interlock • • • • LF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is tack welded above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam Elevations Lights and Louvers • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth LW Series Seam Welded Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is intermittently welded using 1" long welds • • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam Glass light options Tornado Dezigner® Trim 1-1/4" • Standard for(32 1/4"mm) Thick Glass • Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass 3/4" (19 mm) 1-1/4" 1-1/4" (32 mm) (32 mm) 1-1/4" 1-1/4" (32 mm) (32 mm) Performance Architectural 3/8" (10 mm)* 3/4" 3/4" (19 mm) (19 mm) * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) 3/4" for 1/2" glass 3/4" (19gap mm) (19 mm) 3/8" (10 mm)* 3/8" (10 mm)* * standard gap for 1/4" glass * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) 3/8" (10 mm)* optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 3/8"gap (10 mm)* for 1/2" glass * standard gap for 1/4" glass * 1-1/4" standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) optional 5/8" mm) gap for 1/2"(16 glass (32 mm) Flush Mounted Steel Trim gap for 1/2" glass • For 1" Thick Glass Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options) 3/4" (19 mm) 1-1/4" 1-1/4" (32 mm) (32 mm) 1-1/8" (29 mm)* 1-1/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1-1/4" (32 mm) (19 mm) (19 mm) (32 mm) 3/4" 1-1/8" * standard gap for 1" glass optional 1-1/8" 3/4" (19 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass (29 mm)* (19 mm) (29 mm)* Not available on 14 gauge doors Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. Note: Glazing type and thickness Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. vary per job requirements. Note: Glazing type and thickness Note: type and thickness varyGlazing per job requirements. vary per job requirements. Note: Louver size and type vary per requirements. Note: Louver size and type Note: Louver size and type vary per requirements. vary per requirements. Note: Louver size and type Note: Louver size and type vary per requirements. vary per requirements. 1-1/8" 1-1/8" (29 mm)* * standard gap for 1" glass optional (29 mm)* * standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Not available on 14 gauge doors Not available on 14 gauge doors * standard gap for 1" glass optional standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Divider* Muntins Are Not Available 7/8" (22available mm) gap glass Not onfor 143/4" gauge doors Not available on 14 gauge doors 102 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 Home General Information Doors • SL Series Core Systems that enhance the structural integrity of the door: Honeycomb (standard): 1" (25 mm) cell kraft honeycomb configuration that increases structural integrity while reducing overall weight • Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal performance • Polyurethane (optional): extreme thermal performance 2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. 3. Standard Hinge Preparations for 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight or .180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. 5. Square Hinge and Lock Edges allow for non-handed inventory control for local distribution. Elevations 4. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Lights and Louvers • Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft’s SL Series doors offer the following standard features, which enhance performance and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations SL Series The SL20 and SL18 Series Square Edge flush doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for full flush doors. Refer to Section 11 (Architectural) for specifications and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. SL Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick, with Square Edges. 1. Door construction for Steelcraft SL Series doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings SL Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). Hardware To meet application, specification and performance requirements, the SL Series door offers options including sizes, glass light designs and hardware preparations. Specification compliance Specialty This door construction combines the strength and dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the laminate core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding marks. Tests have proven that the construction employed has integral high resistance to impact damage, low thermal conductivity and high STC ratings. 7. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Tornado About the product Hurricane 6. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. Installation 1. Fire Rated Products Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. • 103 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 • Technical data manual • Performance 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Frames Variations Doors Doors • SL Series Rigid Honeycomb Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core • 1" (25 mm) cell, Kraft honeycomb Optional Polystyrene Core • 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density slab • • • • • • Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion Phenol formaldehyde free Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Labeled applications Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond 3/4˝ (19mm) Tornado 3/4˝ (19mm) 3/4˝ 3/4˝ (19mm) (19mm) Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels Standard Premium Edge Construction • Square hinge & lock edges • • • • Projection welded to both face sheets For optional caps, see "Weather seals" on page 151. Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam standard Door application and usage Series Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency SL20 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel Standard Duty SL20 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse SL18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Interior - Cold Rolled Steel Heavy Duty SL18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home 104 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Doors • SL Series Standard hardware preparations The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • • Optional reinforcements for surface Closers are available. Tornado Limited hardware applications are available. Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Steelcraft product selection for SL Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations. In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Level Model Description Edge Construction Edge Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Specialty • Hurricane • Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Template hinge preparations for 4 1/2" x .134" standard weight hinges or for 4 1/2" x .180" heavy weight hinges. Butt hinge preparations are cut through for non-handed function; spacer plates are furnished for field installation and handing. Lights and Louvers Optional 14 Gauge Closer Reinforcement Doors Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Prep with Astragal attached Variations 161 Lock 61L Available Frames Mortise Hinge 7 Gauge hinge reinforcement, reversible hinge fillers supplied Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Level 1: Light Commercial 1 1 Full Flush Visible 3'0" x 8'0" 6'0" x 8'0" 18 Gauge [0.042" (1.0 mm)] 914 mm x 2438 mm 1829 mm x 2438 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] 4'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" 1219 mm x 2438 mm 2438 mm x 2438 mm Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional SL18 2 1 Full Flush Visible 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm) Hardware SL20 Fire Rated Products Performance • 105 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • SL Series Frames Variations Door edge construction Optional Edge Seams available in the SL Series doors: • SL: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges. Standard visible edge seam Doors Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Features Full height mechanical interlock • • • Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details. Tornado Hurricane Glass light options Dezigner ® Trim 1-1/4" • Standard for 1/4" Thick Glass • (32 mm) Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass Specialty 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 3/4" 3/8" (10 mm)* (19 mm) Note: Note: Glazing type and thickness Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. vary per job requirements. * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 3/8" (10 mm)* Hardware * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) Note: Note: LouverLouver size and type size andvary type per requirements. vary per requirements. Fire Rated Products 3/4" (19 mm) 1-1/8" (29 mm)* Architectural Performance * standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Not available on 14 gauge doors 106 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Home General Information Doors • Falcon SZ Series Core Systems that enhance the performance of the door: • Honeycomb (standard): Kraft honeycomb cell design that increases structural integrity while reducing overall weight. • Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal performance. 2. 18 gauge Face Sheets 4. Non-Handed for 4 1/2"(114 mm) Hinge Preparations (.134") weight hinges (includes spacer plates which can be modified at install to accommodate heavyweight hinges). 5. *14 Gauge Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. 7. Square Hinge and Lock Edges for non-handed inventory control for local distribution. About the product The SZ Series Square Edge flush doors are designed to meet requirements for commercial quality full flush steel doors. Fire ratings Falcon SZ Series doors are listed for installations requiring compliance to negative pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). • Storage Room & closets. Retail entrance and back doors. Economy Hotel and Motel unit entrances. Falcon SZ Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick, with Square Edges. Installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Options The Falcon SZ Series door sizing and option configurations are available only as noted in this TD Sheet or on the related Price Book pages. Commonly available configuration options are not available on the Falcon SZ Series doors including the options listed below. • • • Factory installed glass lights. • If configuration options are required, refer to the SL or L Series products. Factory cutouts for louver or glass lights. Hardware preparations or reinforcements other than those outlined in this TD Sheet or the related Price Pages. Note: This tech data defines made-to-order SZ doors. Stock SZ doors have slight differences including *16 gauge inverted top and bottom channels, bottom channel recessed 9/16" versus typ 3/4", tighter mechanical interlock, and flush top caps at no additional charge. For inactive leaf, the active and inactive leaf must be ordered as made-to-order. • 107 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/16/20 • Technical data manual • Performance 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Doors are factory labeled with a Warnock Hersey 1 1/2 Hour (90 min) Mylar label. Fire Rated Products Installation 1. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Hardware • • • Door construction for Steelcraft’s Falcon SZ Series doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Specialty Typically, the SZ Series door is applicable to the following commercial applications: 1. Tornado Recommended area for use: The SZ Series flush doors are recommended for commercial applications which are not required to comply with architectural specifications. This product is targeted at Distributor over the counter sales with walk-in Contractor trades requiring stock opening sizes and basic hardware configurations. Specification compliance Hurricane This commercial door construction combines both the rigid construction and dimensional stability of steel with the integrity of the laminate core. The continuous bonding of the core to steel face sheets provides an attractive, flat door. 8. Factory Applied Rust Inhibiting Primer Elevations 6. Closer Reinforcement 14 Gauge minimum on all doors. Lights and Louvers 3. Full Height, Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft’s SZ Series doors offer the following standard features: Frames Features and benefits Variations Falcon SZ Series General Information Home Doors • Falcon SZ Series Frames Doors 1. Vertical edges (both hinge and lock) are square with a visible, epoxy filled mechanical interlock edge seam. Standard Core: Rigid Honeycomb Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion • No Bevel (Square) 2. Top and bottom edges are closed with inverted 14 gauge top and bottom channels (top cap not included, see ‘Parts’). Square Square (Non-Handed) Edge 3. Doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. Lock preparations for mortise and cylindrical locks follow ANSI A115.1 for mortise preparations and A115.2 for cylindrical. • Rim Exit Device preparation is reinforced on both hinge and lock side and located at 39 9/16" from bottom of door to center line of reinforcing. Phenol formaldehyde free • Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Rigid Honeycomb Optional Core: Polystyrene Core 1lb (433.6g) per ft3 density slab. • • Available: Mortised and reinforced: • Template hinge preparations for 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges. Butt hinge preparations are cut through for non-handed function; spacer plates are furnished for field installation and handing. • • • • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive. Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond. Polystyrene Core Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Door construction 61L Lock 161 Lock Hardware Non-Handed Mortise Hinge Prep RPD Closer Reinf. 14 Ga. Door application and usage Series Fire Rated Products 86ED Lock Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency SZ18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel SZ18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Heavy Duty Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Steelcraft product selection for Falcon SZ Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations. • In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Level Model Description Edge Construction Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Architectural Performance Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial SZ18 2 1 Full Flush Visible 4'0" x 7'0" 8'0" x 7'0" 16 gauge (1219 mm x 2134 mm) (2438 mm x 2134 mm) [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Note: The Falcon SZ Series must be ordered in single leaf configurations. An 86ED lock prep allows a distributor to supply a pair of doors with the appropriate Z Astragal. 108 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Doors • B Series Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges • Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. • Welded Edge Seam (optional add to standard): intermittently welded using 1" long welds, then seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Option available on B18, B16 and B14 doors. 3. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 4. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. Steelcraft B18, B16, and B14 Series flush doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for full flush, steel stiffened doors. The door face sheets are supported by the internal steel stiffeners, which extend the full door width. The stiffeners are welded to (1) face sheet and bonded to the opposite panel. Specification compliance 1. Door construction for Steelcraft B Series full flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). THE USE OF HIGH GLOSS PAINT IS NOT RECOMMENDED. High gloss paint accentuates the visibility of all welds. Fire ratings Installation 1. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. B Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). Fire Rated Products 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. 3. See Sound Openings section on page 243 for optional B-Door construction. Performance Note 1: For optional B-Door construction with STC-Stiffened Core, see SPECIALTY PRODUCTS: SOUND OPENINGS section page 243. Features and benefits • 109 Architectural Steelcraft’s B Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 • Technical data manual • Hardware B Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Specialty The B Series Door offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs, optional edge constructions and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations. 6. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Tornado About the product Hurricane 5. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. Elevations 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Lights and Louvers • Doors 2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: Variations Steel Stiffened core construction with welded 20 gauge hat section stiffeners. Frames 1. Variations B Series General Information Home Doors • B Series Frames Variations Doors Tornado Steel Stiffeners with Fiberglass Insulation 20 Ga. Stiffener Standard B Series Core • 20 gauge stiffeners • Stiffeners welded to inside of (1) face sheet and bonded to the opposite face • • • • • Vertical interior webs located 6" (152 mm) apart Weld spacing 5" (152 mm) on center along the full height of each stiffener Stiffener height extends full height of door thickness Areas between stiffeners filled with nominal 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density fiberglass batt insulation For optional B-Door construction with STC-Stiffened Core, "Sound openings" on page 220. Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction 14 gauge inverted 3/4˝ galvannealed top & (19mm) bottom channels Standard Premium Edge Construction Beveled hinge & lock edges • • • • • Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam standard Seamless edge optional • Projection welded to both face sheets • For optional caps, see ""Weather seals" on page 151. Door application and usage Series Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency B18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Heavy Duty B18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use B16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Extra Heavy Duty B16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use B14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Maximum Duty B14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with extremely high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Core construction 110 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Doors • B Series Standard hardware preparations Optional 14 Gauge Closer Reinforcement The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8" (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • • Optional reinforcements for surface and concealed Closers are available. Tornado Special hardware applications are available. Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Hurricane • Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for: • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" x .134" standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" x .180" heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" x .146" standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges is also available. Lights and Louvers Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Prep with Astragal attached Doors 86 Lock Variations 61L Lock Frames Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Steelcraft product selection for B Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations. In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Level Model Description Edge Construction Edge Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Specialty • Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional BF18 2 BW18 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional B16 3 BW16 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Level 4: Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional B14 BF14 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm • 111 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Performance BW14 4 Fire Rated Products BF16 Hardware B18 General Information Home Doors • B Series Frames Variations Door edge construction • • Vertical edges (both hinge and lock) are beveled 1/8" (3.2 mm) in 2" (51 mm) with a visible seam. • Optional Edge Seams available in the B Series doors: Top and bottom edges are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] welded channels. Exterior applications require the addition of top caps to protect against the weather Doors BF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. BW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. Standard visible edge seam Optional seamless edge B Series Visible Seam Features • Full height mechanical interlock • • • Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam Tornado Hurricane BF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is tack welded above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam BW Series Seam Welded Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is intermittently welded using 1" long welds • Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations • • • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details) Specialty Dezigner® Trim • Standard for 1/4" Thick Glass • Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. 3/8" (10 mm)* * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass Note: Louver size and type vary per requirements. Flush Mounted Steel Trim • For 1" Thick Glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 1-1/8" (29 mm)* Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 3/4" (19 mm) * standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Not available on 14 gauge doors Architectural Divider Muntins Are Not Available 112 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 Home General Information Doors • T Series Mineral board core provides a 250°F (121°C) Temperature Rise rating or 450°C (232°C) at 30 minutes of test exposure, depending on hardware application. 2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges with tack welds • Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. • Welded Edge Seam (optional add to standard): intermittently welded using 1" long welds, then seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Option available on T18, T16 and T14. 4. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Installation Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 1. Door construction for Steelcraft T Series full flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire ratings Standard 90min-3hr label. T Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). Fire Rated Products 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Specification compliance Hardware 1. 7. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specialty T Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. 6. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. Tornado Steelcraft T20, T18, T16, and T14 Series flush doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for Temperature Rise rated full flush doors. Refer to the Architectural section for specifications and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. To meet application, specification and performance requirements, the T Series door offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs, optional edge constructions and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations. Hurricane About the product 5. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. Elevations 3. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. Lights and Louvers • Doors 1. Variations Steelcraft’s T Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: Frames Features and benefits Variations T Series Performance • 113 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • T Series Frames • • • • • • Mineral Board 250°F (121°C) Temperature Rise rating single point locks • • • single point locks • pairs of doors with two (2) vertical rod exit devices (without astragal) Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive • Visible edge seam standard, with tack welds above and below edge cutouts as required when rated. • Seamless edge optional exit hardware doors prepared for INPACT™ exit devices Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction 14 gauge inverted 3/4˝ galvannealed top & (19mm) bottom channels • Fire label ratings up to 3 hours Laminated to inside faces of both door panels with contact adhesive • Projection welded to both face sheets • For optional caps, see ""Weather seals" on page 151. Tornado Hurricane Standard Premium Edge Construction Beveled hinge & lock edges • • exit hardware 450°F (218°C) Temperature Rise rating Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Standard T Series Core • Mineral Fiber board core Variations Variations Core construction Door application and usage Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Standard Duty T20 20 Ga (0.8 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse T18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Heavy Duty T18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use T18 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Extra Heavy Duty T18 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use T14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Maximum Duty T14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with extremely high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Series T20 114 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 Home General Information Doors • T Series Standard hardware preparations Optional 14 Gauge Closer Reinforcement The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • • Optional reinforcements for surface and concealed Closers are available. Tornado Special hardware applications are available. Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Hurricane • Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" x .134" standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" x .180" heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" x .146" standard weight hinges or for 5" x .190" heavy weight hinge are also available. Lights and Louvers Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Prep with Astragal attached Doors 86 Lock Variations 61L Lock Frames Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Steelcraft product selection for T Series doors has been matched to ANS/SDI Level and Model designations. In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Level Model Edge Construction Description Edge Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Specialty • Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional TF18 2 TW18 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional T16 3 TW16 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Level 4: Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional T14 TF14 1 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 2 Seamless Welded 4'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 1219 mm x 3048 mm 2438 mm x 3048 mm • 115 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 • Technical data manual • 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Performance TW14 4 Fire Rated Products TF16 Hardware T18 General Information Home Doors • T Series Frames Doors Optional Edge Seams available in the T Series doors: • TF: the mechanical edge seam is tack welded, filled, and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. • TW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. Standard Visible Edge Seam Optional Seamless Edge T Series Visible Seam Features • Full height mechanical interlock • TF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • Interlock is tack welded and filled with epoxy adhesive • Visible edge seam with tack welds • Elevations Tornado Hurricane No visible edge seam TW Series Seam Welded Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is intermittently welded using 1" long welds • Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Door edge construction • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options – maximum 100 square inch of exposed glass) Dezigner® Trim 1-1/4" • Standard for 1/4" Thick Glass • (32 mm) Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 3/4" 3/8" (10 mm)* (19 mm) Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. Max. 100 and thickness Note: Glazing type square inchjob exposed. vary per requirements. Specialty * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 3/8" (10 mm)* * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass Hardware 1-1/4" (32 mm) Note: Louver size and type vary per requirements. 3/4" (19 mm) 1-1/8" (29 mm)* Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products * standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Not available on 14 gauge doors 116 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Home General Information Doors • CE Series CE Series Features and benefits 3. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges • Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts for hinges, locks, etc. 4. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 6. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. About the product Installation 1. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. 3. Door construction for the CE Series embossed panel doors meets ANSI A117.1-1998 (ADA) requirements for minimum 10" (254 mm) bottom rail height measured from the floor. Fire ratings CE Series embossed panel doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). Fire Rated Products Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Door construction for Steelcraft CE Series embossed panel doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Hardware CE Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. 1. Specialty To meet application, specification and performance requirements, the CE Series embossed panel doors offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations. Specification compliance Tornado This premium door construction combines the strength and dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the laminate core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding marks. 8. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Hurricane The CE, HD2, and HD2A Series embossed panel doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for embossed panel doors. The door construction combines the features and benefits of polystyrene core laminated construction. Refer Architectural section for specifications and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. 7. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. Elevations 5. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Lights and Louvers • Doors 2. Polystyrene Core provides enhanced thermal performance Variations A-40 Galvannealed steel face sheets Frames 1. Variations Steelcraft’s CE Series embossed panel doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority on issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Performance • 117 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • CE Series Frames Variations Doors Standard CE Series Core • • • 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density polystyrene slab Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction Standard Premium Edge Construction Tornado 3/4˝ (19mm) • • • • Beveled hinge & lock edges Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam standard • • • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels Projection welded to both face sheets For optional caps, see ""Weather seals" on page 151. Seamless edge optional Door application and usage Series CE20 Steel Thickness Opening 20 Ga (0.8 mm) CE18, HD18, HD2A18 18 Ga (1.0 mm) CE16, HD16, HD2A16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Usage Frequency Standard Duty Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse Interior or Exterior Galvannealed Steel Heavy Duty Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use Extra Heavy Duty Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Laminated core 118 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 Home General Information Doors • CE Series Standard hardware preparations Optional 14 Gauge Closer Reinforcement • The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation • • Optional reinforcements for surface Closers are available. Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" x .134" standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .180" heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" x .146" standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" heavy weight hinges is also available. Lights and Louvers Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Prep with Astragal attached Doors 86 Lock Variations 61L Lock Frames Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Special hardware applications are available. Tornado Steelcraft product selection for CE Series doors has been matched to ANSI/ISD Level and Model designations. In accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100), core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is specified based on preference and application. • Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Level Model Description Edge Construction Full Flush Visible Specialty • Edge Maximum Sizes 6 Panel Door Design 8 Panel Door Design Single Pair Single 3'0" x 8'0" 6'0" x 8'0" 3'0" x 7'0" 914 mm x 2438 mm 1829 mm x 2438 mm 914 mm x 2134 mm Hurricane Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Pair Level 1: Light Commercial CE20 1 1 2 Seamless Filled 6'0" x 7'0" 1829 mm x 2134 mm Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional CE18 HD218 2 Full Flush Visible 2 Seamless Filled 3'8" x 7'0" 7'4" x 7'0" 1118 mm x 2134 mm 2235 mm x 2134 mm Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Fire Rated Products HD2A18 1 Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional CE16 HD216 Full Flush Visible 3 2 Seamless Filled 3'0" x 8'0" 6'0" x 8'0" 914 mm x 2438 mm 1829 mm x 2438 mm 3'8" x 7'0" 7'4" x 7'0" 1118 mm x 2134 mm 2235 mm x 2134 mm Performance HD2A16 1 Hardware CE20 • 119 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • CE Series Frames Doors • Optional Edge Seams available in the CE Series doors: • CF: the mechanical edge seam is dressed smooth and finished prior to applying the factory primer. Beveled Edge with Full Height Mechanical Interlock Standard Visible Edge Seam Optional Seamless Edge CE Series Visible Seam Features • Full height mechanical interlock • • • CF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is tack welded above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam Embossed Pattern Designs Notes: 1. Tornado 3. Availability of non standard door sizes is limited. Hardware 8 Panel 6 Panel HD2 HD2A Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options) Dezigner® Trim • Standard for 1/4" Thick Glass Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass Fire Rated Products • 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/8" (10 mm)* * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 120 • Flush Mounted Steel Trim • For 1" Thick Glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) Performance Architectural Standard door sizes are available. 2. Refer to pages 126-130 of this manual for all panel dimensions. Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Door edge construction 1-1/8" (29 mm)* * standard gap for 1" glass optional 7/8" (22 mm) gap for 3/4" glass Not available on 14 gauge doors Divider Muntins are Not Available • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. Home General Information Doors • A14 Series full glass entrance doors Variations Frames Variations Doors A14 Series full glass entrance doors Lights and Louvers About the product Installation 1. 2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. • 1" (25 mm) cell kraft honeycomb configuration with internal corner gussets to provide added strength and rigidity. 2. Seamless edges with full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlock edges, provide structural support and stability the full height of the door. Edges are seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts for hinges, locks, etc. 3. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 4. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. 5. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. 6. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. 7. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. 1. Door construction for Steelcraft A14 Series doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Fire ratings A14 Series doors meet fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to NFPA252-1999 and UL-10C. • 121 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 • Technical data manual • Performance 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated. Fire Rated Products Specification compliance Hardware Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Honeycomb Core Systems that enhance the structural integrity of the door: Specialty A14 Series doors are 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick. 1. Tornado To meet application, specification and performance requirements for entrance door applications, the A14 Series Door offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations. Steelcraft’s A14 Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: Hurricane A14 Series doors are available for high frequency openings and entrances where large full glass (FG, FG2, and FG3) lights are required. This premium door construction combines the strength and dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the laminate core with internal corner gussets to provide added strength and rigidity. Features and benefits Elevations The A14 Series full glass entrance doors are designed to meet the architectural requirements for exterior entrance applications. Refer to Section 11 (Architectural) for specifications and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. Frames Variations Doors Doors • A14 Series full glass entrance doors Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core with internal corner gussets • • • • • Standard Premium Edge Construction • • • Beveled hinge & lock edges Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive • Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond Edge Seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam 1" (25 mm) cell, Kraft honeycomb Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion Phenol formaldehyde free Full height mechanical Interlock with structural adhesive Tack welds above and below edge cutouts as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction Tornado 3/4˝ (19mm) Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Hardware • • • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels Projection welded to both face sheets For optional caps, see ""Weather seals" on page 151. Series Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency A14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Interior: Cold Rolled Steel Maximum Duty A14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Door application and usage 122 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/15/20 Home General Information Doors • A14 Series full glass entrance doors Standard hardware preparations 14 Gauge Closer Ê Reinforcement • A multitude of standard lock preparations are available. The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • • Optional reinforcements for surface and concealed Closers are available. Elevations Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" (127 mm) x .146" (3.7 mm) standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges is also available. Lights and Louvers Inactive Leaf ASA Strike Prep with Astragal attached Doors 86 Lock Variations 61L Lock 7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement Frames Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Variations Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to "Hardware" section for more details. Special hardware applications are available. ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Level Model Description Edge Construction Edge Maximum Sizes Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional A14 4 2 Seamless Filled 4'0" x 8'0" 1219 mm x 2438 mm 8'0" x 8'0" 2438 mm x 2438 mm Specialty Series Tornado Steelcraft product selection for A Series Stile and Rail Doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI designations for Level and Model. Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. Hurricane Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 123 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors • A14 Series full glass entrance doors Frames Variations Doors 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-13/16" (173mm) 6-1/4" (159mm) 6-1/4" (159mm) 6-1/4" (159mm) 6-1/2" (164mm) 6-1/2" (164mm) Lights and Louvers Variations Standard glass design options 6-1/2" (164mm) Elevations 39-1/4" (996mm) 11-1/4" (285mm) FG 11-1/4" (285mm) FG2 11-1/4" (285mm) FG3 Tornado Hurricane 3. Dimensions shown are to the exposed glass sizes. Refer to the Lights section for cutout and glass sizes. 4. Standard Vertical Stiles (both hinge and lock) are 6 13/16" (173 mm) wide to the finished edge opening of the glass light trim (6 1/64" from the door edge to the cutout of the glass light) and are beveled 1/8" (3.2 mm) in 2" (51 mm) with no visible seams. 5. Standard Top Rails are 6 1/4" (159 mm) high and are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] welded channels. Exterior applications require the addition of top caps to protect against the weather. 6. Standard Bottom Rails are 11 1/4" (285 mm) high and are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] welded channels. 8. Special glass sizes are available; however, the vertical stiles are always fixed at 6 13/16" wide regardless of the glass size. Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options – Flush Mounted Steel Trim not available on 14GA doors) Dezigner® Trim • Standard for 1/4" Thick Glass • Optional for 1/2" Thick Glass 1-1/4" (32 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 7. Standard Intermediate Rails are 6 1/2" (164 mm) high and are used to create the FG2 and FG3 designs. 3/8" (10 mm)* Architectural Performance * standard gap for 1/4" glass optional 5/8" (16 mm) gap for 1/2" glass 124 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Doors variations and options Embossed CE Series..................................................................126 8 panels..................................................................................................126 6 panels.................................................................................................. 127 6 panels (2' 10" thru 3' 8" door widths)...................................128 HD2 panels (2' 8" thru 3' 8" door widths)..............................129 HD2A panels (2' 8" thru 3' 4" door widths).......................... 130 Dutch doors.................................................................................... 131 Lights and Louvers Non-labeled........................................................................................... 131 Full shelf (non-labeled).................................................................. 132 Labeled...................................................................................................133 Half shelf (labeled)...........................................................................134 Optional lock preparation...............................................................135 Monorail...........................................................................................136 Preparation............................................................................................136 Elevations GRAINTECH™...............................................................................137 Steel doors............................................................................................ 137 Hardware........................................................................................138 Tornado Z Astragal........................................................................................143 Specialty Applications..........................................................................................143 Inactive leaf mounting......................................................................144 Double egress mounting.................................................................145 Active leaf mounting ....................................................................... 146 Hardware preparations.................................................................... 147 Hurricane High frequency hinge preparation...............................................138 Aluminum door edge nosing.........................................................139 Interviewer prep.................................................................................. 140 Peep slot with trim..............................................................................141 Mail slot preparation.........................................................................142 Flat plate astragal.......................................................................148 Exposed fastening............................................................................. 148 2 piece astragal............................................................................149 Hardware Applications..........................................................................................149 Hardware preparations................................................................... 150 Weather seals................................................................................ 151 Top & bottom caps.............................................................................151 FAS-SEAL™ door bottom sweep................................................ 152 Fire Rated Products Performance • 125 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Doors variations and options • Embossed CE Series Embossed CE Series 8 panels 4-1/8" (105mm) Doors Variations A 9-1/2" (241mm) B C Lights and Louvers E (TYP.) A B 3 27/32" 4 27/32" 3' 0" 6 11/32" 6 11/32" Door heights C D E 6' 8" * 3 7/8" 9 3/4" 13" 7' 0" 5 7/8" 11 3/4" 13" * Note: Due to the 3 7/8" top rail dimension, the use of closers should be either avoided or be mounted with drop brackets on all 6' 8" high embossed 8 Panel doors. Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 4-1/2" (114mm) TYP. Door widths 2' 8" D Purpose Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face sheets are architecturally required. The 8 panel embossed door design is a less popular design. Application Hotel, apartment or office entrance doors. Product availability This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire labeled or and non-labeled applications: • • 20 Gauge [0.032" (0.8 mm) A-40 galvannealed steel] only Available in 1/16" (1.5 mm) increments in width and height subject to the following: • • 2' 8" (813 mm) thru 3' 0" (914 mm) widths 6' 8" (2032 mm) thru 7' 0" (2134 mm) heights Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 8 Panel design (lights or louvers are not available). 126 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Embossed CE Series 6 panels B 5" 2' 8" 5 3/8" 5 3/8" Note: The rail dimension "A" is narrower on the hinge side of doors narrower than 2' 8" in nominal door width. C 7-1/16" (179mm) Door heights C D 6' 8" * 4 1/4" 9 3/4" E 25 7/16" 4-9/16" (116mm) 7"0" 6 1/4" 11 3/4" 25 7/16" E Lights and Louvers * Note: Due to the 4 1/4" top rail dimension, the use of closers should be either avoided or be mounted with drop brackets on all 6' 8" high embossed 6 Panel doors. Doors A 3 3/4" Variations B Door widths 2' 6" Frames 2-15/16" (75mm) A 9-1/16" (230mm) Variations (2' 6" thru 2' 8" door widths) 6-1/2" (165mm) Elevations 21-9/16" (548mm) Tornado Application Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications as specified. Product availability This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire labeled or and non-labeled applications. • • 20, 18, or 16 Gauge. A-40 galvannealed steel. Available in 1/16" (1.5 mm) increments in width and height subject to the following: • 2' 6" thru 2' 8" widths 6' 8" (2032 mm) thru 7' 0" (2134 mm) heights 6 Panel design has limited lights available. Louvers are not available. Hardware • • Specialty Purpose Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face sheets are architecturally required. The 6 panel embossed door design is the most popular design. Hurricane D Fire Rated Products Performance • 127 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/17/15 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors variations and options • Embossed CE Series Frames Variations 6 panels (2' 10" thru 3' 8" door widths) 4-15/16"(125mm) (5" (127mm) for 8'0" Doors) C 7-1/16" Typ. (13" for 8'0" Doors) 4-9/16" Typ. (6-9/16" for 8'0" Doors) Lights and Louvers Doors Variations A E B 5 3/8" 5 3/8" 3' 0" 6 3/8" 6 3/8" 3' 2" 7 3/8" 7 3/8" 8 3/8" 3' 4" 8 3/8" 3' 6" 9 3/8" 9 3/8" 3' 8" 10 3/8" 10 3/8" Note: On all door widths 2' 10" and wider, both rail dimensions "A" and "B" are equal unless specified differently. Door heights C D E F 6' 8" * 4 1/4" 9 3/4" 25 7/16" 21 9/16" 6"10" 5 1/4" 10 3/4" 25 7/16" 21 9/16" 7' 0" 6 1/4" 11 3/4" 25 7/16" 21 9/16" 8' 0" 4 1/4" 9 3/4" 27 1/2" 25 1/2" * Notes: 1. Due to the 4 1/4" top rail dimension, the use of closers should be either avoided or be mounted with drop brackets on all 6' 8" high embossed 8 Panel doors. 2. 8' 0" high 6 panel doors are available in only 2' 10" and 3' 0" door widths. F Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations 6-1/2" Typ. (8-9/16" for 8'0" Doors) A 2' 10" D Purpose Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face sheets are architecturally required. Product availability This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire labeled or non-labeled applications: The 6 panel embossed door design is the most popular design. • • • Application Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications as specified. 20, 18 or 16 Gauge: up to and including 3' 0" door widths 18 Gauge: 3' 4" thru 3' 8" door widths Available in 1/16" increments in width and height subject to the following: • • • • 2' 10" thru 3' 8" widths 6' 8" thru 7' 0" heights: all door widths noted above 8' 0" available in 2' 10" or 3' 0" door widths 6 Panel design has limited lights available. Louvers are not available. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 9-1/16" (230mm) (9" (229mm) for 8'0" Doors) B Door widths 128 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/16/20 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Embossed CE Series HD2 panels (2' 8" thru 3' 8" door widths) 37” B 3 13/16" 5" 3' 0" 6 13/32" 6 13/32" 3' 4" 8 13/32" 8 13/32" 3' 6" 9 13/32" 9 13/32" 3' 8" 10 13/32" 10 13/32" Note: On all doors widths 3' 0" and wider, both rail dimensions "D" and "E" are equal unless specified differently. Door heights C D 6' 8" * 4 3/8" 9 3/4" 6"10" 5 3/8" 10 3/4" 7' 0" 6 3/8" 11 3/4" * Note: Due to the 4 3/8" top rail dimension, the use of closers should be either avoided or be mounted with drop brackets on all 6' 8" high embossed Panel doors. Lights and Louvers 6-1/2” A 2' 8" Doors C Door widths Variations B Frames 23” Variations A Elevations 21-1/2” D Tornado • • 18 or 16 Gauge: Up to and including 3' 8" door widths Available in 1/16" increments in width and height subject to the following: • 2' 8" (813 mm) thru 3' 0" (914 mm) widths 6' 8" (2032 mm) thru 7' 0" (2134 mm) heights All door widths noted above HD2 panel designs do not have louver or light options available. Hardware • • • Specialty Application Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications as specified. Product availability This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire labeled or non-labeled applications: Hurricane Purpose Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face sheets are architecturally required. Fire Rated Products Performance • 129 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors variations and options • Embossed CE Series 23” B C Door widths A B 2' 8" 3 13/16" 5" 3' 0" 6 13/32" 6 13/32" 3' 4" 8 13/32" 8 13/32" Note: On all doors widths 3' 0" and wider, both rail dimensions "D" and "E" are equal unless specified differently. Variations Frames A 37” Door heights C 6' 8" * 4 3/8" D 9 3/4" 6"10" 5 3/8" 10 3/4" 7' 0" 6 3/8" 11 3/4" * Note: Due to the 4 3/8" top rail dimension, the use of closers should be either avoided or be mounted with drop brackets on all 6' 8" high embossed Panel doors. Lights and Louvers Doors Variations HD2A panels (2' 8" thru 3' 4" door widths) Elevations 6-1/2” 21-1/2” Tornado Purpose Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face sheets are architecturally required. Application Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications as specified Product availability This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire labeled or non-labeled applications. • • 18 or 16 Gauge: Up to and including 3' 4" door widths Available in 1/16" increments in width and height subject to the following: • • • 2' 8" thru 3' 4" widths 6' 8" thru 7' 0" heights: all door widths noted above HD2A panel designs do not have louver or light options available. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane D 130 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Dutch doors 16 9/16" 7' 0" 83 1/8" 39 13/16" 20 9/16" 7' 2" 85 1/8" 41 13/16" 22 9/16" Lock prep Dim. D 9-5/8” Dim. “C” Hinge Spacing Dim. “B” = Top Door Height Dim. C 35 13/16" 9-5/8” 61L, 161 35 7/8" 86 35 1/2" 3/16” 7-1/4” For shelf detail, detail, see page 132. * see pp. 137, 139 9-5/8” 23-7/8” 43-1/8” Elevations Dim. “A” = Net Door Height Dim. B 79 1/8" Lights and Louvers Dim. “D” Lock Location * Tornado 9-5/8” Hurricane Nominal Door Height (Frame bottom to Header Rabbet) Dim. A 6' 8" Doors Net Door Width Nominal door Variations Nominal Door Width (Frame Rabbet to Rabbet) Frames Non-labeled Variations Dutch doors Finished Floor Surface (Bottom of Frame) Application • Usually installed in storage room applications • Hardware applications: • • Single Swing applications only: no double door configurations • Glass lights are limited to one 100 square inch light in top leaf • High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the top hinge of each door leaf Product availability This product option is available on L and B Series doors. Fire Rated Products • Bottom leaf–prepared for one (1) Government 161, 61L or Government 86 lock. Sizes available from 2' 0" (610 mm) x 6' 8" (2032 mm) thru 4' 0" (1219 mm) x 7' 2" (2184 mm) Top leaf locking option: • • Standard: Surface applied bolt engaging bottom leaf • Option: Government 161 lock preparation latching into top of bottom leaf (see "Dutch doors (labeled)" on page 138). • Top door leaf may be equipped with a 14 gauge closer reinforcement as an option Option: Government 161 lock preparation latching into strike jamb Performance • 131 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/16/20 • Technical data manual • Hardware When specified, the lower leaf can include a dutch door shelf (see "Dutch doors full shelf (non-labeled door)" detail on page 137). Notes • Specialty Purpose The dutch door design incorporates two separate door leaves, hung one over the other, and mounted into a single swing opening. Both leaves can operate separately. The bottom leaf latches into the strike jamb of the frame. General Information Home Doors variations and options • Dutch doors 1” (25mm) Top Door Leaf Variations Frames 12” (305mm) Attached to door in field Bottom Door Leaf Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Full shelf (non-labeled) 1-29/32” (48mm) Shelf 1-29/32” (48mm) Shelf to be filed to fit bevel of door field Bottom Door Leaf Tornado Hurricane Elevations Door Width Specialty Purpose Dutch door shelves are not supplied with dutch doors unless specified. When the top leaf is opened, the bottom leaf and shelf act as a counter that can be used for multiple uses. If the dutch door shelf (full or half shelf) is not used, the top of the bottom leaf specify a steel top cap installed. Product availability The full and half shelf can be used on Steelcraft L and B Series non-labeled doors. Shelves are furnished factory prime painted. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products The 12" (305 mm) wide 16 gauge full shelf and brackets for non-labeled doors, or the 7" (178 mm) wide half shelf and brackets (see "Dutch doors (labeled)" on page 138) is shipped loose from the factory and is to be field attached to the bottom door leaf with the supplied No. 10 x 3/4" (19 mm) Bugle Head Sheet Metal Screws. Hardware Application Non-labeled dutch doors applications. 132 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Dutch doors Labeled 83 1/8" 39 13/16" 20 9/16" 85 1/8" 41 13/16" 22 9/16" Lock prep Dim. D 9-5/8” Dim. “C” Hinge Spacing Dim. “B” = Top Door Height 7' 0" 7' 2" 9-5/8” Closer Reinforcement 3/16” 9-5/8” * 35 1/2" For Forshelf shelfdetail, detail,see seepage page132. 137 Note: Bottom leaf must have A listed Note: leaflatching must have 161, 61L,Bottom or 86 Lock intoAthe listedjamb. 161, 61L, or 86 Lock latching strike into the strike jamb. *Note: Astragal required on top leaf *Note: Astragal required on top leaf 23-7/8” Dim. “D” Lock Location * 43-1/8” 35 7/8" 86 Note: Top leaf must have a listed 161or 61L intoa either Note: Toplock leaflatching must have listed the 161 or strike jamb or theinto bottom 61L lock latching eitherleaf. the strike Deadbolts, flushbolts, bolts jamb or the bottom leaf.surface Deadbolts, or mortise surface 86 locksbolts are not approved. flushbolts, or mortise 86 locks are not approved. 7-1/4” 7-1/4” 61L, 161 9-5/8” Tornado • • High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the top hinge of each door leaf • Labeled dutch door openings must have two (2) locks: • • Specialty When specified, the lower leaf can include a dutch door half shelf (see "Dutch Door Full Shelf", detail on page 137). Application Single Swing applications only: no double door configurations Hurricane Finished Floor Surface (Bottom of Frame) Purpose Fire labeled dutch door design incorporates two separate door leaves, hung one over the other, and mounted into a single swing opening. Both leaves can operate separately. The bottom leaf must latch into the strike jamb of the frame. The top leaf must latch into either the strike jamb or into the top leaf. Elevations Dim. “A” = Net Door Height 16 9/16" Lights and Louvers Nominal Door Height (Frame bottom to Header Rabbet) Dim. C 35 13/16" Doors Dim. B 79 1/8" Variations Dim. A 6' 8" Frames Next Door Width Nominal door Variations Nominal Door Width (Frame Rabbet to Rabbet) Standard: Both locks latching into jambs Optional: Top lock latching into top of bottom leaf 2. Bottom lock latching into jamb 3. See "Dutch Door: Optional Lock Preparation" on page 140 Top door leaf must be equipped with a closer reinforcement • Maximum size for 3 Hour Fire Rating: 4' 0" (1219 mm) x 7' 2" (2184 mm) • Limited to one 100 square inch light in top leaf only for 1 1/2 hour fire rating • 133 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 • Technical data manual • Performance Product availability • This product option is available for Steelcraft L and B Series steel stiffened doors. See the Fire rated products section for additional information. Fire Rated Products • Hardware 1. General Information Home Doors variations and options • Dutch doors Frames 7” (178mm) Top Door Leaf 1” (25mm) 2-1/8” (54mm) 1” (25mm) Variations Doors Variations Half shelf (labeled) Attached to door in field * Note Astragal is welded to the Top Door Leaf, or, as an alternate, can be field attached with Sheet Metal Screws. Lights and Louvers Bottom Door Leaf * Elevations Door Width Half Shelf 1-29/32” (48mm) Shelf to be filed to fit bevel of door field Bottom Door Leaf Tornado Specialty Hurricane 1-29/32” (48mm) Purpose Dutch door shelves are not supplied with dutch doors unless specified. When the top leaf is opened, the bottom leaf and shelf act as a counter. If the dutch door shelf (half shelf) is not used, it is recommended that the bottom leaf includes a steel top cap installed. Product availability The half shelf can be used on Steelcraft L and B Series labeled or non-labeled doors. The shelf is furnished factory prime painted. The 7" wide (178 mm) 16 gauge (1.3 mm) half shelf and brackets for Labeled doors is shipped loose from the factory and is to be field attached to the bottom door leaf with the supplied No. 10 x 3/4" (19 mm) Bugle Head Sheet Metal Screws. The astragal is factory welded to the top door leaf. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Application Labeled and non-labled fire rated dutch door assemblies 134 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Dutch doors Optional lock preparation Dim. “C” Hinge Spacing Dim. “B” = Top Door Height Dim. “A” = Net Door Height 20 9/16" 7' 2" 85 1/8" 41 13/16" 22 9/16" Lock prep Dim. D 61L, 161 35 7/8" 86 35 1/2" * Notes: 1. 3/16” 2-3/4” 7-1/4” 43-1/8” 2. Bottom leaf must have 161, 61L or 86 lock latching into the strike jamb 3. Knob to knob location will vary depending on latching devices used. Dim. “D” Lock Location * • 10 3/16" if 161 top leaf X 161 or 61L in bottom leaf • 12 1/16" approx. if 161 in top leaf X 86 in bottom leaf 4. Astragal required on top leaf. 9-5/8” 5. See "Dutch doors full shelf (nonlabeled door)" detail on 132. Hardware This alternative lock preparation combination is Fire Rated up to 3 hours. The top leaf is limited to a Government 161 lock preparation. The bottom leaf may be prepared for a Government 86, 61L or 161 lock. The latch bolt of the lock in the top leaf projects into a cylindrical strike attached to the strike preparation in the top of the bottom leaf, eliminating one strike preparation in the jamb. This optional lock preparation must be specified when ordering. Specialty Application Labeled and non-labeled fire rated dutch door assemblies. Tornado Product availability This lock preparation is available on Steelcraft L and B Series Steel Stiffened doors for non-label, or for labeled openings up to 3 hour Fire Ratings. See the Fire Rated products section for additional information. Hurricane Finished Floor Surface (Bottom of Frame) Purpose In the interest of expedient transition through the path of the means of egress, a single lock operation of latch bolt retraction becomes paramount. By choosing this preparation, the only lock operation required to retract the latch bolt is found at the standard lock location on the bottom leaf. Elevations See note 3 for knob to knob dimensions * Top leaf must have a listed 161 for latching into bottom leaf Lights and Louvers Nominal Door Height (Frame bottom to Header Rabbet) 35 13/16" 39 13/16" Doors 79 1/8" 83 1/8" Variations 16 9/16" 6' 8" Closer Reinforcement 9-5/8” 23-7/8” Dim. C 7' 0" 9-5/8” 9-5/8” Dim. B Frames Next Door Width Dim. A Variations Nominal door Nominal Door Width Fire Rated Products Performance • 135 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Doors variations and options • Monorail Monorail Preparation Optional Top Cap 8” (203mm) Maximum Width L and B Series Doors 14 Gauge [0.067” (1.7mm)] Galvannealed MonoRail Closure Channel 24” 9610mm) Maximum Height Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 1/16” (25.4mm) Purpose When the movement of heavy equipment or material is required between separated work areas of an industrial buildings, overhead monorails are employed to support and transport mechanically operated cranes. When specified, doors with monorail preparations are designed to accommodate the transfer equipment and perform as closures between these spaces. • L and B Series full flush doors Application Industrial non-fire rated applications When specified preparation includes: • 14 gauge (1.7 mm) galvannealed Mono Rail Closure Channel is installed along cutout perimeter • • • tack welded to the door faces projects 1/16" (1.6 mm) beyond edge of vertical cutout of the L and B Series doors Optional top caps are positioned in the top of the door as required Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Product availability This door option is available for the following Steelcraft door Series: 136 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • GRAINTECH™ Doors Clear Coat baked on for the ultimate in UV and graffiti resistance Variations Dezigner™ Trim flush light kits, stained to match the door Frames Steel doors Variations GRAINTECH™ Lights and Louvers Elevations Multiple Finishes provide options for a variety of applications Tornado • • E6 design only (18 and 16 gauge) HD2 and HD2A (18 and 16 gauge) H16 and HE16 Series L Series (18 and 16 gauge) T Series (18 and 16 gauge) Glass light options: GRAINTECH™ glass light options for L Series doors are V, N3, N4, N5, NL, G, FG, FG2 and FG3 Hardware • • • Specialty • • GRAINTECH™ glass light options for CE Series doors E4TL See the Fire Rated Products section for application to Fire Rated doors. Fire Rated Products Application The exclusive engraining and staining process employed simulates a wide variety of wood finishes, from the standards of Birch, Ash, Oak, Maple, Mahogany and Walnut to custom finish matching or primed only. GRAINTECH™ is ideal to use in Schools, Hospitals, Offices, Nursing Homes, Apartment Buildings, Dormitories, etc. Unlike veneered or solid wood doors, GRAINTECH™ is fully warranted for use on exterior openings, is less susceptible to damage, and will never warp, crack, peel or bow. Dezigner® Trim Glass Lights used for glass light openings is likewise supplied in the finish matching the door. Product availability This product option is available in the following door constructions: • CE Series Hurricane Purpose When a premium wood finish is desired, and the features and benefits of steel are required, Steelcraft' s GRAINTECH™ products provide the flexibility your specification demands. GRAINTECH™ colors chart. Birch Ash Oak Maple Mahogany Walnut Custom colors are available. • 137 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • Performance Colors may vary based on your monitor, printer, and settings. Request a physical GRAINTECH™ swatch for color matching. Frames Hardware High frequency hinge preparation 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Projection Welded to Door “A” Panel 10 Gauge Auxiliary Hinge Reinforcement (Top Hinge Preparation Only) Lights and Louvers Doors Doors variations and options • Hardware Variations Variations General Information Home Tornado 10 Gauge Auxiliary Hinge Reinforcement Purpose The optional high frequency hinge reinforcement provides additional strength to the 4 1/2" (114 mm) or 5" (127 mm) hinge reinforcement specified for use in high abuse openings. Product availability High frequency hinge reinforcements are available factory installed only, and are applicable to all Series of Steelcraft labeled and non-labeled steel doors. Application The 10 gauge (3 mm) auxiliary hinge reinforcement is spot welded to the top and bottom of the top hinge reinforcement in 2 locations of the door: • • The face of the door panel The 7 gauge (4.7 mm) hinge reinforcement (projection welded to the door at the factory) Primarily applicable to the top hinge reinforcement of 4 1/2" (114 mm) or 5" (127 mm) hinge reinforcements the auxiliary reinforcement may be used on other hinge locations when specified. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Spot Welded 10 Door Panel and 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement 138 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Hardware Aluminum door edge nosing Variations Doors Net Door Width Frames 7/16˝ Variations Net Door Width + 7/16˝ Lock edge nosing optional Pivot or hinge edge Lights and Louvers 2˝ (51mm) Elevations 20˝ (508mm) O.C. Tornado Product availability This door option is available for the L, B, CE, and A14 Series doors. • Some applications may require nosing to be applied to both the pivot/hinge and lock edges of the door. Door size and/or pivot/hinge location must be adjusted accordingly. • The door edge nosing is placed over the door edge. A No. 4 x 1" oval head sheet metal screw is installed through a 3/16" (5 mm) diameter hole to attach the unit to the door. • Double acting doors are normally installed in cased open frames (frames that have no stops). However, smoke and fire can penetrate the clearance gap, creating a failure. • No labeled applications. • 139 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance Recommended application to hinge edge of doors equipped with Double Acting Center Hung Pivots, Double Acting Spring Hinges, Double Acting Floor Closers and Rescue Hardware to reduce the additional vertical edge clearances required. Fire Rated Products • Hardware Application • Door edge nosing, manufactured from extruded aluminum, is prime painted. Specialty Purpose Optional aluminum door edge nosing is recommended for use on double acting doors to minimize the operating clearance, between the door edge(s) and the jamb(s) of the frame. Hurricane 2˝ (51mm) General Information Home Doors variations and options • Hardware Frames Variations Doors Equal Equal Lights and Louvers Variations Interviewer prep 60” (1524mm) Tornado Finished Floor Purpose Interviewer preps are specified when vision through a door without the use of a window is required. Product availability This door option is available for the L, SL, B, T, CE, and nonlabeled H Series doors. Application Hotel room or apartment entrance doors. The Interviewer preparation (Peep Hole) has a normal location centered on the door with various heights that depend on application. Two of the standard vertical locations are shown above. The maximum size preparation is a 3" diameter (76.2 mm) hole. For fire rated applications, the viewer must also be fire rated. Maximum 3⁄4" diameter hole unless otherwise listed and by UL or ITS/WHI. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 48” (1219mm) 140 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Hardware Peep slot with trim Variations Doors 3/8” (9.5mm) Frames View Slot Variations 12” (304.8mm) Lights and Louvers 60” (1270mm) Elevations Finished Floor Specialty Application The Peep Slot with trim preparation has a recommended vertical location of 60" (1270 mm) and is centered on the door. Customer specified heights that depend on application, are available. The cutout dimension is 13 1/2" (343 mm) wide x 1 7/8" (48 mm) high. The perimeter of the cutout is reinforced with a 18 gauge channel. The U-Channel trim finishes the viewing area dimension to 3/8" (9.5 mm) high x 12" (304.8 mm) wide. Tornado Product availability This preparation is available on Steelcraft L and B Series doors. Hurricane Purpose Certain building segments require functional, inconspicuous observation positions to enforce the safety and security regulations prescribed by the facility operating procedures. This optional viewing unit is factory installed. Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 141 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors variations and options • Hardware Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Mail slot preparation Tornado 12˝ min. Finished Floor Typical Door Elevation Purpose Optional mail slots allow for the pass through of mail. They are usually located in the bottom of the door and are prepared in the bottom of the door when specified. Product availability This preparation is available on Steelcraft L and CE Series doors. Application The preparation must be placed within the minimum edge dimensions shown above. Customer must indicate the manufacturer, template number and model number of the unit to be installed in order to prepare the proper size opening. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 6˝ min. From Either Edge 142 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Z Astragal Doors Inactive Leaf Variations Inactive Leaf Mounting Frames Applications Variations Z Astragal 9/64” (3mm) 3/16” (5mm) Lights and Louvers Active Leaf Mounting Astragal application type and location as specified Elevations Active Leaf 9/64” (3mm) 3/16” (5mm) Tornado Mounting Leaf Z Astragal Applications Typical Double Door Elevation Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE, H, HE, PW, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated products section for application to Fire Rated doors. This is a handed product. • Shipped loose for field attachment. Attachment is made to the inactive door leaf, with the sheet metal screws supplied. Performance • • • Fire Rated Products Application • This astragal is normally supplied with pairs of Steelcraft doors. This astragal can be used on both rated fire doors and non-rated doors. • 143 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Hardware Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Specialty Finished Floor Surface Hurricane Double Egress Mounting General Information Home Doors variations and options • Z Astragal Frames Variations Inactive leaf mounting EXTERIOR SIDE Doors Variations Inactive Leaf 9/64” (3mm) Lights and Louvers 3/16” (5mm) Elevations 7/8” (22mm) 86°-30’ Tornado Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, H, HE, PW, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products section for application to Fire Rated doors. Application • This astragal is normally supplied with pairs of Steelcraft doors. • This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the inactive door leaf. • Attachment is made to the inactive door leaf, with the sheet metal screws supplied. • • Shipped loose for field attachment. Active Leaf Mounting or Double Egress Mounting, must be called-out separately on the order. • • • The astragal is formed to match the bevel of the door. When mounted to an active leaf or double egress leaf, the astragal forming is reversed. This astragal can be used on both fire rated and non-rated doors. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane INACTIVE LEAF 144 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Z Astragal Double egress mounting Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Mounting Leaf Variations Mounting Leaf Elevations 7/8” (22mm) 93°-30’ Tornado Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, and CE Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products section for application to Fire Rated doors. Application • Required on all three (3) Hour Rated Double Egress openings. Astragal must be ordered separately. This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the active leaf. • • The astragal is blank, with no hardware cutouts. • The astragal can be attached to either leaf as shown, as it does not impede operation. Shipped loose for field attachment, with the sheet metal screws supplied. • Can be used on pairs of doors with Vertical Rod Exit devices on both leaves. • This astragal can also be used on 1 1/2 and 3/4 hour rated Double Egress openings although it is not required to meet the label requirements. Fire Rated Products Performance • Hardware • This astragal can not be used on the active door leaf or inactive door leaf of a conventional pair of doors due to reverse forming and no hardware cutouts. • 145 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Specialty Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Hurricane DOUBLE EGRESS General Information Home Doors variations and options • Z Astragal Active Leaf Variations Frames EXTERIOR SIDE 9/64” (3mm) 3/16” (5mm) 7/8” (22mm) Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Active leaf mounting Tornado ACTIVE LEAF Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for application to Fire Rated doors. Application • This astragal requires a special call-out when ordered. • This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the active door leaf • Shipped loose for field attachment, with the sheet metal screws supplied • This astragal can not be attached to an inactive door leaf or a double egress door because of the hardware cutouts • • The lock and strike type being used affects the astragal since cutouts are required for the lock front and strike lip. The notching for an ASA strike lip notch is provided. • The lock front must be shimmed to insure that the lock front seats flush with the astragal. This astragal can be used on both fire rated and non-rated doors. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 93°-30’ 146 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Z Astragal Hardware preparations Variations Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers INACTIVE LEAF Lock Front & Strike Preparation ACTIVE LEAF Flush Bolt Preparation INACTIVE LEAF • Flush Bolt Preparations: When mounted to the inactive leaf, the astragal is prepared at the top and the bottom for flush bolts (manual or automatic) when they are specified as the locking device for the inactive leaf. The preparation consists of tabs stamped out of the base metal. The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the flush bolt manufacturer. If surface bolts are used, this preparation is not required. Fire Rated Products Lock Front & Strike Preparations: This is the type of cutout required for an astragal that is mounted to the active leaf. The cutouts are clearance holes for the lock front. The notching for an ASA strike lip is provided as shown in the detail above. Hardware • Specialty Application • Strike Preparations: This is the conventional strike preparation in an astragal mounted to the inactive leaf. The astragal has mounting tabs pierced from the base metal. The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the hardware manufacturer (with the strike). The type of strike being used must be specified. Tornado Product availability These hardware preparations are available in all Steelcraft Z-type astragals. Hurricane Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Hardware applications determine the appropriate preparation(s). Elevations Strike Preparation Performance • 147 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Variations General Information Home Doors variations and options • Flat plate astragal Flat plate astragal Exposed fastening Active Leaf INSWING Lights and Louvers 3/4” (19mm) 1-1/2” (38mm) Notch by Others Tornado Active Leaf 3/4” (19mm) 1-1/2” (38mm) Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for application to Fire Rated doors. Application • Attached to the outside of the active leaf on swing-out doors • Attached to the outside of the inactive leaf on swing-in doors • The astragal is a 14 gauge (1.7 mm) steel part; attached by using screws or by welding to the proper door leaf • For this type of astragal, a wide inactive leaf is recommended • When a conventional lock and strike are used, notching for the strike lip is performed in the field by others • See Hardware Preparations section for strike, lock front and flush bolt preparation Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations OUTSWING 148 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Doors variations and options • 2 piece astragal Doors Active Leaf Variations Inactive Leaf Channel Frames Applications Variations 2 piece astragal Lights and Louvers Active Leaf Astragal 87.5° 1-25/32˝ (45mm) Elevations 92.5° 15/16˝ (24mm) TYP. Specialty Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. For this type of astragal, standard width inactive leaf is recommended • • Shipped loose for field attachment • The 12 gauge (2.5 mm) galvanized flat bar section is mounted to the pull side face of the door with the sheet metal screws provided • This astragal can be used on both rated and non-rated doors. Hardware Application • This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the inactive door leaf • Tornado Product availability This product option is available for Steelcraft L, B, T, CE, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for application to Fire Rated doors. Hurricane Application The 2 piece astragal is an alternate active leaf astragal. It allows for using the flushbolt and strike clearance holes on standard inactive leafs and providing an exterior bar type astragal. Fire Rated Products The 14 gauge galvanized channel section is mounted to the inactive leaf with the sheet metal screws supplied Performance • 149 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Doors variations and options • 2 piece astragal Frames Variations Doors Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Hardware preparations Flushbolt Preparation Inactive Leaf Channel Strike Preparation Inactive Leaf Channel Purpose Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate application. Hardware applications determine the appropriate preparation(s). Strike Lip Preparation Active Leaf Astragal Product availability These hardware preparations are available in all Steelcraft 2 piece astragals. Application • Flush Bolt Preparations: When mounted to the inactive leaf, the astragal is prepared at the top and the bottom for flush bolts (manual or automatic) when they are specified as the locking device for the inactive leaf. The preparation consists of tabs stamped out of the base metal. The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the flush bolt manufacturer. If surface bolts are used, this preparation is not required. Strike Preparations: This is the conventional strike preparation in an astragal mounted to the inactive leaf. The astragal has mounting tabs pierced from the base metal. • The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the hardware manufacturer (with the strike). The type of strike being used must be specified. • Strike Lip Preparations: This is the type of cutout required for an astragal that is mounted to the active leaf. The notching for an ASA strike lip is provided as shown in the detail above. 150 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 Home General Information Doors variations and options • Weather seals Attached to 14 ga. top channel Flush/Filled Top Cap (bottom cap also available) 18 ga. top channel sits flush with top of door and is seam filled Doors • Variations Steel Top Cap (Screwed-in) (bottom cap also available) • 24 ga. top cap sits on top edge of door, flush with exterior surface of door and adds 0.020" (0.5 mm) to the height of the door Frames No. 8 x 1- 1/2" flat head sheet metal screws Top & bottom caps Variations Weather seals • Lights and Louvers • Attached to 14 ga. top channel Attached to 14 ga. top channel • • • SZ Series doors cannot be ordered with top caps, but the Steel top cap version can be ordered through "Parts" and installed by others for non-labeled openings or for 1 1/2 hour Fire Ratings. • Recessed caps are not available on Hurricane H Series doors • Paladin PW series doors have a 12 gauge top channel installed as standard, not filled. • The Stainless Steel LS series doors are available with 18 gauge stainless caps either screwed in or tack welded 3" from each end and 12" OC. Seams can be filled (sealed top) with silicone as an option. Performance Steel Top Cap (screwed-in): Label located on top channel underneath cap • Supplemental label attached to top cap indicating certification label is attached underneath Flush/filled: Label attached to top of cap Recessed Top Cap (screwed-in): Label attached to top of cap • 151 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • Fire Rated Products Certification Label Locations with continuous hinge preps or pocket pivots: Product availability Top and/or bottom caps are available in the 3 versions -- Steel screwed-in, Flush/filled, and Recessed. All are available on any available Steelcraft door series for non-label, or for labeled openings up to 3 hour Fire Ratings, except for the following: Hardware Application All top and bottom caps can be ordered and installed at the factory. Only the Steel Top Cap with Screws can be installed by others and is also available in "Parts" from our Price book. 1” Specialty Purpose Top and/or Bottom Caps provide security shields from unwanted objects placed in the 14 gauge (1.7 mm) top and bottom closure channels. Steel and Flush/Filled caps shield from unwanted moisture penetration when installed on exterior outswing doors. If required, top caps may be sealed with caulk in the field by others. To prevent the build-up of moisture on the interior of the door, bottom caps should never be caulked. All caps and the 14 gauge closure channels they attach to are galvannealed. Equal Tornado Equal Hurricane 1” • Elevations Recessed Top Cap (Screwed-in) (bottom cap also available) 18 ga. top channel is recessed ~1/8" from top of door • • General Information Home Doors variations and options • Weather seals The ASTM E283 Air Infiltration Test was conducted on doors with and without a FAS-SEAL™ door bottom. A Non-weatherstripped frame with a 5/8" (16 mm) high threshold was used. The results of these tests were: Variations Frames The combination of Steelcraft door, frame, PS074 Weatherstripping, and the FAS-SEAL™ door bottom meets the requirements of NFPA 105, Smoke Control Standard, for both warm, and ambient room temperatures. Without FAS-SEAL™ 8.77 CFM/FT FAS-SEAL Door Bottom With FAS-SEAL™ 4.71 CFM/FT • CFM/FT = Cubic Feet Per Minute Per Lineal Foot of Crack • Tests were conducted by a nationally recognized test and research laboratory. 3/4” (19mm) 1-1/4” (32mm) #10 Sheet Metal Screw Tornado Specialty Purpose The concealed double sealing sweep conforms to sill variances, providing an effective seal. The FAS-SEAL™ door bottom is made from a synthetic material that is impervious to the elements, is capable of withstanding extreme temperatures and is Fire Rated. Hardware Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Variations FAS-SEAL™ door bottom sweep Application FAS-SEAL™ door bottoms are field installed to the bottom channel with factory-provided No. 10 x 3/4" screws. • Doors sized from 2' 0" (610 mm) wide thru 3' 4" (106 mm) wide: Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products • • Product availability Sweeps for doors 2' 0" through 4' 0" in width are available from factory inventory and are used on Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, TH, CE, H, HE, PW, and A14 Series doors. Pre-drill FAS-SEAL™ door bottom 4" from each end and centered. Apply to door bottom channel with 3 No. 10 x 3/4" screws provided. Doors sized from 3' 4" (106 mm) wide thru 4' 0" (1219 mm) wide: • Pre-drill FAS-SEAL™ door bottom 4" from each end and 15-1/4" from each end. Apply to door bottom channel with 4 No. 10 x 3/4" screws provided. 152 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/14/20 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Lights and louvers General information...................................................................154 Door designs for full flush doors..................................................154 Door (light) designs for CE embossed doors........................154 Door designs for full glass entrance doors..............................154 Glazing kit options......................................................................155 Dezigner ® Trim.....................................................................................155 Dezigner® Trim for Distributor Prep & Install..........................155 Lights and Louvers Flush door glass lights..............................................................156 Elevations Vision light: V........................................................................................156 Narrow light: Variable sizes............................................................ 157 Narrow light: Fixed sizes................................................................. 158 Half glass light: G................................................................................159 Full glass light: FG.............................................................................. 160 Full glass with multiple lights: FG2 ................................................161 Full glass with multiple lights: FG3 ...............................................162 Special glass lights.....................................................................163 Von Duprin® INPACT™ glass lights (mortise and concealed vertical rod)...........................................................................................163 Paladin glass lights........................................................................... 164 Tornado Top lights: Fixed sizes........................................................................165 Full glass light: FG ............................................................................. 166 Full glass with multiple lights: FG2............................................. 167 Full glass with multiple lights: FG3............................................ 168 Hurricane Embossed door glass lights...................................................165 Louver prep....................................................................................169 Louver prep: -L.................................................................................... 169 Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 153 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Lights and louvers • General information General information Full flush doors (L, SL, B, and T Series) Steelcraft doors can be specified and supplied with various glass options and louver cutouts depending on the architectural and applications needs. Door designs for full flush doors F The glass configuration is referred to as the door design. Letter designations describe the glass light designs. A brief description of the standard glass light available: Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home G Elevations Tornado • G: Half Glass door: designation for a door with a glass light located in the top half of the door face. The glass size will vary with the size of the door. However, for special sized doors, the next smaller glass size will be supplied. • V: Vision Light door: designation for a door with a small square window located in the top of the door. The glass size will remain constant regardless of the door size. • N: Narrow Light door: designation for a door with a long narrow light located along the lock edge of the door. The following variations in the Narrow light designs are available as standard: Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane F: Flush door: designation for a door without any glass light installed. • • N Light: door prepared for a 7 3/8" (187 mm) wide glass light (exposed glass size) which varies in height depending on the door height. • N3 Light: door prepared for a 3" (76 mm) wide and 33" (838 mm) high glass light (exposed glass size). • N4 Light: door prepared for a 4" (102 mm) wide and 25" (635 mm) high glass light (exposed glass size). • N5 Light: door prepared for a 5" (127 mm) wide and 20" (508 mm) high glass light (exposed glass size). • LNL Light: door prepared for an 7 3/8" (187 mm) wide glass light (exposed glass size) which extends the majority of the door height, and varies in height depending on the door height. FG: Full Glass L Series doors: designation for L Series doors with a full view window, glass extending nearly the full door width and height. The following variations in Full Glass Light designs are available: • FG Light: door prepared for a full view window extending nearly the full width and height of the door. • FG2 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes a stationary horizontal mid-rail dividing the window into two (2) individual lights. • FG3 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes two (2) stationary horizontal mid-rails, dividing the window into three (3) equal individual lights. 154 • N4 Full flush doors (L and A14 Series) FG • V FG2 N N3 LNL N5 Embossed Panel Doors (CE Series) FG3 E4TL Door (light) designs for CE embossed doors Doors with glass cutouts specifically sized to fit into the CE Series embossed door. • E4TL: designation for a door with dual vision lights located in the top section of the door and four embossed patterns in the lower section Door designs for full glass entrance doors The glass configuration is referred to as the door design. Letter designations describe the glass light designs. Refer to page 125 for unique A14 Series door construction. A brief description of the standard glass light available: • FG: Full Glass A14 Series doors: designation for A14 Series doors with a full view window, glass extending nearly the full door width and height. The following variations in Full Glass Light designs are available: • FG Light: door prepared for a full view window extending nearly the full width and height of the door. • FG2 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes a stationary horizontal mid-rail dividing the window into two (2) individual lights. • FG3 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes two (2) stationary horizontal mid-rails, dividing the window into three (3) equal individual lights. Note on Window Sizes and Designs: All door lights covered in this section are Steelcraft standards. Special light sizes and configurations are available when specified. For special size lights using Steelcraft trims, the glass cutting size is the Exposed Glass Size (EGS) plus 1 1/8". Refer to the following pages for specific details and dimensions of the various glass designs. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/14/17 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Glazing kit options Dezigner Trim (recessed) for 1/4" Glass (standard) Recessed panel so trim is flush with door surface Dezigner Trim for Distributor Prep & Install is shipped assembled with flush clips (no recess in the door face). This trim is the same as the factory installed Dezigner® trim, but it rests on the surface of the door face, like conventional hollow metal doors. Dezigner Trim (for Distributor Prep) for 1/4" Glass (standard) Flat panel so trim overlaps door surface Lights and Louvers 1/4" Glass Dezigner® Trim for Distributor Prep & Install 1/4" Glass Reinforcement channel Doors Dezigner® Trim is a unique and patented steel trim, recessed into the door face at the factory, providing a neat flush door surface designed to accommodate Standard 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass and Optional 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass. Variations Dezigner ® Trim Frames Flush door glass kits include the following glass trim systems: Variations Glazing kit options Dezigner Trim (recessed) for 1/2" Insulated Glass 1/2" Glass Flat panel so trim overlaps door surface Reinforcement channel 1/2" Glass Overlapping Steel Trim for 1/4" THRU 5/8" Glass 1/4" Glass Reinforcement channel Glazing bead mounting location determined by glass thickness Flush Mounted Steel Trim for 1" Insulated Glass 1" Glass Flat panel so trim overlaps door surface 3/4" - 1" Glass Reinforcement channel Glazing bead mounting location determined by glass thickness Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • • 155 Architectural Note: Reinforcement Channels shown are used with labeled doors and all Full glass & H Series doors. Performance Reinforcement channel Overlapping Steel Trim for 3/4" THRU 1" Insulated Glass Fire Rated Products Recessed panel so trim is flush with door surface 1/4" - 5/8" Glass Hardware Reinforcement channel Flat panel so trim overlaps door surface Specialty Flush Mounted Steel Trim for 1/4" Glass Tornado Not available on 14GA doors. Overlapping Steel Trim sits tight on the door face and overlaps the door surface. This trim accommodates a wide range of sizes from 1/4" thru 1" thick insulated glass. Glass thickness must be specified. Glazing beads are screw attached. Hurricane Flush Mounted Steel Trim sits in the recessed door face and is flush with the door surface. It is available for Standard 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass as well as Optional 1" (25 mm) thick insulated glass. Glazing beads are screw attached. Recessed panel so trim is flush with door surface Elevations Dezigner Trim (for Distributor Prep) for 1/2" Insulated Glass Recessed panel so trim is flush with door surface Frames Variations General Information Home Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Flush door glass lights Vision light: V L, SL, B, H/TH, and T Series doors 9 3⁄8" * (238 mm) Lights and Louvers Doors Variations 9 3⁄8" * (238 mm) Tornado Hurricane Elevations 62 ¼" (1581 mm) ¾" Undercut Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty * Architectural CL Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size Vision light door design The V Light designation is for a door with a small square window located in the top of the door. The glass size will remain constant regardless of the door size, and the light location is held constant from the bottom of the door. Glass light sizes The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft V Light (vision light) window designs: Glass Cutting Size 10 5/8" (270 mm) square Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system for L, SL, B and T Series doors. Door Cutout Size 11" (279 mm) square Exposed Glass Size 9 3/8" (238 mm) square Glazing details 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Insulated glass light thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. 3/8" (9 mm) Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: V. Glass cutting size Door series available Vision Light kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, H, and T Series. 156 • *Exposed glass Door cutout size Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Narrow light: Variable sizes 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) “A” Glass light sizes The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft N and LNL Light window designs: Doors 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 7 3⁄8"* (187 mm) Variations 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Frames 7 3⁄8"* (187 mm) Variations L, SL, B, and H/TH Series doors Window widths N and LNL Exposed Glass Size (EGS) 7 3/8" (191 mm) Glass Cutting Size (GCS) 8 5/8" (219 mm) Door Cutout Size (DCS) 9" (229 mm) Window heights “B” 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) LNL ¾" Undercut ¾" Undercut 6' 10" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" EGS 30 1/2" 32 1/2" 34 1/2" 36 1/2" 44 1/2" 46 1/2" 31 3/4" 33 3/4" 35 3/4" 37 3/4" 45 3/4" 47 3/4" DCS 32 3/32" 34 3/32" 36 3/32" 38 3/32" 46 3/32" 48 3/32 Door heights (Dim “B”) 6' 8" 6' 0" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" EGS 58" 60" 62" 64" 72" 74" GCS 59 1/4" 61 1/4" 63 1/4" 65 1/4" 73 1/4" 75 1/4" DCS 59 21/32" 61 21/32" 63 21/32" 65 21/32" 73 21/32" 75 21/32" • LNL Light: door prepared for a 7 3/8" (191 mm) wide glass light (exposed glass size) which extends the majority of the door height, and varies in height with the door height. Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for L, SL, and B Series doors. Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. • N: 7 3/8" (191 mm) wide glass light (which varies in height with the door height). • LNL: 7 3/8" (191 mm) wide glass light (which extends the majority of the door height). *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. Note: For special size doors, the next smaller glass size will be used. The glass light location will be held from the bottom of the door. • 157 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Performance Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: 3/8" (9 mm) Fire Rated Products 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Glazing details Hardware N Light: door prepared for a 7 3/8" (191 mm) wide glass light (exposed glass size) which varies in height with the door height. However, for special sized doors, the next smaller glass size will be supplied. Specialty • Door series available Narrow Light kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, and H Series. Tornado Variable narrow light door design Designation for a door with a long narrow light located along the lock edge of the door. The following variations in the Narrow Light designs are available as standard: Hurricane * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size Elevations N 6' 8" GCS LNL 12 ¾" (324 mm) Door heights (Dim “A”) Lights and Louvers N General Information Home Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Frames 5"* (127 mm) 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 4"* (102 mm) 20"* (508 mm) Elevations Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural 33"* (838 mm) 6' 8" = 37 5⁄16" 7' 0" = 41 5⁄16" 7' 2" + = 43 5⁄16" N4 N3 ¾" Undercut Fixed narrow light door design Designation for a door with a long narrow light located along the lock edge of the door. The following variations in the Narrow Light designs are covered on this sheet, and are available as standard: N3 Light: door prepared for a 3" (76 mm) wide and 33" (838 mm) high* glass light. ¾" Undercut Glass light sizes The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft N3, N4, and N5 Light window designs: Glass designs N5 N4 N3 5" *4" *3" Window widths • N4 Light: door prepared for a 4" (102 mm) wide and 25" (635 mm) high* glass light. Exposed glass size • Glass cutting size 6 1/4" 5 1/4" 4 1/4" N5 Light: door prepared for a 5" (127 mm) wide and 20" (508 mm) high** glass light. Door cutout size 6 19/32" 5 19/32" 4 19/32" Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system for L, SL, B and T Series doors. 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner® Trim System for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: • • • N3: 3" (76 mm) wide and 33" (838 mm) high* glass light. N4: 4" (102 mm) wide and 25" (635 mm) high* glass light. N5: 5" (127 mm) wide and 20" (508 mm) high* glass light. Door series available Narrow Light kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, H, and T Series. 158 • 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Varies 6' 8" = 45 5⁄16" 7' 0" + = 47 5⁄16" ¾" Undercut • 3"* (76 mm) 25"* (635 mm) 6' 8" = 50 5⁄16" 7' 0" + = 52 5⁄16" N5 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Varies Varies Lights and Louvers Doors L, SL, B, H/TH*, and T Series doors Variations Variations Narrow light: Fixed sizes Window heights Exposed glass size 20" 25" 33" Glass cutting size 21 1/4" 26 1/4" 34 1/4" Door cutout size 21 19/32" 26 19/32" 34 19/32" Glazing details 3/8" (9 mm) Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. * Note: Fire rated H/TH minimum 5" exposed glass width or 6-1/2" door cutout width (N4 and N3 not allowed). ** Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/16/20 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Half glass light: G Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for L, SL, and B Series doors. Dimension “B” Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: G. 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) to Bottom of Light Elevations Door series available Half Glass kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, and H Series. Lights and Louvers 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Doors 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) Variations Half glass door lights Designation for a door with a glass light located in the top half of the door face. The glass size will vary with the size of the door. However, for special sized doors, the next smaller glass size will be supplied. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Frames Dimension “A” 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Variations L, SL, B, and H Series doors G ¾" Undercut Tornado Window widths Hurricane Glass light sizes The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft G Light window designs: Door widths (Dim “A”) 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Specialty EGS Window heights 6' 8" 6' 10" 7 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" GCS = Glass Cutting Size EGS 30 1/2" 32 1/2" 34 1/2" 36 1/2" 44 1/2" 46 1/2" DCS = Door Cutout Size GCS 31 3/4" 33 3/4" 35 3/4" 37 3/4" 45 3/4" 47 3/4" DCS 32 3/32" 34 3/32" 36 3/32" 38 3/32" 46 3/32" 48 3/32" Hardware Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Door heights (Dim “B”) caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. 3/8" (9 mm) Performance Exposed glass Fire Rated Products Glazing details Glass cutting size Door cutout size Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size • 159 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Frames Doors L and H Series doors Dimension "A" 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Full glass (FG) door lights Designation for a door with a full vision glass light. The glass size will vary with the size of the door. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for L Series doors. Variations Variations Full glass light: FG 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Lights and Louvers Dimension "B" Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. Elevations Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG. Door series available Full Glass kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L and H Series. 12 ¾" (1024 mm) to Bottom of Light Special size doors Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass size will be supplied unless noted differently on the order. FG Tornado Hurricane ¾" Undercut * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft G Light window designs: Window widths Specialty Door widths (Dim “A”) 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" EGS 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" GCS = Glass Cutting Size DCS = Door Cutout Size Fire Rated Products Hardware Window heights Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Door heights (Dim “B”) 6' 8" 6' 10" 7' 0" EGS 58" 60" 62" 64" 72" 74" GCS 59 1/4" 61 1/4" 63 1/4" 65 1/4" 73 1/4" 75 1/4" DCS 59 21/32" 61 21/32" 63 21/32" 65 21/32" 73 21/32" 75 21/32" Glazing details Architectural Performance 3/8" (9 mm) Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size 160 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Full glass with multiple lights: FG2 Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. Dimension "C" Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG2. FG2 ¾" Undercut Special size doors Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass size will be supplied unless noted differently on the order. * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size Tornado Window widths Door widths (Dim “A”) EGS 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Specialty GCS DCS Window heights Door heights (Dim “B”) (Dim “C”) 6' 10" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" All Doors EGS 27 13/16" 29 13/16" 31 13/16" 33 13/16" 41 13/16" 43 13/16" 22 21/32" GCS 29 1/16" 31 1/16" 33 1/16" 35 1/16" 43 1/16" 45 1/16" 23 7/8" DCS 29 13/32" 31 13/32" 33 13/32" 35 13/32" 43 13/32" 45 13/32" 24 1/4" Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size GCS = Glass Cutting Size Hardware 6' 8" DCS = Door Cutout Size Glazing details *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size • 161 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 • Technical data manual • Performance Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections Fire Rated Products Notes: 1. For Flush door construction, the center rail of the FG2 glass lights vary with the door height. 2. If consistent rail heights are required, refer to page 173 and the A14 Series full glass entrance door construction. 3/8" (9 mm) Hurricane The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft FG2 designs with multiple glass lights Elevations Door series available Full Glass FG2 kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L and H Series. 12 ¾" (1024 mm) to Bottom of Light Lights and Louvers 7 ½" (190 mm) See Note #1 Below Doors 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. Dimension "B" Variations Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for L Series doors. Frames Full glass (FG2) door lights Designation for a door with two (2) glass lights each separated by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) Variations Dimension "A" 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) General Information Home Lights and louvers • Flush door glass lights Frames Doors Dimension "A" 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Full glass (FG3) door lights Designation for a door with three (3) glass lights each separated by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for L Series doors. Dimension "D" Variations Variations Full glass with multiple lights: FG3 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on H Series doors. 7 ½" (190 mm) Lights and Louvers Dimension "D" Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. 7 ½" (190 mm) Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. Dimension "D" Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG3. Elevations 12 ¾" (1024 mm) to Bottom of Light FG3 Door series available Full Glass FG3 kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L and H Series. ¾" Undercut Special size doors Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass size will be supplied unless noted differently on the order. Tornado Hurricane * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft FG3 designs with multiple glass lights Window widths Specialty Door widths (Dim “A”) EGS 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Architectural Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Door heights (Dim “D”) 6' 8" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" GCS = Glass Cutting Size EGS 14 5/16" 15 5/8" 16 5/16" 16 15/16" 19 5/8" DCS = Door Cutout Size GCS 15 1/2" 16 13/16" 17 1/2" 18 3/16" 20 13/16" DCS 15 7/8" 17 3/16" 17 7/8" 18 9/16" 21 3/16" Glazing details 3/8" (9 mm) Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Window heights Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size 162 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Special glass lights 8 7⁄32" (209 mm) Varies* 41" (1041 mm) V Glass lights Glass light cutouts are available in N4, N5 and V Light designs without modification. Other lights are available but have limited height due to the exit device preparation. Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® Series trim system. * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size 1/2"­(13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® Series trim system for insulated glass. Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Door heights* (Nominal) 6' 8" 7' 0" 7' 2" 8' 0" Maximum Exposed Glass Height 25 1/8" 29 1/8" 31 1/8" 41 1/8" The following critical dimension applies to the standard Steelcraft light designs with INPACT™ preparation: Glass Cutting Size = exposed glass size + 1 1/8" Door Cutout Size = exposed glass size + 1 1/2" Notes: 1. Consult code for ADA requirements on glass cutouts. Hardware *To determine maximum glass light height for other sized doors, for exposed glass, subtract 54" (1372 mm) from net door size. Specialty Glass light sizes The following dimensions outline the maximum glass heights available with the INPACT™ door preparation: 2. Refer to pages 270-271 for specific INPACT™ device preparation requirements. Glazing details Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. *Exposed glass Fire Rated Products 3/8" (9 mm) Tornado ¾" Undercut Hurricane G (Modified) Elevations 45 ¾" (1162 mm) N5 Lights and Louvers N4 4 ¼" (108 mm) Doors Optional details 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Varies* Variations 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Frames Von Duprin® INPACT™ glass lights (mortise and concealed vertical rod) Variations Special glass lights Glass cutting size Performance Door cutout size • 163 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Lights and louvers • Special glass lights Tornado Frames Doors Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Paladin glass lights light is centered horizontally 8 3/8" 4 1/8 visible" 26 11/16" visible 43" from visible glass to finished floor 9 1/2" visible 9 1/2" visible 57 1/2" from visible glass to finished floor PN Dimensions shown are to exposed glass size PV Glass lights Fully installed from the factory Glass lights with trim included in PV and PN label Light designs without modification. Lights can be added to any Paladin door available in a 3-sided frame. Lights are not available in variable sizes or locations. Fire rated versions (PVF and PNF) are available up to 90 minutes. Glazing trim system Paladin lights come fully installed from the factory and cannot be replaced or modified without nullifying tornado code labels. Care and Instructions When you receive your door, the glass will have a care instructions which include the below information: 1. Do not remove the label until after finish paint and ready to seal the glass trim 2. Painting: Do not powder coat your door to avoid exposing to extremely high temperatures that could damage components and affect performance. 3. Caulk/Sealant: A quality glass trim sealant must be applied to any weather-facing glass and trim to avoid water infiltration and corrosion over time. Apply sealant along full perimeter with no gaps between trim and glass, and between trim and door. Caulk may also be added to the non-storm side of the door as well for added protection and for visual preference. • For fire rated assemblies with glass, a UL classified fire rated sealant must be used (contact Technical product support. See page iv). 4. Do not cut on/take care not to damage: The outer layers of your Paladin glass are typical of other window glass that can be scratched and can break. Please take care. Broken glass will void your tornado label and must be replaced by replacing the entire tornado door with glass. 5. Film layer: The non-storm facing side of the glass has a protective film. Take care not to damage or remove. Do not use masking tape and do not otherwise scratch, damage or pull this film off. • The film layer side is on the non-storm side of the door, identified by the side of the glass trim with visible Phillips head trim bolts. 6. Cleaning: Do not use abrasive agents and/or bristle brushes when cleaning your glass surface. Use synthetic/soft cloths. Use common window cleaning solutions (ammonia solutions allowed 30 days after installation). 7. Replacement: If the film is damaged, call Steelcraft support at (877) 671-7011 to schedule replacement by an authorized representative. It is critical to door performance to resolve this condition as soon as possible. Notes: Hardware 1. PN lights only are ADA compliant / 43" from visible glass to finished floor. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 2. Refer to "PW Series doors" on page 203 for specific Paladin preparation requirements. 164 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Embossed door glass lights 6 5⁄8" (143 mm) 3/8" (9 mm) Varies* *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the trim system for insulated glass. 1/2" is standard on HE Series doors. E4TL Window heights Door widths EGS = Exposed Glass Size GCS = Glass Cutting Size DCS = Door Cutout Size Tornado Window Widths Note: Hurricane Glass light sizes (for E4TL) The following critical dimensions apply to the standard E6 (individual) dual vision light window design: Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letters E4TL. Elevations Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system on CE Series doors. Lights and Louvers 4 5⁄8" (118 mm) Doors 6 5⁄8" (143 mm) Glazing details Variations Door series available Light kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: CE, CF, and HE Series. Frames Top lights: Fixed sizes Variations Embossed door glass lights Door heights 6' 8", 7' 0", & 8' 0" 6 5/8" EGS GCS 7 3/4" GCS 5 3/4" DCS 8 7/32" DCS 6 7/32" Specialty 2' 6" thru 3' 8" EGS 4 5/8" Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 165 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/16/20 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Lights and louvers • Embossed door glass lights Frames Variations Full glass light: FG A14 Series full glass entrance doors 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Dimension "A" Full glass (FG) door lights Designation for a door with a full vision glass light. The glass size will vary with the size of the door. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system. Variations Doors 6 ¼" (159 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Lights and Louvers Dimension "B" Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. Tornado Hurricane Elevations Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG. Door series available Full Glass kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: A14 Series. 11 ¼" (284 mm) to Bottom of Light FG Special size doors Special glass sizes are available; however, A14 vertical stiles are always fixed at 6 13/16" wide regardless of the glass size. ¾" Undercut * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG Light window designs and are based on typical door sizes (special sizes available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other hardware options can affect sizes. Door widths (Dim “A”) EGS Architectural 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Window heights Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Door heights (Dim “B”) 6' 8" 6' 10" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" GCS = Glass Cutting Size EGS 61 1/2" 63 1/2" 65 1/2" 67 1/2" 75 1/2" 77 1/2" DCS = Door Cutout Size GCS 62 23/32" 64 23/32" 66 23/32" 68 23/32" 76 23/32" 78 3/4" DCS 63 1/8" 65 1/8" 67 1/8 " 69 1/8" 77 1/8" 79 1/8" Glazing details Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. 3/8" (9 mm) Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Window widths *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size 166 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Embossed door glass lights Full glass with multiple lights: FG2 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. Dimension "B" Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Doors 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system. Variations Glazing bead system Frames 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 6 ¼" (159 mm) Variations Dimension "A" 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Full glass (FG2) door lights Designation for a door with two (2) glass lights each separated by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door. Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. 6 ½" (164 mm) Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG2. Dimension "C" 39 ¼" See Note #1 Below Door series available Full Glass FG2 kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: A14 Series. Special size doors Special glass sizes are available; however, A14 vertical stiles are always fixed at 6 13/16" wide regardless of the glass size. ¾" Undercut Elevations 11 ¼" (284 mm) to Bottom of Light FG2 Lights and Louvers Ordering nomenclature * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size Tornado Window widths Hurricane The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG2 designs with multiple lights, based on typical door sizes (special sizes available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other hardware options can affect sizes. Door widths (Dim “A”) 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Specialty 2' 0" EGS Window heights Note #1: The center rail of the FG2 door is located 40" above the bottom of the frame (with a 3/4" door undercut). 6' 10" 7' 0" 7' 2" 7' 10" 8' 0" All Doors EGS 30 9/32" 32 9/32" 34 9/32" 36 9/32" 44 9/32" 46 9/32" 24 21/32" GCS = Glass Cutting Size GCS 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" 37 7/16" 45 7/16" 47 7/16" 25 7/8" DCS = Door Cutout Size DCS 31 7/8" 33 7/8" 35 7/8" 37 7/8" 45 13/16" 47 7/8" 26 1/4" Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Glazing details *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size • 167 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/14 • Technical data manual • Performance 3/8" (9 mm) Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. Fire Rated Products 6' 8" Hardware (Dim “C”) Door heights (Dim “B”) General Information Home Lights and louvers • Embossed door glass lights Frames Full glass (FG3) door lights Designation for a door with three (3) glass lights each separated by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door. 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) 6 ¼" (159 mm) Lights and Louvers Doors Dimension "A” 6 13⁄16" (173 mm) Variations Variations Full glass with multiple lights: FG3 Dimension "B” Glazing bead system 1/4" (6 mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the Steelcraft Dezigner® trim system. 6 ½" (164 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner ® trim system for insulated glass. Dimension "B” Insulated glass lights thicker than 1/2" (13 mm) are available as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim. Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors. 6 ½" (164 mm) Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications. Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG3. Dimension "B” Door series available Full Glass FG3 kits are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: A14 Series. Elevations 11 ¼" (284 mm) to Bottom of Light FG3 Special size doors Special glass sizes are available; however, A14 vertical stiles are always fixed at 6 13/16" wide regardless of the glass size. ¾" Undercut Tornado Hurricane * Dimensions shown are to Exposed Glass Size The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG3 designs with multiple lights, based on typical door sizes (special sizes available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other hardware options can affect sizes. Door widths (Dim “A”) EGS 2' 0" 2' 4" 2' 6" 2' 8" 2' 10" 3' 0" 3' 4" 3' 6" 3' 8" 3' 10" 4' 0" 10 3/16" 14 3/16" 16 3/16" 18 3/16" 20 3/16" 22 3/16" 26 3/16" 28 3/16" 30 3/16" 32 3/16" 34 3/16" GCS 11 7/16" 15 7/16" 17 7/16" 19 7/16" 21 7/16" 23 7/16" 27 7/16" 29 7/16" 31 7/16" 33 7/16" 35 7/16" DCS 11 25/32" 15 25/32" 17 25/32" 19 25/32" 21 25/32" 23 25/32" 27 25/32" 29 25/32" 31 25/32" 33 25/32" 35 25/32" Window heights Architectural Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size Door heights (Dim “B”) 6' 8" 7' 0" 7' 2" 8' 0" GCS = Glass Cutting Size EGS 16 3/32" 17 7/16" 18 3/32" 21 7/16" DCS = Door Cutout Size GCS 17 5/16" 18 11/16" 19 5/16" 22 11/16" DCS 17 11/16" 19 1/32" 19 11/16" 23 1/32" Glazing details Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the glass manufacturer’s glazing instructions for glass, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. 3/8" (9 mm) Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Window widths *Exposed glass Glass cutting size Door cutout size 168 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/14 Home General Information Lights and louvers • Louver prep Varies 7 ½" (159 mm) F-L Top F-L2 (Cut out only. Louver supplied by others.) Varies (Cut out only. Louver supplied by others.) Varies Lights and Louvers F-L Bottom Doors Optional details Variations L, SL, B, A14, and H Series doors Frames Louver prep: -L Variations Louver prep FG-L Welded-in reinforcement channels are used on labeled applications or when specified on an order. 12" (305 mm) to Bottom of Cutout Louver provided by others. Cutouts available Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller. Full louver cutouts with channels available in A14 Series doors only. Louvers are not available on CE, T, or PW Series. Specialty Labeled louvers See Fire rated section for approvals. Channels are used on all labeled door. Door series available Louver cutouts are available for the following door series in all of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, A14, and H Series. Tornado Special size doors Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller. ¾" Undercut Hurricane Ordering nomenclature The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: -L. Elevations Louver (-L) door prep Designation for a door with one (1) or two (2) louver cutouts with or without installed reinforcement channels. Reinforcement channels Hardware Door panel Reinforcement flush with edge of cut out Fire Rated Products Reinforcement Channel Cutout opening Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult the louver manufacturer’s glazing instructions for louver, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by glazing selections. Performance • 169 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Frames Variations General Information Home Lights and louvers • Louver prep This page intentionally left blank. 170 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Elevations General information....................................................................172 General frame information..............................................................172 Usage and application......................................................................172 Installation..............................................................................................172 Introduction........................................................................................... 173 General elevations information ................................................... 173 Typical elevations............................................................................... 174 Lights and Louvers Architectural sticks......................................................................175 Elevations End Jambs: Right or left hand........................................................177 Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand.................................177 Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand ............................... 178 10' 6" Square end cut corner post.............................................. 179 12' 1" Weld-in and snap-in filler plates...................................... 179 12' 1" Head or sill sections.............................................................. 180 Flush and Recessed sill sections................................................ 180 Partial sidelight mullion....................................................................181 Screw-in glazing beads.....................................................................181 Typical elevations........................................................................182 Tornado Installation details..................................................................... 189 Jamb anchor applications............................................................. 189 Base anchor applications.............................................................. 190 Hurricane Elevation 1: Transom and side panel or light assemblies.182 Elevation 2: Partial side panel or light assemblies..............183 Field joint/splice details: Typical details................................. 184 Field joint/splice details: Corridor and room enclosures .185 Transom panels without transom bars................................... 186 Splicing head and jamb sections............................................... 188 Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 171 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 06/08/17 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Elevations • General information General information Tornado General frame information The Steelcraft Architectural Stick Systems are designed to fit virtually all construction requirements for commercial building applications. These frame assemblies are fabricated (cut and welded) from various framing components, to meet a wide range of architectural requirements based on aesthetics, functionality, and durability. These frames and their components are specifically designed to meet the high usage levels of all commercial and institutional buildings. This section of the manual is designed to give an overview of the flexibility available in the Steelcraft Architectural Stick Systems. For maximum flexibility and functionality, the perimeter framing (open sections which attach to the wall systems) is available in several frame series. Anchorage to the wall and floor may vary from the details shown in the applicable frame Specification Sheets. The Steelcraft Architectural Stick Systems are available in the following frame series: • Flush Frames (F and FN Series): Available as transom light/panel, side light/panel, transom and side light/panel, borrowed lights and frames with corner enclosures. • Drywall Frame (DW and K Series): Available only as borrowed lights. These frames are KD (knock down). • Multi-Use Frames (MU Series): Available as transom light/ panel, side light/panel, transom and side light/panel, borrowed lights and entrance frames with corner enclosures. Architectural Usage and application To help simplify the use, selection and specification of Steelcraft framing systems, the following guidelines for base material selection can be used: Material gauge: the following base material thickness are available: • 16 gauge (1.3 mm): for Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with high usage. • 14 gauge (1.7 mm): for Extra-heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with potential of extremely high usage. Material Selection: In addition to the thickness of base material, commercial quality material types are supplied as specified in ANSI/SDI A250.8 Products > General > Steel Specifications, and are identified by Steelcraft as follows: • • Cold rolled (CRS or CR) for normal/interior openings. • Stainless for exterior, sterile, or special architectural openings. See Specialty > Stainless in this tech data. Galvannealed (GALV) for exterior openings or for interior openings with high humidity / when requiring rust prohibitive properties. Installation Installation of all Steelcraft Framing Systems shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Glaze and seal all exterior elevations, or interior elevations subjected to high humidity exposure, in accordance with HMMA's Tech Note (HMMA820-TN03-07). Guidelines for Glazing Hollow Metal Transoms, Sidelights, and Windows. Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home 172 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/14/20 Home General Information Elevations • General information Introduction 2. Components are available in 16 and 14 gauge nongalvannealed or optional galvannealed steel (except as noted otherwise). 3. Components are available as either single or double rabbet. For the purpose of simplicity, all details are shown as double rabbeted. 4. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. 5. All sill sections (members attached to the floor) are recommended to be galvannealed steel. 7. All frame open sections have standard 1/2" returns except MU Series and 5 3/4" jamb depth which have 7/16" returns. OPEN SECTIONS Single Rabbet Jamb Depth 1-15/16" (49mm) 1-15/16" (49mm ) * *Varies Glazing Bead *Varies Tornado 5/8" (16mm) 1", 2" or 4" (25, 50 or 102mm) 1", 2" or 4" (25, 50 or 102mm) Specialty Throat Opening 1/2" (13mm) (See Note 7) 1/2" (13mm) (See Note 7) 1/2" (13mm) (See Note 7) *Varies with glass thickness Hardware CLOSED SECTIONS Jamb Depth 1-9/16" (40mm) Glazing Bead 5/8" (16mm) Throat Opening Double Rabbet * Single Rabbet Jamb Depth 1-15/16" (49mm) 1-15/16" (49mm) 1", 2" or 4" (25, 50 or 102mm) 1", 2" or 4" (25, 50 or 102mm) 5/8" (16mm) 5/8" (16mm) Performance 5/8" (16mm) Fire Rated Products 5/8" (16mm) • 173 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 • Technical data manual • Hurricane Multi-Use frames only* 1/2" (13mm) (See Note 7) Elevations Jamb Depth 1-9/16" (40mm) Lights and Louvers 6. Closed sections are shown for 3 3/4" (95 mm) jamb depth. 3" (76 mm) jamb depth section has two-piece. Double Rabbet Doors Standard components are either open (anchoring into the wall), or closed (mullions and dividers) sections. Variations 1. Frames This publication is designed to show the assembly flexibility, and the components along with general cutting and assembly details. Other details include methods of splicing (for a frame when it exceeds shipping limitations), and other miscellaneous details. General elevations information Variations "Stick Sections", which are lengths of component frame material, are used to produce transom, transom & sidelight, sidelight and borrowed lights. The components are cut to length, notched and/or mitered, assembled and welded into an assembly to meet the requirements and specifications of the opening. The individual sections and the welded assembly can be fabricated at the factory or at the distributor's fabrication shop. General Information Home Elevations • General information Frames Variations Doors Transom frames Door frame having a transom bar and glass, panel or louver above the door opening. The transom bar separates the door opening from the transom opening. The frame height will vary but normally extends to the ceiling above. Ceiling height frame Door frame without a transom bar and a panel mounted above the door. The panel is normally the same thickness and material as the door. The frame height will vary but normally extends to the ceiling. Tornado Transom sidelight frame Door frame with transom bars and mullions dividing the entire frame into door and glass or panel openings. The frame height will vary but normally extends to the ceiling above. Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Typical elevations Fire Rated Products Hardware Sidelight frame Door frame with glass openings attached to one or both sides of the door opening. The sidelight portion can be partial height of the door opening or extend the entire height of the door. The frame is only the door height. If the frame is greater than the door height the frame is defined as a transom sidelight frame. Borrowed light Architectural Performance Four-sided frame without a door opening, prepared for glass installation in the field. The borrowed light can be designed for one or multiple pieces of glass. The frame can be located in the wall off the floor or sit on the floor and extend to the ceiling above. 174 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Home General Information Elevations • Architectural sticks Single rabbet Double rabbet Description TSF-6 Page no. Single rabbet Double rabbet Page no. Part no. Description 6' 8" Double Hinge Mullion TSF-34 R/L 7' 2" Hinge & Strike Mullion TSF-7 6' 8" Double Strike Mullion TSF-35 R/L 7' 2" Single Hinge Mullion TSF-8 R/L 6' 8" Hinge & Strike Mullion TSF-36 R/L 7' 2" Single Strike Mullion TSF-9 R/L 6' 8" Single Hinge Mullion TSF-39 R/L 7' 2" End Hinge Jamb 12' 1" TSF-10 R/L 6' 8" Single Strike Mullion TSF-40 Cased Open Section 12' 1" TSF-11 7' 0" Double Hinge Mullion TSF-41 R/L Single Strike Mullion 10' 6" (All heights) TSF-12 7' 0" Double Strike Mullion TSF-42 R/L 6' 8" Single Hinge Mullion 10' 6" TSF-13 R/L 7' 0" Hinge & Strike Mullion TSF-43 R/L 7' 0" Single Hinge Mullion 10' 6" TSF-14 R/L 7' 0" Single Hinge Mullion TSF-44 R/L 7' 2" Single Hinge Mullion 10' 6" TSF-15 R/L 7' 0" Single Strike Mullion TSF-44 R/L 6' 8" Hinge & Strike Mullion 10' 6" TSF-16 Blank Mullion 2" Face 10' 6" TSF-46 R/L 7' 0" Hinge & Strike Mullion 10' 6" TSF-20 7' 0" Blank Mullion TSF-47 R/L 7' 2" Hinge & Strike Mullion 10' 6" TSF-21 Head or Sill 2" Face 12' 1" n/a TSF-51 TSF-22 Filler with 5/8" Stop 12' 1" 2 Way Corner Post Outside 10' 6" n/a TSF-52 TSF-23 Head or Sill 4" Face 12' 1" 2 Way Corner Post Outside 10' 6" TSF-24 R/L 6' 8" End Hinge Jamb 12' 1" n/a TSF-53 3 Way Corner Post Outside 10' 6" TSF-25 R/L 7' 0" End Hinge Jamb 12' 1" n/a TSF-54 3 Way Corner Post Outside 10' 6" TSF-26 R/L End Strike Jamb 12' 1" (All heights) TSF-56 6’8” Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-27 R/L Filler without Stop 12' 1" See TSF 93 TSF-57 7’ 0" Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-32 R/L 7' 2" Double Hinge Mullion See TSF-93 TSF-58 7' 2" Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-33 7' 2" Double Strike Mullion See TSF-96 Elevations Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 175 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Lights and Louvers Part no. Doors Stick components are available in 12' 1" (open sections), 10' 6" (closed sections) lengths and pre-sized lengths for 6' 8", 7' 0", 7' 2" and 8' 0" door heights. Sections can be blank (no cutouts), have strike or hinge preps to match doors and other three sided frames. See the exact TSF number for the hardware prep that is included. Variations Sticks are commonly identified as TSF (Transom Sidelight Frame) sections. Each component has a unique TSF number that identifies it from another section. The frame jamb depth and gauge of steel are also used in the identification and ordering since the TSF number is only a basic identification number. Frames TSF parts list Sticks are frame components used by the distributor to produce transom, transom/sidelight, sidelight and borrowed light frames. The components are cut to length, notched or mitered, assembled and welded into an assembly by the distributor to meet the requirements of the opening. Variations Architectural sticks Frames Single rabbet Double rabbet Elevations Tornado 8' 0" Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-80 8' 0" Double Hinge Mullion TSF-81 Single rabbet Double rabbet TSF-108 Recessed Sill Galvannealed 8 1/8" Face x 1 15/16" Deep 12' 1" 8' 0" Double Strike Mullion n/a TSF-132 R/L Blank Partial Sidelite Mullion 40" Notch 10' 6" TSF-82 R/L 8' 0" Hinge & Strike Mullion n/a TSF-133 R/L Single Strike Partial Sidelite Mullion with 40" Notch 10' 6" TSF-83 R/L 8' 0" Single Hinge Mullion n/a TSF-134 R/L Blank Partial Sidelite Mullion 40" Notch 7' 0" TSF-84 R/L 8' 0" Single Strike Mullion n/a TSF-135 TSF-85 R/L 8' 0" End Hinge Jamb 10' 6" Single Strike Partial Sidelite Mullion with 40" Notch 7' 0" 3GB0080P012 Screw-in Glazing Bead 5/8" x 10' 0" TSF-86 8' 0" Blank Mullion TSF-87 R/L 8' 0" Single Hinge Mullion 10' 6" TSF-88 R/L 8' 0" Hinge & Strike Mullion 10' 6" TSF-89 Snap-in Filler with 5/8" Stop 12' 1" See TSF-56 TSF-93 6' 8" Removable Mullion Double Strike See TSF-6 TSF-94 7' 0" Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-95 MU Filler Plate 5/8" Stop 12' 1" See TSF-58 TSF-96 7' 2" Removable Mullion Double Strike See TSF-59 TSF-98 8' 0" Removable Mullion Double Strike TSF-99 Blank Mullion 4" Face 10' 6" n/a TSF-102 Un-assembled Transom Bar Side A 1 9/16" 10' 6" n/a TSF-103 Un-assembled Transom Bar Side B 1 15/16" 10' 6" TSF-104 Flush Sill Section Galvannealed 8 1/8" High 12' 1" TSF-105 Flush Sill Section Galvannealed 6 1/8" High 12' 1" TSF-106 Flush Sill Section Galvannealed 16 1/8" High 12' 1" TSF-107 Recessed Sill Galvannealed 8 8" Face x 1 16" Deep 12' 1" n/a n/a Specialty Hurricane TSF-59 Page no. n/a See TSF-98 Fire Rated Products Hardware Description Description Performance Architectural Part no. Part no. Lights and Louvers Doors Elevations • Architectural sticks Variations Variations General Information Home n/a 176 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Page no. Home General Information Elevations • Architectural sticks End Jambs: Right or left hand TSF No. TSF-24 7' 0" TSF-25 7' 2" TSF-39 8' 0" TSF-85 6' 8" End Strike Jamb 12' 1" 7' 0" ASA 7' 2" Not shown TSF-26 8' 0" Lights and Louvers Notes: 1. Doors End Hinge Jamb 12' 1" Nominal Door Size 6' 8" Variations Description Frames Nomenclature: Variations End Hinge Jamb shown Description: 12' 1" open frame section with square end cutoff. Specify right or left hand when ordering. 2. Not available with transom bar notch. Elevations Double Rabbet Tornado Single Strike Mullion shown Description: 10' 6" closed frame section with square end cutoff. Hurricane Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand Single Rabbet Nomenclature: Nominal Door Size TSF No. Specialty Description 6' 8" Single Strike Mullion. ASA Strike prepped on one (1) rabbet. Opposite rabbet blank. Hinges prepped on one (1) rabbet. Opposite rabbet blank TSF-41 10' 6" 8' 0" 6' 8" TSF-42 7' 0" TSF-43 7' 2" TSF-44 8' 0" TSF-87 6' 8" TSF-45 7' 0" TSF-46 7' 2" TSF-47 8' 0" TSF-88 10' 6" Double Rabbet Single Rabbet Fire Rated Products Hinges prepped on one (1) rabbet. ASA Strike prepped on opposite rabbet. 7' 2" Hardware Single Hinge Mullion 7' 0" Notes: Specify right or left hand when ordering. Performance • 177 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Elevations • Architectural sticks Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand Intermediate mullions are sized to the specified nominal door height and notched for the frame head stop. Description: Closed frame section with notched end cutoff, cut to door height shown. Nomenclature: Description Size TSF No. 6' 8" TSF-6 Double Strike Mullion 7' 0" TSF-11 ASA Strikes prepped on both rabbet 7' 2" TSF-32 8' 0" TSF-80 6' 8" TSF-7 Double Hinge Mullion 7' 0" TSF-12 Hinges prepped on both rabbet 7' 2" TSF-33 Single Hinge Mullion Hinges prepped on one (1) rabbet. Opposite rabbet blank. Single Strike Mullion ASA Strike prepped on one (1) rabbet. Opposite rabbet blank. 8' 0" TSF-81 6' 8" TSF-9 7' 0" TSF-14 7' 2" TSF-35 8' 0" TSF-83 6' 8" TSF-10 7' 0" TSF-15 7' 2" TSF-36 8' 0" TSF-84 6' 8" TSF-8 7' 0" TSF-13 7' 2" TSF-34 8' 0" TSF-82 Blank Mullion 7' 0" TSF-20 No hardware preps 8' 0" TSF-86 Hinges prepped on one (1) rabbet. ASA Strike prepped on opposite rabbet. Double Strike Mullion shown Door height Door height Double Rabbet Single Rabbet Specialty Notes: Specify right or left hand when ordering. Removable mullion Description: Closed frame section with double strike and with ends notched for installation into frame with mounting clips. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Nomenclature: Description Size TSF No. 6' 8" TSF-56 Double Rabbet Mullion 7' 0" TSF-57 ASA 7' 2" TSF-58 8' 0" TSF-59 6' 8" TSF-93 Single Rabbet Mullion 7' 0" TSF-94 ASA 7' 2" TSF-96 8' 0" TSF-98 Notes: 1. See Parts Price List to order mounting clips. 2. Single rabbet mullions can be used with double rabbet frames. Door height Double Rabbet 3. Refer to page 197 for installation details. 178 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Door height Single Rabbet Home General Information Elevations • Architectural sticks 10' 6" Square end cut corner post TSF No. 1 9/16" Outside Rabbet 10' 6" TSF-51 1 15/16" Outside Rabbet 10' 6" TSF-52 1 9/16" Outside Rabbet 10' 6" TSF-53 1 15/16" Outside Rabbet 10' 6" TSF-54 3 Way Corner Post 12' 1" 12' 1" Doors Size Variations Description 2 Way Corner Post Frames Nomenclature: Variations Description: Corner post with square end cutoff Lights and Louvers 3-Way Corner Closure 2-Way Corner Closure Elevations 12' 1" Weld-in and snap-in filler plates Description: filler plate for use in open sections with square end cutoff. Nomenclature: TSF No. For F Series frames with 5/8" Stop 12' 1" TSF-22 For F Series frames without Stop 12' 1" TSF-27 For F Series frames, snap-in with 5/8" Stop 12' 1" TSF-89 For MU Series frames with 5/8" Stop 12' 1" TSF-95 Tornado Size TSF-22 12' 1" Specialty Notes: 1. TSF-22, 27 and 95 are designed to be welded into throat opening of frame section. 2. TSF-89 snaps into the throat opening of the F Series frame. Single rabbet with stop TSF-22 3. See Parts Price List for additional snap-in filler clips. Hardware 12' 1" Snap-in filler plate with stop Multi-use filler plate with stop TSF-27 TSF-89 TSF-95 • 179 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • 12' 1" Performance 12' 1" Fire Rated Products Filler plate without stop 12' 1" Hurricane Double rabbet with stop Description General Information Home Elevations • Architectural sticks Frames Doors Description: open frame section with square end cutoff. Nomenclature: Description Size TSF No. Rabbetted F section 2" Face 12' 1" TSF-21 Rabbetted F section 4" Face 12' 1" TSF-23 Cased Open F section 2" Face 12' 1" TSF-40 Rabbetted MU section 2" Face 12' 1" TSF-21 Rabbetted with 2" face Cased open with 2" face Notes: F Series rabbetted and cased open sections are available with 1" face. Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations 12' 1" Head or sill sections Rabbetted with 4" face Multi-use with 2" face Flush and Recessed sill sections Tornado Nomenclature: Hardware Specialty Hurricane Description: open frame section with square end cutoff. Description Size TSF No. TSF-105 6 1/8" 8 1/8" or 16 1/8" Double rabbet Double Rabbet 6 1/8" Face 12' 1" 8 1/8" Face 12' 1" TSF-104 16 1/8" Face 12' 1" TSF-106 12' 1" TSF-108 12' 1" Single Rabbet Sill 8 1/8" Face x 1 15/16" Deep Notes: 1. Sill sections are galvanized as standard. 2. Sill sections anchors are recommended for flush sill when length exceeds 5' 0". 6 1/8" 8 1/8" or 16 1/8" Single rabbet 3. Available as F Series only (no backbend returns) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 12' 1" 180 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Home General Information Elevations • Architectural sticks Partial sidelight mullion Variations Frames Variations Doors Partial sidelight mullion: Right and left hand Description: Closed frame section with a 40" notch in the bottom, forming an open section with the proper throat opening. End cutoff as noted below. See chart for lengths available. Nomenclature: TSF No. Overall Length End cutoff Stick length TSF-132 126" Square 7 ' 0 " mullion TSF-134 84" Notched Stick length w / ASA TSF-133 126" Square 7 ' 0 " mullion w / ASA TSF-135 84" Notched 6' 8" Hinge mullion TSF-138 80" Notched 7' 0" Hinge mullion TSF-139 84" Notched Stick length w/ 6' 8" TSF-140 126" Square spacing Stick length w/ 7' 0" TSF-141 126" Square spacing Description Overall Length Blank mullions Strike mullions Lights and Louvers 40” Hinge mullions Elevations Screw-in glazing beads Tornado Nomenclature: 3GB0080P012 2. Locate the bead from the stop as required. The normal location for 1/4" glass is 3/8". Bead Specialty Standard Bead Installation 1. Cut glazing bead to length required (Note: horizontal glazing beads run the full width of the openings and vertical glazing beads stop when they meet the horizontal beads). Glazing Bead (3GB0080P012) Self-drilling Screw (Q-198) If an automatic screw gun driver is being used, the screws will drill the necessary hole in the frame section. • If an automatic screw gun driver is not being used, drill a .149" diameter hole (number 25 drill) in the frame and install the screws. Hardware 3. Using the glazing bead as a template, install screws through the pre-punched holes as required. • Hurricane Screw-in Bead Description: 1" wide x 5/8" high x 10' 0" long. 18 gauge galvannealed glazing bead with square end cutoff. Beads are dimpled for, and supplied with #8 x 1 1/4" oval head self drilling screws. Fire Rated Products Glazing Groove 3/8” (standard) Performance • 181 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 • Technical data manual • Frames Doors Variations Variations General Information Home Elevations • Typical elevations Typical elevations Saw miter (shown) (die miter similar) Elevation 1: Transom and side panel or light assemblies Typical miter joint (see detail 1) Optional butt joint (see note 7) See detail 2 Detail 1 Lights and Louvers Typical corner assembly See detail 2 Detail 2 Mullion connection Weld along seam and grind smooth Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Weld along face seams and grind smooth Weld along inside of miter and grind smooth on outside face. Tack weld the rabbets and soffit on inside at jambs. • For saw-mitered tack weld rabbets and soffit on inside of jamb • For die-miter, bend interlocking miter tabs See detail 3 Detail 3 Sill connection Notes: Transom and Side Panel/Light Assemblies are supplied in a multitude of elevation designs and sizes. The elevation and related details shown above are for reference. 1. The most common elevations used are with lights (windows). Glass can be of varying thickness which must be specified. 2. Perimeter jambs and head can be supplied either factory die mitered or saw mitered. Corner connections are usually supplied as welded (SUA). 3. Removable transom bars (above the door opening) can be supplied (when specified), to allow for passage of large equipment or objects through the door opening. If required, this feature must be specified, and the unit above the door would be a panel and not a light (glass). Weld along seam and grind smooth 4. Transom panels (above the door) are the same thickness as the door, and can be supplied (when specified) as: • • With Transom Bar (fixed or removable) as shown above. Without the Transom Bar (fixed or removable) for aesthetics or functionality. 5. Removable mullions (separating double doors) can be supplied (when specified), to allow for passage of large equipment or objects through the door opening. 6. All joints between meeting frame members are to be welded and finished in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 7. If end jambs are specified as butt welded, frame must be installed in butted wall applications. Additional field notching by others will be required if the frame is installed in wrap wall applications. 182 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Elevations • Typical elevations Elevation 2: Partial side panel or light assemblies Frames Variations Doors as required Variations Detail 4 - Closed section (with partial side light option) Available in F and FN-Series only. Lights and Louvers equal to jamb depth throat opening Detail 4 Elevations See note 3 Detail 5 - Throat filler option 1 or 2" (25 or 50 mm) Tornado Notes: 1. All notes shown on the previous page also apply to this type of elevation. Detail 6 - Double frame section option 2 or 4" (50 or 102 mm) • Throat opening filler plate: can be installed, welded and finished to provide a closed section in the partial sidelight area of the elevation. See detail 5. • Double frame sections: can be utilized. For these elevations, the door frame and sidelight are one unit, but there is a visible seam separating the units. See detail 6. • 183 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • Performance Closed section: this section offers the best appearance, but must be supplied with an open frame throat to accommodate the wall construction below the side light. Available in F and FN Series only. See detail 4. Tack weld along the seam approximately 8" (203 mm) on center and grind smooth. Fill seam as required with filler and grind smooth. Fire Rated Products • Hardware 2. Since the side lights do not extend the full height of the mullion (which separate the door and transom area), care must be taken in fabricating the assembly. 3. Vertical mullions (separating the door and transom areas) must include provisions for glazing the sidelight unit, and can be accomplished in different ways: Specialty Partial Side Light Assemblies are supplied in a multitude of elevation designs and sizes. The elevation and related details shown above are for reference. Hurricane Tack weld along the seam approximately 8" (203 mm) on center and grind smooth. Fill seam as required with filler and grind smooth. General Information Home Elevations • Typical elevations Frames Detail 7 Detail 7 Detail 7 Variations Doors Variations Field joint/splice details: Typical details Detail 7 Splice plate Detail 7 Splice plate Detail 7 Detail 8 Detail 8 Detail 8 Lights and Louvers Detail 8 Detail 8 Elevations Detail 8 Detail 3 Tornado Hurricane Detail 3 Detail 3 Specialty Detail 3 Notes: Field joint/splices of elevations are required when the assembly is to large to be fabricated in one piece. Some of the reasons for this practice are as follows: Hardware 1. Transportation limitations FIELD JOINT/SPLICE DETAILS FIELD Detail 8 Detail 7 JOINT/SPLICE DETAILS Mullion Connection Detail 8 Mullion Connection End Jamb Connection Detail 7 End Jamb Connection 2. Handling issues related to either the job site or during fabrication 3. Installation limitations Splice sleeve Fire Rated Products Splice sleeve Architectural Performance Splice clips Splice clips 184 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Corridor and Room Enclosures Detail 9 Home General Information Elevations • Typical elevations Detail 9 Detail 9 Detail 9 Detail 9 Field joint/splice details: Corridor and room enclosures Doors 1. Variations Corridor and room enclosures are accomplished with the use of "corner posts" (a frame stick component), and field joint/ splices. The following notes apply. Frames Corridor and Room Enclosures Detail 9 Variations Notes: Detail 9 All notes shown on the previous pages also apply to this type of elevation. Detail 9 2. Corner posts are specially designed Detail 10 stick sections that allow for the connection of two Transom and Sidelight Elevations to Detail 10 be field joined to make a corner. Detail 9 Detail 9 3. At this time, corner connections are not Fire Rated applications. Lights and Louvers Detail 10 Detail 9 Elevations Detail 10 Detail 10 Tornado Detail 9 Corner Post Connection Detail 10 Detail 10 Sill Connection Hardware Detail 10 Sill Connection Detail 9 Corner Post Connection Splice clips Specialty Detail 10 Sill Connection Splice clips Hurricane Detail 10 Sill Connection Detail 9 Corner Post Connection Detail 9 Corner Post Connection Splice clips Splice clips Fire Rated Products Splice clips • 185 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • Performance Splice clips General Information Home Elevations • Typical elevations 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded to jamb. 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded to jamb. Frames Doors Notes: 1. Transom panels are shipped loose for installation by others. Screws for attachment are supplied by Steelcraft. 2. Transom panels are phosphatized and finished with one coat of baked-on primer. 3. Transom panels are individually wrapped in corrugated cardboard with wood stripping on vertical edges of package together with metal banding. 4. Labeled panels are available in L18 door type only. For fire ratings and size limitations, see the section of this manual. A Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Transom panels without transom bars B A C C A A Tornado Hurricane Elevations B B C B C 16 Ga. Reinforcing 3/16” Support Channel spotwelded Angle spotwelded to jamb. to jamb. 3/16” Support 16 Ga. Reinforcing Anglespotwelded spotwelded Channel to jamb. to jamb. 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded 3/16” Support to head. 16 spotwelded Ga. Reinforcing Angle Channel spotwelded to jamb. 16 Ga. Reinforcing 3/16” toSupport head. spotwelded to jamb. Angle spotwelded 16 Ga. Reinforcing to jamb. spotwelded to jamb. 16 Ga. Reinforcing 3/16” Support Channel spotwelded Angle spotwelded to head. to jamb. 3/16” Support 16 Ga. Reinforcing Angle spotwelded Channel spotwelded 16 Ga. Reinforcing to jamb. to jamb. to head. spotwelded 16 Ga. Reinforcing spotwelded to jamb. 3/16” Support Angle spotwelded to jamb. 3/16” Support Angle spotwelded to jamb. TYPICAL ELEVATION 1” 1” Nominal Door Opening 1” Plus 5/16” Nominal Door TYPICAL NON-LABEL FRAME 1” Opening Plus 5/16” TYPICAL NON-LABEL FRAME Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” TYPICAL NON-LABEL FRAME TYPICAL NON-LABEL FRAME TYPICAL LABEL FRAME Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” TYPICAL LABEL FRAME TYPICAL LABEL FRAME Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” Nominal Door Opening Plus 5/16” TYPICAL LABEL FRAME Specialty TYPICAL ELEVATION Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded to jamb. 16 Ga. Reinforcing TYPICAL ELEVATION Channel spotwelded 16 Ga. Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing tospotwelded jamb. Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded Channel to panel. to head. to panel. 16 Ga. Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing TYPICAL ELEVATION16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded Honeycomb Core Honeycomb Core Channel spotwelded to panel. to head. 16 Ga. to Reinforcing panel. 14 Ga. Flat Astragal 14 Ga. Flat Astragal Channel spotwelded Honeycomb Core Honeycomb Core spotwelded to spotwelded to to jamb. Core Honeycomb Transom Panel. Transom Panel. 16 Ga. Reinforcing 14 Ga. Flat Astragal 14 Ga. Flat Astragal 16 Ga. Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded B TYPICAL NON-LABEL spotwelded to spotwelded to A TYPICAL JAMB C TYPICAL LABEL SECTION Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded to jamb. Honeycomb Core Transom Panel. Transom Panel. SECTION SECTION to panel. to head. to panel. 16 Ga.NON-LABEL Reinforcing 16 Ga. Reinforcing A TYPICAL B TYPICAL C TYPICAL 16 Ga. Reinforcing JAMB SECTION LABEL Honeycomb Core Honeycomb Core Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded SECTION SECTION to Ga. panel. to head. to panel. 14 Flat Astragal 14 Ga. Flat Astragal spotwelded spotwelded to Honeycomb to Core Honeycomb Core Honeycomb Core Transom Panel. Transom Panel. 14 Ga. Flat Astragal 14 Ga. Flat Astragal A TYPICAL JAMB SECTION B TYPICALspotwelded C TYPICAL NON-LABEL LABEL to to spotwelded SECTIONTransom Panel. SECTION Honeycomb Core Transom Panel. A TYPICAL JAMB SECTION 186 • B TYPICAL NON-LABEL SECTION C TYPICAL LABEL SECTION • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 Place panel in frame below channels and support angle. 2. Slide panel toward top of frame over channels until panel bottoms are on support angle. 3. Center punch thru holes on bottom edge of panel of each corner. 4. Drill .199" diameter hole (No. 8 drill) at center punches in support angle. 5. Install No. 12-24 flat head thread cutting machine screws to secure panel in place. HeadHead and/or and/or JambJamb 3/16”3/16” Head and/or Jamb Lights and Louvers 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel 16 Ga.16 Ga. Reinforcing Reinforcing Channel Channel TYPICAL TYPICAL CHANNEL CHANNEL LOCATION LOCATION 3/16” NON-LABELED NON-LABELED TRANSOM TRANSOM PANEL PANEL Transom Panel 14 Ga.14 Flat Ga.Astragal Flat Astragal spotwelded spotwelded to to Transom Transom Panel.Panel. 14 Ga. Plate spotwelded to Panel. Transom PanelPanel Transom CloserCloser Reinf.Reinf. (not shown) (not shown) installed in installed in all label allpanels label panels 14 Ga.14 Flat Ga.Astragal Flat Astragal spotwelded to spotwelded to Transom Panel.Panel. Transom 14 Ga.14 Plate Ga. Plate spotwelded spotwelded to to Panel.Panel. 3/16” 3/16” Support Support AngleAngle spotwelded spotwelded to jamb. to jamb. Jamb Jamb (1) No.(1) 12-24 No. 12-24 Flat Flat 3/16”Cutting Support Head Thread Head Thread Cutting Angle spotwelded Machine Machine Screws. Screws. to jamb. (2) No.(2) 12-24 Flat Flat No. 12-24 Head Thread Cutting Head Thread Cutting Machine Screws. Machine Screws. Hardware 14 Ga.14 Plate Ga. Plate 14 Ga. Flatspotwelded Astragal spotwelded to to spotwelded to Panel.Panel. Transom Panel. Closer Reinf. (not shown) installed in 3/16” 3/16” Support Support all Angle label panels Angle spotwelded spotwelded to jamb. to jamb. 16 Ga.16 Reinforcing Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded Channel spotwelded to panel. to panel. Specialty Transom Transom PanelPanel 16 Ga. Reinforcing Channel spotwelded to panel. 16 Ga. Channel spotwelded to jamb and Head. 16 Ga.16 Channel Ga. Channel spotwelded spotwelded to to jamb and jambHead. and Head. Tornado LABELED TRANSOM PANEL LABELED LABELED TRANSOM TRANSOM PANEL PANEL Hurricane 16 Ga.16 Reinforcing Ga. Reinforcing Channel Channel spotwelded spotwelded to jamb. to jamb. Elevations TYPICAL CHANNEL LOCATION 16 Ga.16 Reinforcing Ga. Reinforcing Channel Channel spotwelded spotwelded to panel. to panel. Doors 1. Variations Jamb 1/8” 1/8” 1/8” 1/8” Panel Height (Nom. Opening Minus 1/8”) Door Door HeightHeight 14 Ga.14 Flat Ga.Astragal Flat Astragal welded welded on. on. (1-1/2”(1-1/2” wide)wide) 1/8” 1/8” PanelPanel HeightHeight (Nom.(Nom. Opening Opening MinusMinus 1/8”) 1/8”) 14 Ga.14 Flat Ga.Astragal Flat Astragal welded welded on. on. (1-1/2”(1-1/2” wide)wide) 1/8” 1/8” Door Door HeightHeight 1/8” Door Height Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 04/30/08 • Technical data manual • • 187 Architectural 14 Ga. Flat Astragal welded on. (1-1/2” wide) Performance PanelPanel HeightHeight (Nom.(Nom. Opening Opening MinusMinus 1/8”) 1/8”) 1/8” (2) No. 12-24 Flat Head Thread Cutting Machine Screws. Fire Rated Products t Astragal n. de) Installation: Frames at tting . Elevations • Typical elevations Variations upport potwelded b. General Information cing welded Home General Information Home Elevations • Typical elevations Frames Variations Splicing head and jamb sections Sometimes it is necessary to splice jambs and/or heads to make a long section. Steelcraft recommends the following method of splicing. It is recommended that the splice always be located over the center of a vertical member. 1. Doors Variations Lights and Louvers Elevations Single Rabbet Double Rabbet Single Rabbet Install splice channel into end of one section. Allow half of the splice channel to extend out of the section. 2. Weld the ends of the splice channel to the frame section. 3. Slide other frame section over the splice channel and weld to the channel. 4. Weld the face joint and grind smooth. Removable mullions: Cutting, notching, and installation Double rabbet removable mullions can be made from TSF-16 or any intermediate strike mullion. The details shown illustrate the cutting and notching required to make the removable mullion. Notch mullion as shown The mullion stiffener channel must mullion asdeep shown Drill holes as shown. All other beNotch notched 13/16” at the The mullion stiffener channel must mounting holes will be match bottom. See detail below. Drill holes as shown. All other be notched 13/16” deep at the drilled at installation. mounting holes will be match bottom. See detail below. 1-7/8” drilled at installation. 5/8” +1/32 3/8” 1-7/8” -0 1-15/16” 5/8” +1/32 3/8” rabbet -0 dia. hole .201” 1-15/16” No. 7 drill, rabbet .201” dia. hole 2 places No. 7 drill, 2 places 3/8” 3/8” Splice Channel Splice Channel Splice Channel Splice Channel REMOVABLE MULLION INSTALLATION REMOVABLE MULLION INSTALLATION Double Rabbet Double Rabbet Sleeve 3AN0702P001 Sleeve 3AN0702P001 Angle Clip 3AN0703P001 Angle Clip 3AN0703P001 Attach anchors to head and floor. Attach anchors to head and floor. Attach mullions to anchors (6 places) Attach mullions to anchors (6 places) 1” Tornado Hurricane Double Rabbet 1” 13/16” 13/16” 15/64” 15/64” 5/8” Specialty 5/8” Bottom Notch Detail Detail is shown reversed forBottom clarity.Notch Detail Detail is shown reversed for clarity. 5/8” 5/8” 13/16” notch depth 13/16” notch depth Single Rabbet Single Rabbet Sleeve 3AN0704P001 Sleeve 3AN0704P001 Hardware Attach anchors to head and floor. Attach anchors to head and floor. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Note: Frame must be 2”Note: wider than a Frame must be standard frame 2” for awider pair ofthan a standard frame doors. for a pair of doors. 188 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Attach mullions to anchors (8 places) Attach mullions to anchors (8 places) Home General Information Elevations • Installation details machine screw in the center of the soffit. Dimples are located approximately 30" on center. Wire anchor can Wire anchor can be used for jamb be used for jamb depths fromWire 3” anchor can from 3” be useddepths for jamb Double Rabbet thru 14-3/4”. Double Rabbet depthsthru from14-3/4”. 3” Double Rabbet thru 14-3/4”. The taper head anchorbolt is locked into position with the sleeve of the anchor bolt fitting into the soffit area around the dimple. Single Rabbet Single Rabbet Single Rabbet Elevations Wood or Steel Stud Anchor Lock anchor into place as shown. Locate anchors at the top of each hinge reinforcement and the corresponding locations of the strike side. Frame anchors are used to support the frame between rabbet and wall, as well as to guide or support the anchor bolt. Typical anchors used are twist-in butterfly or weld-in hat or weld-in tube and strap anchors. Notes: 1. Steel Stud Wood Stud Steel Stud Wood Stud Steel Stud Wood Stud Tornado 2. Wall anchors are in accordance with the Specification Sheets applicable to the frame series used. Specialty 3. Base (for vertical members) and Sill Anchors (for members along the floor), must be fastened to the floor with expansion shell, or rawl plugs and machine screws (ramsetting, shells, plugs and ram setting is by others). Adjust frame so the head is level, vertical members are plumb, and tighten the adjustable base anchors. Hurricane Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The AHJ is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. Lights and Louvers Single rabbet installation similar. Doors Wire Anchor - Masonry Wall Existing Masonry Wall Anchor Existing wallAnchor anchor Existing masonry Masonry Wall Existing Masonry Wall Anchor Frame is dimpled for a 3/8" - 16 flat head Variations Wire Anchor - Masonry Wall Wire anchor - masonry wall- Masonry Wall Wire Anchor Frames Jamb anchor applications Variations Installation details Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 189 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Jamb Base Anchor Elevations • Installation details Jamb Base Anchor Mullion Base Anchor Sheet Metal Screws Sheet Metal Screws Mullion Base Anchor Sheet Metal Screws Doors Screws Variations JambAnchor Base Anchor Jamb Base 1/2” Tornado Hurricane Specialty Sheet Metal Sheet Metal Screws Screws Base Anchor MullionMullion Base Anchor 1/2” Spot or tack weld the attaching plate to and flush with the bottom of the jamb. Attach the adjustable base anchor to the attaching plate with sheet metal screws supplied with the anchor. The anchor is fastened to the floor with expansion shields or rawl plugs and machine screws or by Ram-setting (shields, Sillsetting Section Anchor plugs and ram byBase others). Adjust frame so head is level and tighten the adjustable base anchor screws. Sill Section Base Anchor Base anchors are attached to the floor at the locations required for the mullion. Be sure anchors are located at the exact locations of the vertical mullions. The frame is raised above the anchor and then lowered down on to the floor over the anchor. Corner Post Anchor (2 and 3 Way Posts) Fastening procedure same as mullion base anchor. Corner Post Anchor (2 and 3 Way Posts) Fastening procedure same as mullion base anchor. Sill Section Base Anchor Sill Section Base Anchor Post Anchor andPosts) 3 Way Posts) Corner Corner Post Anchor (2 and (2 3 Way Mullion base anchors Fastening procedure Fastening procedure same assame as base anchor. mullion mullion base anchor. Mullion base anchors Anchor dim. Space equal to jamb depth minus 1/8” Anchors are recommended for sills that exceed 5' 0" in length. Attach the anchor to the floor following directions shown for mullion base anchors. Notes: 1. Space equal to jamb depth minus 1/8” Space equal to jamb Space equal to jamb depth minus 1/8” depth minus 1/8” Mullion base Mullion base Anchor dim. anchors anchors Anchor dim. Anchor dim. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The AHJ is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors. 2. Wall anchors are in accordance with the Specification Sheets applicable to the frame series used. 3. Base (for vertical members) and Sill Anchors (for members along the floor), must be fastened to the floor with expansion shell, or rawl plugs and machine screws (ram-setting, shells, plugs and ram setting is by others). Adjust frame so the head is level, vertical members are plumb, and tighten the adjustable base anchors. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 1/2” Sheet Metal Sheet Metal Screws Screws 1/2” Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Frames Sheet Metal Base anchor applications 190 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Hurricane resistant openings General test Information.........................................................192 Storm Resistance H and HE Series............................................192 Approvals and Geographic applications..................................192 Sizes and performance....................................................................192 Usage and application.....................................................................192 Material Selection:.............................................................................192 Installation.............................................................................................192 Lights and Louvers H16 and H14 Series flush doors............................................193 Elevations About the product..............................................................................193 Approvals, design pressure ratings and hardware configurations.......................................................................................193 Features and benefits.......................................................................193 Specification compliance...............................................................193 Florida building code label.............................................................193 Fire ratings..............................................................................................193 Cores........................................................................................................ 194 Standard hardware preparations................................................195 Product Selection...............................................................................195 Door edge construction.................................................................. 196 Glass light options............................................................................. 196 HE16 Series embossed doors................................................ 197 Tornado Hurricane About the product.............................................................................. 197 Design pressure ratings and hardware configurations...... 197 Features and benefits....................................................................... 197 Specification compliance............................................................... 197 Florida building code label............................................................. 197 Fire ratings.............................................................................................. 197 Cores........................................................................................................ 198 Standard hardware preparations............................................... 199 Product Selection.............................................................................. 199 Door edge construction (H, HF, HE, HEF)............................... 199 Specialty Approvals...................................................................................... 200 Hardware Using the Steelcraft Hurricane Lookup Tool to filter and link to product approvals ..................................................................... 200 Direct links to Approved product listings on certified agency 200 Impact Systems (typically Coastal to combat wind-borne debris) .................................................................................................. 200 Non-Impact Systems (typically Inland to combat less severe hurricane winds/pressures) ......................................... 200 Fire Rated Products Performance • 191 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Hurricane resistant openings • General test Information General test Information Steelcraft doors and frames are designed for virtually all construction requirements in commercial building applications. Their construction, durability and flexibility have been proven in both operation and physical testing of all types. Tornado Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Storm Resistance H and HE Series The Hurricane (H and HE Series) exterior doors are suitable for installation in all types of building construction, but are specifically designed to resist cyclic and static wind pressures, and windborne debris impact loads, as prescribed by the Florida Building Code. The continuously bonded cores and full height mechanically interlocked edge seams provide attractive, flat and very durable doors to the commercial construction industry. Many options are available in this product series including edge construction, core variations and finishes. Approvals and Geographic applications Usage and application For up to date online Approvals and instructions to access along with our Hurricane lookup tool, go to Steelcraft.com Hurricane section or "Approvals" on page 200. To help simplify the use, selection and specification of Steelcraft storm resistant door products, the following guidelines for base material selection can be used: The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. Material Gauge: the following base material thickness values were taken from the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication for gauge number and equivalent thickness and describe the sheet steel products available from Steelcraft: Steelcraft has conducted extensive testing on various product configurations to meet the severe storm applications related to coastal areas ex posed to the ravages of extreme high windstorm systems. Inland and Coastal storm regions are designated by FEMA and local codes. Products and approvals fall into the following categories: • Specialty • Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware • Inland Regions with less severe exposure to windstorm damage. Tests and approvals are based on structural uniform load methods. Several standard frame and door constructions have been successfully tested to meet the requirements for Inland Regions. Wind-Borne Debris (Coastal) Regions with severe exposure to storm damage. Tests and approvals are based on the Florida Building Code Test Protocols for High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203. Steelcraft H Series door constructions have been tested and meet the requirements for Coastal Regions. Enhanced Hurricane Protection Area (EHPA): Per FBC section 453.25, found in educational facilities, constructed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (SREF) and Florida Building Code. EHPA requirements include resistance to higher windload pressures and windborne debris impacts. • Steelcraft H Series door assemblies have been tested and meet the requirements for EHPA. • Refer to the Hurricane Resistant Approval pages of this manual for applicable products. Sizes and performance • H and HE Series doors: 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] for Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications having the potential of very high use. • H Series doors: 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] for Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with extremely high use. Material Selection: • Galvannealed Steel: conforming to ASTM A924 and ASTM A653 is standard on all H and HE Series doors. Installation Installation of all Steelcraft frames and doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Installation of all H, HE (embossed), and TH (temp rise) Series doors must conform to corresponding Miami-Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA), the Florida Building Code (FBC) statewide approval, and/or the Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) approvals, as required by your local AHJ. All Fire Rated doors must be installed in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80 (NFPA 80), and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. See page 205 under "Design pressure ratings and hardware configurations" for online resource links to the most current approvals. All doors and frames are manufactured and supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as published in ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Special size products are available to meet the unique construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those requirements. 192 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Hurricane resistant openings • H16 and H14 Series flush doors • Welded Edge Seam (optional add to standard): intermittently welded using 1" long welds, then seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Option available on L18, L16 and L14 doors. Specifiable options include glass lights, transom and sidelights, louvers, exit hardware, cylindrical or mortise single point locks, as well as a variety of door core and edge construction options. For up to date online Approvals and instructions to access along with our Hurricane lookup tool, go to Steelcraft.com Hurricane section or "Approvals" on page 200. Features and benefits Steelcraft's H Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: 2. Core Systems that enhance structural integrity: Honeycomb (Standard): 1" (25 mm) cell kraft honeycomb configuration that increases structural integrity while reducing overall weight • • • • Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal performance Polyurethane (optional): extreme thermal performance Mineral Board (optional): rigid, temperature rise control Steel Stiffened (optional): welded hat section stiffeners 11. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specification compliance 1. Door construction for Steelcraft H Series full flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. 3. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203. 4. Non-impact FBC test protocols ASTM E330 or TAS 202 Florida building code label A Florida Building Code Label is applied to all H Series doors. Optional Miami-Dade County and Texas Department of Insurance labels are also available. Fire ratings Steelcraft H Series doors meet fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard UL-10C. • 193 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Performance • 10. Screwed-in top caps provide additional weather protection to exclude water and debris from exterior outswing doors. Fire Rated Products A-60 Galvannealed steel face sheets 9. Recessed Dezigner™ Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and flush finish with the door surface. Hardware The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. 8. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. Specialty Design Pressure Ratings are based on ongoing testing for door, frame and hardware configurations. Applications are limited to the configurations tested. 7. 3/8" undercut is standard on all H Series doors, to accommodate hurricane code requirements, typically using a 1/2" bumper threshold. Tornado Approvals, design pressure ratings and hardware configurations 6. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Hurricane All H Series doors have been tested to protocols TAS 201, 202 and 203, indicating their ability to withstand the missile impact, structural load and cyclic wind pressure tests prescribed by the Codes. 5. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. Elevations The H16 and H14 Series doors have been specifically designed and tested to meet the performance-based provisions of the Florida Building Code (FBC) while providing architects, designers and building owners with the broadest choices for their specific applications. Lights and Louvers Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts and as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. Doors • Variations Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges 4. Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures structural stability and locking hardware functionality under extreme pressure conditions. About the product 1. • Frames 3. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: Variations H16 and H14 Series flush doors General Information Home Hurricane resistant openings • H16 and H14 Series flush doors Frames Variations Doors Rigid Honeycomb Core Standard H Series Core • 1" (25 mm) cell, 99 pound Kraft honeycomb Optional Polystyrene Core • 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density slab • Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive • • Phenol formaldehyde free • Labeled applications Optional Polyurethane Core 1.8 pound (816.5g) per ft3 density slab • Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond Tornado • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive • Non-Labeled applications Optional Steel Stiffened Core • Stiffeners welded to inside of face sheets • • • Located 6" (152.4 mm) on center Weld spacing 6" (152 mm) maximum along the full height of each stiffener Areas between stiffeners filled with 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density fiberglass batt Optional Mineral Fiber Board Core • TH Series 250°F (121°C) or 450°F (232°C) Temperature Rise Hurricane door Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Cores STANDARD Rigid 14 gauge End Channel Construction • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels STANDARD Edge Construction • Beveled hinge & lock edges • Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive • • Visible edge seam standard • • Seamless edge optional Projection welded to both face sheets For optional caps, see "Weather seals" on page 151 Door Application and Usage Series Steel Thickness Opening Usage Frequency H16 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Extra Heavy Duty Extra Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with potential of very high use H14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Exterior: Galvannealed Steel Maximum Duty Extra Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with extremely high use 194 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/16/20 Home General Information Hurricane resistant openings • H16 and H14 Series flush doors Standard hardware preparations The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8" (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. • Optional reinforcements for surface closers are available. Ina Pre Elevations • Lights and Louvers Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" (127 mm) x .146" (3.7 mm) standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges is also available. Doors 61L Optional Optional Lock Preparation 14 14Gauge GaugeCloser Closer Optional Gauge Closer Optional 14 gauge14closer Reinforcement Reinforcement Reinforcement reinforcement Variations Universal Inactive Inactive Mortise Leaf: Leaf:ASA Hinge ASAStrike Strike Prep Inactive Leaf:strike ASA Strike Inactive leaf: ASA Preparation Preparation Preparation preparation Frames 61L 61LLock LockPreparation Preparation 61L Lock Preparation 6IL lock preparation Variations Universal UniversalMortise MortiseHinge HingePrep Prep Universalmortise Mortisehinge Hinge Prep Universal prep Product Selection ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Level Model Description Maximum Sizes Edge Construction Single Pair Tornado Series Hurricane Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Steelcraft product selection for H Series doors has been matched to SDI designations for Level and Model. Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. Recommended Gauge of Frame Level 3 - Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional 1 3 HW16 2 Full Flush Seamless Visible Filled Welded 4' 0" x 8' 0" 1219 mm x 2438 mm 8' 0" x 8' 0" 2438 mm x 2438 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Specialty H16 HF16 Level 4 - Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional H14 HW14 1 4 2 Full Flush Seamless Visible Filled Welded 4' 0" x 8' 0" 1219 mm x 2438 mm 8' 0" x 8' 0" 2438 mm x 2438 mm 12 Gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)] 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Code Compliance • Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203. A mylar Florida Building Code label is included as standard Optional mylar Miami-Dade County label Fire Rated Products • • Hardware HF14 Performance • 195 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hurricane resistant openings • H16 and H14 Series flush doors Frames Doors Optional Edge Seams available in the H Series doors: • H: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges. • • HF: The mechanical edge seam is filled and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. HW: The mechanical edge seam is welded and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. Standard visible edge seam Optional seamless edge H Series Visible Seam Features Full height mechanical interlock • • • • HF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is tack welded above and below edge cutouts and as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Door edge construction • Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam HW Series Seam Welded Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is intermittently welded using 1" long welds Tornado Hurricane Elevations • Specialty • No visible edge seam (Refer to the Lights section for further details and options) 1-1/4" (32 mm) Dezigner® Trim • Standard 1-1/4" for 1/2"3/4" Thick Glass (19 mm) Optional(32 formm) 1/4" Thick Glass 1-1/4" 1-1/4" (32(32 mm) mm) 5/8" 3/4" mm) (19(16 mm) 3/4" 3/4" (19 (19 mm) mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 5/8" 5/8" (16 (16 mm) mm) Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. 1-1/4" (32 mm) Note: Glazing type Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per job requirements. vary per job require Note: Note: Glazing Glazing type type and and thickness thickness vary vary perper jobjob requirements. requirements. 3/4" (19 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) Typical Optional Overlapping Varies Steel Trim for Glass Over 1/4" to 5/8" or 3/4" to 1" Thick *Exposed Varies Glass Fire Rated Products Hardware Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth Glass light options • Varies Note: 1. Glazing material and methods of glazing are subject to approval by applicable authorities and may change without notice. Refer to the applicable product approvals. 2. Doors used in elevations must use 1/2" or 9/16" glass only per Glass Cutting Size Varies Varies listed approvals. *Exposed Door Cutout Size *Exposed Glass 3. Confirm availability of approved glass with glass Glass Divider Muntins Are Not Available *Exposed *Exposed Glass Cutting Size manufacturer prior to placing door orders. Glass Cutting Size Glass Glass Door Cutout Size Door Cutout Size Glass Glass Cutting Cutting SizeSize Divider Muntins Are Not Available Divider Are Not Available DividerMuntins Muntins Are Not Door Door Cutout Cutout SizeAvailable Size Performance Architectural • Divider Divider Muntins Muntins AreAre NotNot Available Available 196 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Hurricane resistant openings • HE16 Series embossed doors Features and benefits Steelcraft's HE16 Series doors offer the following standard unique features, which enhance long term performance and durability: A-40 Galvannealed Steel face sheets. 2. Polystyrene Core (Standard): enhances the structural integrity of the door with enhanced thermal capabilities 3. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges provide structural support and stability the full height of the door edges. Available edge options: • Filled Edge Seam (optional add to standard): seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Includes tack welds above and below edge cutouts for and as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. • Welded Edge Seam (optional add to standard): intermittently welded using 1" long welds, then seam filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth. Option available on L18, L16 and L14 doors. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. 3. Door construction for the HE16 Series embossed panel doors meets ANSI A117.1-1998 (ADA) requirements for minimum 10" (254 mm) bottom rail height measured from the floor. 4. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203. 5. Non-impact FBC test protocols ASTM E330 or TAS 202. Florida building code label A Florida Building Code Label is applied to all H Series doors. An optional Miami-Dade County label is also available. Fire ratings Steelcraft HE16 Series doors meet fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard UL-10C. Performance Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled mechanical Interlocked edges Door construction for Steelcraft HE16 Series embossed panel doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Fire Rated Products • 1. 4. Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures structural stability and locking hardware functionality under extreme pressure conditions. • 197 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Hardware 1. Specification compliance Specialty The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. 10. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Tornado For up to date online Approvals and instructions to access along with our Hurricane lookup tool, go to Steelcraft.com Hurricane section or "Approvals" on page 200. 9. Screwed-in top caps provide additional weather protection to exclude water and debris from exterior outswing doors. Hurricane Design Pressure Ratings are based on ongoing testing for door, frame and hardware configurations. Applications are limited to the configurations tested. 8. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. Elevations Design pressure ratings and hardware configurations 7. 3/8" undercut is standard on all H Series doors, to accommodate hurricane code requirements, typically using a 1/2" bumper threshold. Lights and Louvers All HE16 Series doors have been tested to protocols TAS 201, 202 and 203, indicating their ability to withstand the missile impact, structural load and cyclic wind pressure tests prescribed by the Codes. 6. 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide stability and protection for the top and bottom edges from abuse. Doors Specifiable options to meet application, specification and performance requirements include mechanical and electrical hardware preparations for exit hardware, cylindrical or mortise single point locks and double locks. No glass lights are allowable. 5. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (54.7 mm) hinges. Variations The HE16 Series embossed panel doors have been specifically designed and tested to meet the performance-based provisions of the Florida Building Code (FBC) while providing architects, designers and building owners with the broadest choices for their specific applications. Frames About the product Variations HE16 Series embossed doors General Information Home Hurricane resistant openings • HE16 Series embossed doors Frames Doors Insulated Core • 1 pound (453.6 g) per ft3 density slab • • Preferred for extreme temperature variations • Projection welded to both face sheets • Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive • • Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers achieving ultimate bond For optional caps, see ""Weather seals" on page 151 Standard Rigid 14 gauge End Channel Construction 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels Standard Edge Construction Beveled hinge & lock edges • • • • Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam standard Seamless edge optional Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Cores Door Application and Usage Series 16 Ga (1.3 mm) Opening Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Usage Frequency Extra Heavy Duty Extra Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with potential of very high use Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware HE16 Steel Thickness 198 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 Home General Information Hurricane resistant openings • HE16 Series embossed doors Standard hardware preparations • Optional mylar Miami-Dade County label Tornado A mylar Florida Building Code label is included as standard Product Selection Hurricane Optional reinforcements for surface closers are available. • Elevations • Code Compliance Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203. • Lights and Louvers The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8" (124 mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation. Closer Reinforcement Closer Reinforcement Closer Closer Reinforcement Reinforcement SDI Conversion Chart Steelcraft product selection for HE Series doors has been matched to SDI designations for Level and Model. Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening. Doors • and Astragal and Astragal and and Astragal Astragal Optional 14 Gauge Optional 14Gauge Gauge Optional 14 Gauge [0.067" Optional Optional 14 14 Gauge [0.067” (1.7mm)] [0.067” (1.7mm)] (1.7 mm)] Closer Reinforcement [0.067” [0.067” (1.7mm)] (1.7mm)] Variations Standard: mortised and reinforced for • Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x .180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5" (127 mm) x .146" (3.7 mm) standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x .190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges is also available. Inactive Leaf: Inactive Leaf: Inactive Leaf: ASA Strike Inactive Inactive Leaf: Leaf: ASA Strike Preparation ASA Strike Preparation ASA ASA Strike Strike Preparation Preparation Preparation and Astragal Frames 61L Lock Preparation 61L Lock Preparation 61L Lock Preparation 61L 61L Lock Lock Preparation Preparation Variations Standard Mortise Hinge Prep4 Standard Mortise Hinge Prep Standard Mortise Hinge Prep Standard Standard Mortise Mortise Hinge Hinge Prep Prep 4-1/2” x .134” or 4-1/2 x .180” 4-1/2” .134” or4-1/2 4-1/2 .180” 1/2" .134" or 4 1/2" .180" 4-1/2” 4-1/2” xxx.134” .134” or or 4-1/2 xxxx.180” .180” Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Level Model Description Maximum Sizes Edge Construction Single Pair Recommended Gauge of Frame Level 3 - Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional HE16 HEF16 3 1 Full Flush Visible 3'0" x 8'0" 6'0" x 8'0" 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] 2 Seamless Filled 914 mm x 2438 mm 1829 mm x 2438 mm 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Hardware Door edge construction (H, HF, HE, HEF) Optional Edge Seams available in the HE Series doors: • HE: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges. • HEF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer. Optional seamless edge HE Series Visible Seam Features Full height mechanical interlock • • • • Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive Visible edge seam Fire Rated Products Standard visible edge seam HEF Series Seam Filled Features Standard Visible Edge Seam is tack welded above and below edge cutouts and as required for doors over 7'2" rated over 20 min. Edge Seam is then filled with structural adhesive and dressed smooth • No visible edge seam • 199 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/13/16 • Technical data manual • Performance • Specialty ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Series Frames Variations Doors Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home Hurricane resistant openings • Approvals Approvals Using the Steelcraft Hurricane Lookup Tool to filter and link to product approvals Steelcraft provides a Hurricane Lookup Tool in excel format to filter key criteria and to identify the correct approval/install instructions from certified listing agencies. Access this tool by following instructions and links on Steelcraft.com Hurricane section. The Hurricane Lookup Tool is managed by Allegion Steelcraft engineering and compliance, and our certified third-party PE. Verify that you have the latest version of the lookup tool, approvals/install instructions, tech data and price books before ordering and installing. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. While we have tried to maintain accuracy in product literature and tools, Allegion is not responsible for errors and omissions, and is not responsible for verifying that the correct products for your opening are ordered or installed correctly in the field. This is the responsibility of the contractor and their architects and engineers. Approved product includes specific minimum requirements including but not limited to design pressure, gauge, min jamb depth (5-3/4), max opening size, and anchoring. In determining the proper listings for ordering product from Steelcraft and Allegion hardware, the Design Pressure Rating required by your openings must be provided by a qualified architect or engineer because of the complex variables and individual requirements of your building based on its geographic location and specific design characteristics to assure compliance with building code and proper resistance to hurricanes. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. Direct links to Approved product listings on certified agency The Hurricane Lookup Tool includes links and instructions to access certified agency approvals on their websites. Also found at Steelcraft.com Hurricane section, and referenced below. • Florida Building Code (FBC) – Select link, input FL # or select Product Manufacturer in dropdown menu as “Allegion-Schlage Lock Company, LLC” > Search • Miami-Dade – Select link, or go to Product Control Search. Input File # or select Applicant in dropdown menu as “Schlage Lock Company LLC > Go • Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) - See Steelcraft Hurricane Lookup Tool for correct Report Number on links below • • TDI Impact – Select “Steelcraft Mfg. Co., Schlage Lock Co.” TDI Non-impact – Select “Steelcraft Mfg. Co., Schlage Lock Co.” IMPORTANT: Not all items in approvals are active offerings. Please reference the Hurricane Lookup tool, this tech data, and the Steelcraft Price Book, or contact Product Tech Support [LINK TO Page iV] Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Impact Systems (typically Coastal to combat wind-borne debris) • Openings are tested to High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) Protocols (TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203), per FBC Section 1626.2, Large missile impact tests. See listings for full list of testing protocols. • Risk category and type of building determines requirements for missile impact speed, per FBC table 1604.5 Risk Categories. Missile levels published in ASTM E1996 • • • • • Level D (50 F/S 34 MPH) for standard large missile impact Level E (80 F/S 54.5 MPH) for Risk Cat IV for Essential facility buildings or structures Openings are listed with Steelcraft Doors and Frames in assembly approvals using Allegion Hardware. Available Door Series: H, HE (embossed), and TH (temp rise) Available Frame Series: F / MU Non-Impact Systems (typically Inland to combat less severe hurricane winds/pressures) Openings are tested to E330 pressure-only testing. While impact systems are the best choice for any hurricane opening to protect your building for current and future requirements bot impact (coastal) and non-impact (inland), openings tested only to non-impact conditions may be used where there is no current or future risk of damage from flying debris or requirements thereto. See listings for full list of testing protocols. • Any product tested to impact criteria includes TAS202 and so may be used in an E330 specifications; both are static pressure tests, but TAS202 is more stringent, held for 30 seconds vs 10 seconds with the E330 test. • Available Door Series: L (standard double bevel door) / B (stiffened) / T (temp rise) / SL (square edged L-doors) / SZ (Falcon square edge doors) / CE (panel doors) • Available Frame Series: F / MU 200 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/16/20 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Tornado resistant openings PW Series doors.........................................................................203 Lights and Louvers About the product.............................................................................203 System features and benefits......................................................203 Specification compliance..............................................................203 Fire ratings.............................................................................................203 Standard construction................................................................... 204 Standard hardware preparations (ICC500-2014 and FEMA 361/320 compliant)........................................................................ 205 Meeting edge details for pairs of doors.................................. 206 Glass light options............................................................................. 207 Paladin handing................................................................................ 208 Shutter handing and options with required Schlage LM9300 Multi-point Lock............................................................. 208 FP14 Series flush frames....................................................... 209 Elevations About the product............................................................................ 209 Features and benefits..................................................................... 209 Specification compliance............................................................. 209 Fire ratings............................................................................................ 209 Approvals........................................................................................ 212 Openings with Von Duprin® and Schlage® hardware ....... 212 ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering..............................................................................214 Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 201 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • General information The Paladin™ Series door systems are specifically designed and tested to conform to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 320 and 361 guidelines and ANSI ICC500 standards providing security and safety for tornado shelters and severe storm areas of refuge. The PW14 Paladin™ Series doors include unique internal steel stiffeners which are welded to the face sheets. The full height mechanically interlocked edge seams and rigid end closures are welded and provide attractive and very durable doors. The FP14 Paladin™ Series frames are designed for installation in either interior or exterior locations as a part of the wall framing process. Three sided steel frames are furnished in three pieces (two jambs and a head) which are anchored to the wall systems. Approvals For up to date online Approvals, Installation instructions, and our Anchor lookup tool, go to links on Steelcraft.com Paladin section. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. Paladin™ Systems offer a range of hardware applications based on ongoing testing for door, frame and hardware configurations. Applications are limited to the configurations tested. How are frames supplied The connecting corners of the 3-piece frame include precision factory die miters and interlocking tabs and corner clips. The corner miters are specially designed to insure a tight closed corner connection when installed properly. There are two methods of furnishing 3-sided frames to the jobsite: Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty • • Knock Down (KD): Frames are supplied in 3 pieces for assembly prior to installation at the jobsite by the installing contractor. Set-Up and Welded (SUA): Prior to arriving at the jobsite, the 3-sided frame (with factory miters) is assembled (at the distributor's fabrication location, or by Steelcraft). The miters are welded (in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 [SDI 100]), finished and supplied to the jobsite ready for installation. SUA frames are shipped to the jobsite with temporary shipping bars attached. Performance 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] for Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications with extremely high use. Material Selection: in addition to the thickness of base material, the following base material types of metal are available from Steelcraft: • Galvannealed Steel: conforming to ASTM A924 and ASTM A653 recommended for exterior opening or interior openings with high humidity. Installation Proper installation is very important in providing reliable doors and frames for life-safety. 1. Installers of Paladin products should be experienced and capable. See available installation instructions as needed. Standards and ICC500-2014 must be followed in this life safety product. 2. The following industry standards should be referenced and followed: Installation of all Steelcraft frames and doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. Installation of Paladin™ Systems must conform to corresponding Intertek opening requirements, in compliance with FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500-2014. All Fire Rated doors must be installed in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80 (NFPA 80), and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3. Follow general instructions and videos in collaborative efforts from Steelcraft and SDI (for all Steel door and frame applications, not specific to Paladin). Frames: PDF of steps with images: "Steel Door Frame Installation in Masonry" www.steeldoor.org/pdf/ steeldoorinstallationinmasonryconstruction.pdf Installaton video: www.steeldoor.org/videos.php#videos. Select "How to Install Frames in Masonry Construction" Doors: Door installation videos: www.steeldoor.org/videos. php#videos. Select "How to Install a Steel Door" • Sizes and performance All doors and frames are manufactured and supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as published in ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Special size products are available to meet the unique construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those requirements. Usage and application Architectural • To help simplify the use, selection and specification of Steelcraft Storm Resistance door and frame products, the following guidelines for base material selection can be used: Note in addition to checking for fire labels as stated in this video, check also for ICC500-2014 / FEMA 361/320 labels on doors and frames. Troubleshooting: Troubleshooting videos: www.steeldoor.org/videos. php#videos. See Troubleshooting Videos section 4. For installation of hardware and accessories, follow applicable installation instructions from the manufacturer. See "ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering" on page 214 for online resource links to the most current approvals. Material Gauge: the following base material thickness values were taken from the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication for gauge number and equivalent thickness and describe the sheet steel products available from Steelcraft: 202 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/18 Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Von Duprin WS98/9927 & WS98/9957: 1/8" The manufacturer's strike must be used, cannot be unduly modified, and must be anchored/grouted into the slab to maintain the structural path of the opening. • Hardware and concrete guidance above are Steelcraft recommendations only. Hardware and industry specific building standards must be followed and should take precedence, although any differences in recommendations should be investigated and understood. About the product The Paladin™ PW14 Series doors and FP14 Frames have been specifically designed, tested and approved to withstand extreme wind-load and flying missile impact. Unique engineered designs combined with the durability of superior corrosive resistant steel make Steelcraft PW14 Paladin™ Series Flush doors an excellent solution for added building protection from severe weather. Specifiable options to meet application, specification and performance requirements include mechanical and electrical hardware preparations for exit hardware. System features and benefits 3. Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures structural stability under extreme pressure conditions. 4. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) hinges to heavy weight .180" (54.7 mm) hinges. 1. Door construction for Steelcraft PW14 Paladin™ Series Flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. ICC500-2014 / FEMA COMPLIANCE LABEL Factory Label from Intertek (ITS/WHI) is applied to all PW14 Paladin™ Series Flush doors and FP14 Frame System. Fire ratings Steelcraft PW14 Paladin™ Series Flush doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed and labeled by Intertek (ITS/WHI). Installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard UL-10C. Paladin Flush doors and frames can be fire rated up to and including 3 hours. Paladin Glass Light doors and frames can be fire rated up to and including 1 1/2 hours. Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • • 203 Architectural 6. Custom Undercuts. 3/4" maximum allowable undercut to finished floor is provided standard to allow for a typical 1/2" ADA saddle threshold. Specify your undercut needs based on latching hardware, finished floor, threshold and whether your strike sits flush. Specification compliance Performance 5. 14 Gauge (0.067") Inverted Top and Bottom Channels with additional 12 Gauge (0.105") flush channel top cap. 9. Standard A-60 Galvannealed Steel face sheets for superior corrosion resistance on exterior openings Fire Rated Products 2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges at lock and hinge edges with edge seams welded, filled and dressed smooth provide structural support and stability the full height of the door. 8. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Hardware DOOR: PW14 Paladin™ Series Flush Door: 1. Steel Stiffened core construction with stiffeners welded to one face sheet and attached with epoxy to the opposite face sheet. 7. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding and sticking. Specialty The PW14 Paladin™ Door and FP14 Frame System has been designed and tested to address the requirements of FEMA 361/320 guidelines and ANSI ICC500-2014 standards to protect the general public from the extreme effects of tornados. For compliance with the standards, the PW14 Paladin™ Door and FP14 Frame must be supplied as a system. Tornado For thresholds, cut a hole for the strike plate (LM) to sit flush with top of threshold (ADA), or cup strike lip (WS) to sit on or flush (ADA) with top of threshold. Cut slab 1" min below and 3/4" around the strike perimeter, then with threshold in place, grout full in the strike area, and embed the cup strike (WS) into the grout in the hole cut in the threshold, or anchor the strike plate (LM) after set. Note in using rabbetted, or bumper, thresholds with the WS, the bottom latch housing is mounted higher on door. Hurricane • Elevations For finished floors, strikes should sit on the finished floor and be anchored (LM) and/or grouted (WS) into the concrete slab securely. Lights and Louvers • Doors Schlage LM9300: 1/8" min, 1/4" max Variations • • Frames Hardware installation instructions must be followed. Use the instructions that came with the product or search online at Steelcraft.com Paladin section. Required distance from bottom of door to top of strike (for rabetted, or bumper, thresholds on WS, bottom of latch housing to top of strike): Variations PW Series doors General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Doors Variations Lights and Louvers Elevations Welded to inverted 14 gauge [0.067” (1.7 mm)] Door Top Channel Steel stiffener Lock-side reinforcement channel 12 gauge [0.093" (2.3 mm)] Standard PW14 Paladin™ series core • Galvannealed Steel Stiffeners welded to one face sheet and attached with epoxy adhesive to the opposite face sheet • 1 pound density insulation inserted between the steel stiffeners • 12 Gauge (0.105") reinforcement channel at the lock edge Standard Rigid End Channel Construction • 14 gauge inverted galvannealed top and bottom channels • Top channel includes an additional 12 Gauge (0.105") top channel. Standard Premium Edge Construction Beveled hinge and lock edges Tornado Hurricane Standard 12 gauge [0.093” (2.3 mm)] Galvannealed Top Channel Polystyrene batting Variations Frames Standard construction • • • Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive • Lock edge with 12 Gauge (0.105") channel Mechanical edge seam is welded and dressed smooth prior to applying the factory primer. No options Series Steel Thickness PW14 14 Ga (1.7 mm) Opening Interior - Galvannealed Steel Exterior - Galvannealed Steel Usage Frequency Maximum Duty Tornado resistance in accordance with FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500-2014 standards Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Door Application and Usage 204 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Standard hardware preparations (ICC500-2014 and FEMA 361/320 compliant) • High frequency hinge prep is also available and is required with auto operators. For reinforcement requirements for automatic operators, see "High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series" on page 79. Closer reinforcement 12 ga. lock side reinforcement channel 7 ga. hinge reinforcement for butt hinges or continuous hinge The 12 gauge lock side reinforcement shown beside the center hinge prep supports the panic bar on a WS device. WS98/9927/9957 Prep for Von Duprin Windstorm devices: 2-point WS98/9927(F) • 3-point WS98/9957(F) Panic bar reinforcement Steel stiffened core Elevations • Lights and Louvers • 1/4" 14 ga. bottom channel Tornado WS-LGO Bottom Latch Guard butt hinges (3-4 based on height) or continuous hinge Hurricane The 12 gauge lock side reinforcement provides support for installing the WS device with surface vertical rods. Bottom latch housing mounts into standard 12 ga lock side channel reinforcement. Doors Optional preps for 5" (127 mm) x 0.146" (3.7 mm) standard weight hinges or for 5" (127 mm) x 0.190" (4.8 mm) heavy weight hinges. Variations • Frames 12 ga. top channel assembly Variations Universal mortise hinge prep Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) x 0.134" (3.3 mm) standard weight hinges to 4 1/2" (114 mm) x 0.180" (4.7 mm) heavy weight hinges. See Figure 11.1: PW-Series hardware preparations for reinforcement locations. WS-LGO Bottom Latch Guard for ADA compliance For 3' doors, 33 1/8" • CVR (concealed vertical rod) assembly is installed at the factory • Center latch is shown with 8" high cutout for astragal prep. Typical prep is 4 7/8" ASA prep. See "Hardware preparations" on page 227. • See Figure 11.1: PW-Series hardware preparations for reinforcement locations. 12" • Bottom latch housing Performance Inactive leaf ASA strike prep with astragal attached Mounting tabs for ASA 4 7/8” mortise strikes are attached to door edge for direct mounting. Astragals cut-out only for flush mounting strike to door. No tabs attached to astragal. Astragals should not be used with panic devices. Gaps can be filled with Zero gaskets. Surface bolt reinforcement provided for inactive leaf. • 205 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Fire Rated Products WS-4 field cut for >3' - <4' doors, see Von Duprin install instructions LM9300 Prep for LM9300 MultiPoint (3-pt). Hardware For 4' doors, 45 1/8" Figure 11.1: PW-Series hardware preparations Specialty Note: Housing will be mounted higher on door for rabbetted threshold. See page 203, #6. Frames Doors Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Electrical Preps Options will be reviewed by engineering at the time of order and will not be available in OEW. The following options are available: Standard 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] with optional full width reinforcement 20" closer reinforcements are provided. • • • Full width surface closer Surface overhead holder/stop Surface Floor & Wall stops/holders Variations Variations General Information Home Typical Frame Preparation Junction Box 16 Gauge (2.5 mm) Reinforcements • Power transfer units (EPT2, EPT10) Inactive Leaf:Leaf: Inactive Lights and Louvers Universal Mortise Hinge PrepPrep Standard 14 Gaug Universal Mortise Hinge Standard 14 G Strike Preparation and Astragal ASA Strike Preparation and Astragal 4-1/2” (14mm) x .134” (3.3mm) [0.067” (1.7mm)] 4-1/2” (14mm) x .134” (3.3mm) ASA [0.067” (1.7m • Electric hinge or x .180” (4.7mm) or Optional Closer Reinforcem or x .180” (4.7mm) or Optional Closer Reinfo • Electric door closer utilizes the same preps shown in 5” (127mm) x .146” (3.7mm) 5” (127mm) x .146” (3.7mm) Inactive Leaf: Standard 14 Gauge "closers" or x .190” (4.8mm) or x .190” (4.8mm) ASA Strike Preparation and Astragal [0.067” (1.7mm)] • Magnetic hold opens utilize the same preps shown in Closer Reinforcement"closers." Must be outswing and must be located away Tornado Hurricane Elevations from hardware/rod locations to avoid interference. • Door position switch (round) must be mortised into edge or top of door • Magnetic switch (rectangle) must be mounted to exterior or storm side only • Auto operator allowed on exterior, or storm side, only and must use high frequency hinge reinforcement and 5" heavyweight hinges. • Raceways using ¾” conduit available. Meeting edge details for pairs of doors Specialty Hardware Hardware Backset Backset Inactive Leaf Leaf Inactive ActiveActive Leaf Leaf with ASA with Strike ASA Strike 3/32”3/32” (2.4mm) (2.4mm) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Inactive Leaf with ASA Strike Active Leaf Z Astragal Z for Astragal Not recommended pairs with panic bar exits Astragal Without Astragal Max gap 3/16”Without tested (NFPA 1/8”+1/16” tolerance), reference ICC500 306.3.6 9/64” (3.6mm) 3/16” (4.8mm) 9/64”9/64” (3.6mm) (3.6mm) 3/16”3/16” (4.8mm) (4.8mm) With astragal Without astragal Z Astragal Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions Series ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Edge Construction Minimum and Maximum Sizes Single Min Pair Max Min Max Recommended Gauge of Frame PW 3-sided flush PW 3-sided PV/PVF PW 3-sided PN-PNF PW 4-sided flush (shutters) Not Applicable Welded 3' 0" x 6' 8" 4' 0" x 8' 0" 6' 0" x 6' 8" 8' 0" x 8' 0" 914 x 2032 mm 1219 x 2438 mm 1829 x 2032 mm 2438 x 2438 mm 2' 8" x 4' 3" 4' 0" x 8' 0" 5' 4" x 4' 3" 8' 0" x 8' 0" 813 x 1295 mm 1219 x 2438 mm 1629 x 1295 mm 2438 x 2438 mm 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] NOTE: Review "ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering" on page 214 for approved hardware, notes and restrictions. 206 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/19/20 Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Glass light options Variations Doors • Frames See "Paladin glass lights" on page 164 for further details and options, including care and instructions concerning your glass lights before and after installation. Variations Fully installed from the factory Glass lights with trim included in PV and PN label Light designs without modification. Lights can be added to any Paladin door available in a 3-sided frame. Lights are not available in variable sizes or locations. Fire rated versions (PVF and PNF) are available up to 90 minutes. Narrow light is ADA compliant. Standard 1" Thick Glass. Fire rated glass is slightly, but not noticeably, thicker. Narrow light with Schlage LM9300 concealed rods lock and latch* 8 3/8" 4 1/8" visible Lights and Louvers 26 11/16" visible Elevations 43" from visible glass to finished floor Tornado light is centered horizontally Hurricane Vision light with Schlage LM9300 concealed rods lock and latch* Specialty 9 1/2" visible 9 1/2" visible Hardware 57 1/2" from visible glass to finished floor Fire Rated Products Also available with WS98/9927 2-pt Panic Exit and WS98/9957 3-pt Panic Exit (same size and location glass) • 207 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/23/17 • Technical data manual • Performance * General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • PW Series doors Frames Doors Correctly understanding handing in ordering and installing tornado products is critical to life safety. In referencing "Handing procedures diagrams" on page 11, use the following IMPORTANT rules when considering Tornado openings. • • • The Exterior, or Outside, is always the Storm side (the side of the door that faces a storm). Typically this is the Key Side, but not always (e.g. not typical, but if the shelter is the hallway and a connected classroom is outside of the shelter, the outside of your door would face the classroom since that is the side facing the outside, or storm side, of the shelter). The Interior, or Inside, is always the Safe side (the side on the inside of your shelter or safe room). Typically this is the non-Key Side, but not always (e.g. not typical, but if the shelter is the hallway and a connected classroom is outside of the shelter, the inside of your door would face the hall since that is the side facing the inside, or safe side, of the shelter). Note that PW doors may be inswing or outswing when using lever trim. But PW doors with panic exit hardware will always be outswing with the panic bar on the safe side and the door opening out towards the Outside, or Storm side. For glass light doors in 3-sided openings, use the following guide: Inside (safe side) Outside (storm side) Phillips screw heads Rivet heads (smooth) Glass flush Glass inset Protective film. Contact Steelcraft immediately for a charged replacement if damaged. Tornado Hurricane Shutter handing and options with required Schlage LM9300 Multi-point Lock Option 1 - most commonly ordered configuration. Glass with LM9325 Exit Lock OUTSIDE outside | inside INSIDE LH Specialty LM9300 Multi-point Lock Functions See Schlage L-Series Catalog, LM9300 Straight handed shutters - most orders INSIDE NO OUTSIDE PREP LM9325 Exit lock RH NO OUTSIDE PREP GLASS / GLAZING OUTSIDE GLASS / GLAZING LM9350 LMV9350 *Office and inner entry lock Option 2 - May add outside trim if no glass with LM9350, LM9370, LM9371, or LM9380 INSIDE INSIDE LH Hardware Regardless of PV or PN light, the Outside, or Storm side, is always signified by inset glass trim. The Inside, or Safe side of the door, is always signified by flat glass trim. Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Paladin handing RH OUTSIDE OUTSIDE LM9370 LMV9370 *Classroom lock Reverse handed shutters - uncommon Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Option 3- No glass with LM9325 Exit Lock INSIDE INSIDE OUTSIDE OUTSIDE RHR NO OUTSIDE PREP LHR NO OUTSIDE PREP LM9380 LMV9380 Storeroom lock Option 4- No glass with LM9350, LM9370, LM9371, or LM9380 INSIDE INSIDE OUTSIDE OUTSIDE RHR LHR Notes (shutter handing diagram) 1. Inside = Safe side; Outside = storm side 2. Lock options for Sectional indicator (locked) and Vandlgard (e.g. LMV9371) must be specified when ordering locks 208 • LM9371 LMV9371 *Classroom security lock • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/17/20 *Sectional indicator (locked) option available Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • FP14 Series flush frames Lights and Louvers 2. Die-mitered corner connections at the head and jamb. Standard corners insure attractive, tight and closed miters. 3. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. ICC500-2014 / FEMA COMPLIANCE LABEL The FP14 Paladin Series flush frames meet ICC500-2014 and FEMA 320/361 requirements. They are listed by Intertek (ITS/ WHI) as tested assemblies including doors, frames and hardware. See "Approvals" on page 212. Fire ratings Specification compliance 1. 2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. Paladin Flush doors and frames can be fire rated up to and including 3 hours. Paladin Glass Light doors and frames can be fire rated up to and including 1 1/2 hours. Specialty Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FP14 Paladin™ Series flush frames meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). Steelcraft FP14 Paladin Series Flush doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed and labeled by Intertek (ITS/WHI). Installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard UL-10C. Tornado 5. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Hurricane 4. Adjustable base anchors allow for installation adjustment when the floor is not level. Hardware and concrete recommendations from Steelcraft are only guidelines. Hardware and industry specific building standards must be followed and should take precedence, although any differences in recommendations should be investigated and understood. Elevations 14 Gauge A60 galvannealed steel for superior corrosion resistance supplied for interior and exterior openings. 1. Doors Features and benefits Steelcraft FP14 Paladin Series flush frames offer the following unique features which enhance long term functionality and durability: Variations The FP14 Paladin™ Series 3 Sided flush frames are designed to meet requirements of ICC500-2014 code, FEMA 361/320 guidelines, and ANSI compliance to protect the general public from the extreme effects of tornados. These frames are available in 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] only. They are installed in both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. These frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation or SUA (set-up and welded) for installation as a pre-welded unit. All FP14 Paladin™ Series frames include the ICC500-2014 / FEMA 361/320 Label. Frames About the product Variations FP14 Series flush frames Typical wall construction and anchoring types FP14 Steel Thickness 14 Gauge [0.067"" (1.7 mm)] Wall Construction Typical Wall Anchors in Jambs and Heads (and sills if 4-sided) New Masonry - CMU Block Masonry T jambs / Lintel wedge anchor system or EMAs in heads/sills** New Concrete Steel Embed Plates (by others) Existing Masonry - Concrete or CMU block* Bolts flush through dimples in soffit and Tube & Strap EMA anchors Steel plates (by others) bolted to concrete or CMU block wall, then frame welded to steel plates by others. T&S EMAs required per location. No dimple holes. Frame bolted or welded to steel structure. T&S EMAs required per location. No dimple holes when welded. Notes: Frames only require grouting in existing masonry wall construction 4" face heads. ** Adjustable base anchors are used in New Masonry; in all other wall constructions, the lowest jamb anchor serves as the base anchor. Performance * All anchors are included unless stating "by others." • 209 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Fire Rated Products Structural Steel Hardware Profile General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • FP14 Series flush frames Frames Doors 2" 2" (50 mm) (50 mm) Elevations 14 gauge strike reinforcement alt 12 gauge strike reinforcement HINGE Standard Double Rabbet Frame Equal *½" (13 mm) 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) Finished Opening Height Jamb Varies Depth Throat Opening STRIKE HINGE Tornado Hurricane 2" (50 mm) Finished Opening Width Standard 14 gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] closer reinforcement 9 ¾" (248 mm) Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Elevation 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 3' 4 5⁄16" (1024 mm) Equal *½" (13 mm) Hardware Specialty 5⁄8" (16 mm) HINGE 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Note: FP14 Paladin™ Series Frame are available as double rabbet only. Frame Sizing Options Jamb Depth Availability (Profile) Performance Fire Rated Products Minimum and Maximum Size Architectural Opening Width 2" (50 mm) Series FP14 3-sided FP 4-sided (shutters) Single Single Rabbet Pair Min Max Min Max 3' 0" x 6' 8" 914 x 2032 mm 4' 0" x 8' 0" 6' 0" x 6' 8" 8' 0" x 8' 0" 1219 x 2438 mm 1829 x 2032 mm 2438 x 2438 mm 2' 8" x 4' 3" 4' 0" x 8' 0" 5' 4" x 4' 3" 8' 0" x 8' 0" 813 x 1295 mm 1219 x 2438 mm 1629 x 1295 mm 2438 x 2438 mm Double Rabbet Min N/A Standard Profile Dimensions (Variations Available) Face Stop Standard Max 5 3/4" 10 3/4 2" 5/8" 1/2" * 146 mm 273 mm 51 mm 16 mm 13 mm n/a = not available * except 5 3/4" (146 mm) depth, which is 7/16" (11 mm) 210 • Returns Corners • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/16/20 DIE MITERED with four (4) concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • FP14 Series flush frames 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement 4 7⁄8" (124 mm) 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement Silencer Prepmm) Optional 4" mm) Optional 4"(102 (102 Silencer Prep Silencer Prep FaceHead Head Detail Face Detail Adhesive Adhesive Adhesive bumper bumper bumper available available available for field field forfor field installed installed installed 3. FP Paladin™ Series Frames are to be installed as part of the framing sequence. 4. Steelcraft provides Galvannealed steel for both interior and exterior applications. 5. Frames do not have silencer holes from factory; recommend self-adhesive type to be applied in the field. Double Rabbet N/A Typical for walls 4 3/4" (121 mm) thick or greater KD (Knock-Down) Single Rabbet Double Rabbet N/A 4 tabs per factory die-miter SUA (Up and Welded) (Set) Single Rabbet Double Rabbet N/A Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 4" (182 mm) Heads Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available when specified for KD or SUA applications. Anchor Quantities (see handy anchor lookup tool referenced on note #2 above) Per Jamb Nominal Opening Height (singles or pairs) 6'4-1/8" - 8'0" shutter 6'8" - 8'0" 3-sided Wall Condition NewMasonry/CMU Existing Masonry/CMU Concrete *Structural Steel 4-5 (top/bot and every other block) 5 4 4 5-6 (top/bot and every other block) 7 5 5 New Masonry/CMU Existing Masonry/CMU Concrete *Structural Steel 3 4 3 3 4 5 4 4 Fire Rated Products 4'3" - 6'4" shutter Hardware Anchoring Systems Approved FP anchoring is provided with calculations from a certified professional engineer upon request per ICC500-2014. All calculations are based on tested tornado products. Installation instructions are provided here and in more detail through the Paladin installation guide on our customer portal. Contact Steelcraft technical support for additional information. Specialty FP14 Corner Connections Single Rabbet Tornado Frame Profile Series Hurricane Frame Sizes and ANSI A250.8 conversions Elevations Optional 4" (102 mm) Optional (102 mm) Optional 4"4" (102 mm) Face Head Detail Face Head Detail Face Head Detail 2. Anchoring for FP14 commercial and institutional frames is specified in "Typical wall construction and anchoring types" on page 209. See quantities per jamb and per head/sill below. An Anchor Lookup tool and Installation Instructions with required details can be found on Steelcraft.com Paladin section. Anchoring systems have been evaluated and approved by certified professional engineers per ICC500 and FEMA 320/361, available in Concrete (new/existing), CMU block (new/existing), and Steel structures. Lights and Louvers Anchoring and installation notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. Doors 4 ½" Standard (114 mm) 4 7⁄8" 5" Optional 4mm) 7⁄8" 4 7⁄8" (124 (127 mm) (124 mm) (124 mm) Welded Corner KD Corner Detail Welded Corner Welded Corner Welded Corner Variations 4 ½" Standard 4(114 ½" Standard 4 ½" Standard mm) (114 mm) (114 mm) 5" Optional 5" Optional 5" Optional (127 mm) (127 mm) (127 mm) 4 7⁄8" Strike Prep (ASA) KD Corner Detail KD Corner Detail KD Corner Detail KD Corner Detail Frames 4 7⁄8" Prep (ASA) Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 47⁄8" 7/8"Strike Strike Prep (ASA) Strike Prep (ASA) 44 7⁄8" Strike Prep (ASA) Variations Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Universal Mortise Hinge Prep Per Head 2'8" - 4'0" shutter single 3'0" - 4'0" 3-sided single 5'4" - 8'0" shutter pair 6'0" - 8'0" 3-sided pair Wall Condition Performance Nominal Opening Width Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/26/20 • Technical data manual • • 211 Architectural *Includes welding frame to steel plates (by others) that are anchored to existing CMU or Concrete. See Install Instructions. Frames Variations General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • Approvals Approvals Openings with Von Duprin® and Schlage® hardware The Paladin™ Series door system (PW14 Series doors and FP14 Series frames) are available in compliance with FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500-2014 with factory attached ITS/WHI Intertek listed or approved opening labels in the configurations shown below. Tornado Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations For complete Assembly Approvals, see "ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering" on page 214, or go online to Steelcraft.com Paladin section and click on "Approvals" for a link to ITS/WHI Intertek website approvals. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of any building products. Steelcraft's Paladin™ Series door system is tested as a complete door frame and hardware system. Door, frame and anchors must be ordered from Steelcraft. When specified, ITS/WHI fire door labels are factory attached stating listings in accordance with UL10C Fire Resistance Ratings in the configurations shown below. Model Latching hardware Single-Outswg Single-Inswg Pair-Outswg Pair-Inswg Figure Exit Rod Latches Tornado Fire Tornado Fire Tornado Fire Tornado Fire Single Pair Schlage LM9300 Lever CVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr 320/361 3 hr 320/361 3 hr 320/361 3 hr 11.4 11.6 Securitech 52xx-V Lever CVR 2-point 320/361 n/a n/a n/a 320/361 90 m n/a n/a Securitech 53xx Lever CVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a Securitech 7L, 8L Lever CVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a ATAR RB-100 Lever CVR 3-point n/a n/a 320 only 3 hr n/a n/a n/a n/a Medeco 3-deadbolt with Schlage ND or Falcon T Lever n/a 3-point n/a n/a 320 only 3 hr n/a n/a n/a n/a Von Duprin WS98/9927 Panic bar SVR 2-point 320/361 none n/a n/a 320/361 90 m n/a n/a 11.5 11.7 Von Duprin WS98/9957 Panic bar SVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 11.5* n/a Securitech 7T, 7C Panic bar CVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a 320/361 n/a n/a n/a Securitech 8T, 8C Panic bar SVR 3-point 320/361 3 hr n/a n/a 320/361 n/a n/a n/a Any levers shown can be used as pair (2-point latch only) with Ives SB360 surface bolt for inactive leaf Figure 11.2: LM9300 3-point latch (shown) Specialty Inactive Figure 11.4: LM9300 3-point latch (shown) Active Inactive Active Hardware Figure 11.3: WS98/9927 2-point latch (shown) Figure 11.5: WS98/9927 2-point latch (shown) Fire Rated Products WS98/9957 (not shown) is similar but is a 3-point latch, adding a center latch point. Performance Notes: 1. See page 203, note 6 for information regarding undercuts and installation. 2. LM 9300 Inactive leaf must use IVES SB360 surface bolts. See LM9300 data sheets and installation instructions in the online library at us.allegion.com/en/home/documentlibrary.html for more information. Any levers shown can be used as pair with Ives SB360 surface bolt for inactive leaf. Architectural Inactive 212 • 3. WS devices available with EO (exit only). NL (night latch) not available. Electrical options include LX, RX, RX-2, ALK, SS, QEL, E996L E-Trim. See WS98/9927 data sheets and installation instructions in the online library at us.allegion. com/en/home/document-library.html for more information. 4. See "ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering" on page 214. Active • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/19/20 Inactive Active Home General Information Tornado resistant openings • Approvals Notes (continued): Frames Variations Doors 7. Tornado Shutters must use Schlage LM9300 latching hardware 8. Panic Bar pair exits use wide inactive leaf (no astragal) except for rare cases where a 3-hour fire rating is required. Variations 5. Available glass light options may be added to any PW flush door in a 3-sided frame. 6. Intertek tornado listing. Lights and Louvers Elevations Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 213 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/19/20 • Technical data manual • Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Tornado resistant openings • Approvals ICC 500-2014 and FEMA Approved Paladin Tornado Hardware Offering Intertek tornado listing | FP Fire Listing | PW Fire Listing Type Latches - Panic Exit hardware Outswing only Latches - Multi-point Lever hardware Outswing only Latches - Latching hardware for FEMA 320 only Inswing only multi-action release for small business and residential applications <16 occupancy Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products R4504 3-point Panic, SVR, electrified options. Grout-in 304L strike SA163 WS98/9927 Series Von Duprin WS98/9957 Von Duprin WS-LGO Series ADA bottom latch guard cover with ramp used with WS98/9927/57 Ives SB360 Manual surface bolt for inactive lever pair and grouted-in 304L strike R4942 Securitech 7T/7C Series 3-point, IHD, HVL option (single-only), electric options R27798 83T, 83C, 84T, 84C Series Autolock, 3-point, 4-point, SBD, IHD, HVL option (singleonly) electric options R27798 3-point lock R27031 CVR used with Schlage 3-point lock R21149 5200 Series-V 2-point, IHD concealed vertical rods (no primary) R27798 Securitech 5300 Series, 5400 Series 3 or 4-point, IHD concealed vertical rods, HVL option (single-only) R27798 Securitech 73L, 74L, 83L, 84L Series 3 or 4-point IHD/SBD, HVL option (single-only), electrified options R27798 Securitech ATAR System RB-100 Series Multi-latch system with HVL in conjunction with cylindrical locks shown below (3068 thru 4080, call for 28 thru < 30 width) Medeco Maxum 3 manual deadbolts in conjuction with cylindrical locks shown below Schlage ND Series Falcon T Series Schlage Von Duprin Securitech with or without (F) LM/LMV9300 Series R18248 R3515 Ives 3CB1, 3CB1HW, 3CB1NRP, 3CB1HWNRP, 3CB1SH, 3CB1HWSH, 5BB1, 5BB1HW, 5BB1WT, 5BB1NRP, 5BB1HWNRP, 5BB1SH, 5BB1HWSH, 5BB1HW WT Ives butt hinges - 4.5 High (0.134 Min) or 5 high (0.146 Min) R16697 Ives TW4, TW8 Ives electric hinge options BP9752 Ives 112HD, 112XY, 224HD, 224XY Ives aluminum geared continuous hinge - nominal leaf thickness 0.110 R16697 Ives 600, 700, 700Cs, 705 Ives steel pin & barrel continuous hinge - nominal leaf thickness 14 gage R16697 Ives TW8, TWP Ives electric continuous hinge options BP9752 Von Duprin EPT-2, EPT-10 LCN 4000T, 4010, 4010T, 4020, 4020T, 4030, 4030T, 4040XP, 4040XPT, 4050, 4110, 4110T Falcon FALCON SC70 (heavy duty), SC80A (med duty), SC60A (light duty) Surface mount Overhead holder/stop Glynn Johnson 70S, 79S, 81S, 90S 79 Series does not open to 180 degrees, so application should be confirmed. R18895 Electronic door closer LCN Sentronic 4040SE, 4310ME 4310ME May be mounted on interior or exterior side of storm shelter or safe room. 4040SE exterior side only. R1943 Auto-door operator LCN 9542, 9553 To be mounted only to the exterior side of storm shelter or safe room. R7303 Magnetic holder LCN SEM 7800 Extenders not permitted on inswing applications R8327 Schlage 679-05 (round), 7764 (rectangular) Sentrol 1076, 1078 (round), 2757 (rectangular) Must be mortised into the edge or top of the door, and into the door rabbet of the jamb or head of the frame. R13778 Ives 8400 (Metal or plastic), 8402 (metal) Must be secured with steel screws. 48 Max height bottom of door only. R22142 R18465 Butt hinges Electric power transfer Surface mounted closers Performance 2-point Panic, SVR (no primary), electrified options. Grout in 304L strike Von Duprin Cylindrical locks used with Medeco Maxum or Securitech ATAR System Continuous hinges Architectural UL Fire listings Models Securitech Latches - Multi-point Lever hardware Outswing & inswing Description/Notes Brand Door position switch Kick plates SA163 All surface mounted closers must be attached to door with through bolts per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Covers must be attached with steel screws. 4010, 4040XPT, 4000T & 4050 do not open to 180 degrees, so application should be confirmed. Thresholds & gasketing Zero multiple Must not impede or affect the function of the opening or latching hardware. Must grout full in area around strike to secure strike in slab. Floor & wall stops/ holders Ives multiple Attached to exterior with steel screws per manufacturer’s instructions. Interior application must be Ives FS495 through bolted to the door, at the bottom only, minimum 6 from lock or strike side of door. Notes: 1. 2. GWVW R1943 R1943 For 1/2" ADA thresholds, the bottom strike should be mounted flush with the top of the threshold. Refer to hardware manufacturer to specify door undercut. Factory installed Vision and ADA Narrow Glass lights rated up to 3 hours. Nomenclature: SVR & SBD=surface vert rods, CVR & IHD=concealed vert rods, 4-pt=stationary bolt, 98 (smooth) / 99 (groove)=touch bar, T=toughbar, C=crossbar, L-lever. 214 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/28/20 Home General Information Variations Frames Variations Doors Specialty products Stainless steel doors and frames........................................216 General information..........................................................................216 Typical hardware locations.............................................................217 Standard hardware preparations................................................218 Sizes and performance....................................................................219 Sound openings..........................................................................220 Lights and Louvers General information.........................................................................220 STC Tested doors..............................................................................220 Hardware options............................................................................... 221 Sound transmission ratings........................................................... 221 Thermal break frames............................................................. 222 Elevations FT Series................................................................................................ 222 Standard construction.................................................................... 223 Standard hardware and corner conditions............................ 224 Elevations.............................................................................................. 224 Standard Anchoring......................................................................... 225 Tornado Hurricane Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 215 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Technical data manual • Performance Variations Frames Features and benefits All Steelcraft's LS Series doors and FS, MS & KS Series frames are fabricated from 100% stainless steel both external and internal. Offered in two stainless steel alloys, 304 or 316, these Doors and frames provide excellent corrosion resistance, durability, performance, as well as a sleek aesthetic appearance. Door: LS18 and LS16 Series: 1. Door Cores to suit various applications: • • Polystyrene, Honeycomb or Polyurethane Steel Stiffened available on quote basis 2. Gauge: Lights and Louvers Doors Specialty products • Stainless steel doors and frames Variations General Information Home • • 18 gauge and 16 gauge (standard) Heavier gauge available on a quote basis 3. Vertical Edge Seams: Seamless and Interlocking Edge. 4. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges Elevations 5. Component Parts and Hardware Reinforcements • Stainless steel doors and frames Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane General information About the product Steelcraft Stainless Steel Doors (LS Series) and Frames (FS, KS & MS Series) are engineered to meet the architectural requirements for stainless steel doors and frames in building applications requiring exceptional corrosion resistance and/or high design appearance. This LS Series 1 3/4" door construction combine unique product features to withstand harsh environments while providing exceptional design. To meet application requirements, the door is available in single and double door sizes, with optional visions, louvers, fire ratings and a wide range of hardware preparations. Steelcraft Stainless steel doors and frames are Hurricane approved and models have been acoustically tested up to STC 51 (addition of vision light and/or doors swinging in pairs reduce the STC performance). Installation • Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products • SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and NAAMM-HMMA 840-07. Specification compliance 1. Stainless steel astm a666 and astm a167; type 304 or type 316 2. NAAMM-HMMA 866-12 Guide Specifications for Stainless Steel Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3. NAAMM-HMMA 860-92 Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Made of 100% Stainless Steel Frame: FS16, MS16, KS16 Series: 1. Gauge: • • 16 gauge (standard) Heavier gauge available on a quote basis 2. Component Parts, Reinforcements and Anchors: all made of 100% Stainless Steel. 3. Machine Mitered corners factory welded and refinished to match face trim with no visible seam. 4. Knock-Down (KD) frame options available. 5. Anchors: masonry T, wire anchors, metal stud, existing wall anchors. Ratings: actual tests conducted on stainless steel assemblies. 1. Fire-rated up to Class A (3 hour) 2. Sound-rated Door and Frame Assemblies up to STC 51 • Seals not included 3. Hurricane approved (NOA Dade County Florida) Durability 1. Exceptional corrosion resistance: conforming to ASTM A666: • • Type 304 Alloy: typical corrosion resistance. Type 316 Alloy: heavy duty corrosion resistance. Fire ratings Steelcraft Stainless Steel Series doors and frames meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL -10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C). Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and NAAMM-HMMA 840-07. 216 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 Home General Information Specialty products • Stainless steel doors and frames Typical hardware locations 9 ¾" (248 mm) 9 5⁄8" (244 mm) A A 1⁄8" (3 mm) Lights and Louvers Nominal Door Height Net (Frame Door Bottom Height to Header Rabbet) Finished Opening Height (Frame bottom to Jamb Rabbet) A A 39 3⁄16" for mortise locks 9 5⁄8" (244 mm) Dust box Closer reinforcement Hinge preparation Dimension "A" 6' 8" (2032 mm) 29 15/16" (760 mm) 7' 0" (2134 mm) 31 15/16" (811 mm) 7' 2" (2184 mm) 32 15/16" (837 mm) 7' 6" (2286 mm) 34 15/16" (887 mm) Hardware Standard Door opening height Standard-face welded 4 7/8" Strike prep (ASA) Head detail Jamb detail *½"(13 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) Varies Throat Opening 1 15/16" (49 mm) Varies Jamb Depth 1 15⁄16" (49 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) Opening width 2" (50 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) all JD Standard 2" Head standard Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • 5⁄8" (16 mm) Standard • 217 Architectural Standard *½" 2" (13 mm) (50 mm) Performance 4 7/8" (124 mm) Jamb depth Fire Rated Products 1 9⁄16" (40 mm) 1 9/16" (40 mm) Throat opening Specialty Standard Corner profile Tornado Standard door frame details Hurricane ¾" (19 mm) to bottom of frame Elevations 39 9⁄16" for cylindrical locks 40 5⁄16" (1024 mm) 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) Doors 1⁄8" (3 mm) Variations Nominal Door Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Net Door Width Frames Finished Opening Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Variations Doors and frames with 3 hinges (1 1/2 pair) General Information Home Specialty products • Stainless steel doors and frames Frames Variations Standard hardware preparations Typical hardware applications shown Cylindrical lock prep #161 Hinge preparation Exposed vertical seam along edge Mortise lock prep - #86 16 Ga. St. Steel top reinf. channel Variations 1/8" in 2" bevel 14 Ga. St. Steel closer reinf. Polystyrene core Standard Standard • Continuous hinge preparations are full mortise reinforced. Locks: • Cylindrical 161, 61 L and Mortise 86 lock preps are available for single door and active leaves. Templated hardware preps Closers: • Surface applied closer reinforcements standard in both doors and frames. • Standard Concealed closer preparations available as specified. Strikes: Strike preparations will accommodate specified locking hardware. • • • Inactive leaves = Surface Vertical Rods Electric lock preparations with conduit are available as specified. • Specialty Glass light options EPT (Electric Power Transfer) preps are available as specified. Astragals: Surface mounted: flat for active or inactive leaf • Notes: V-Light: Exposed glass size is true 10" x 10" located at Steelcraft standard location. 1. Hardware 16 Ga. St. Steel bottom reinf. channel Electric hardware: Electric Hinge preparations are available as specified. Exit devices preps are available as follows: • Single/Active doors = Rim or Mortise • Standard Standard Hinges: • Template hinge preparations for 4 1/2" or 5" standard weight or heavy weight butt hinge preparations. • Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Optional 18 ga. flush top caps F G V N BL 2. N3, N4 and N5 light: Exposed glass size and locations at Steelcraft standard dimensions. 3. NOT AVAILABLE WITH DEZIGNER® TRIM. 4. Light kits are Anemostat LoPro design. 6. Louvers can be installed upon request 7. Standard 1/4" glass, other available upon request. Vision size (O-S minus 2 1/4") Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 5. Vision lites on pairs must match. Order size Order size plus 3/4" Glass size = order size minus 1 1/4" 218 • Glass Option Exposed Glass Size Glass Cutting Size V 10" x 10" 11" x 11" N3 3" x 33" 4" x 34" N4 4" x 25" 5" x 26" N5 5" x 20" 6" x 21" • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 Home General Information Specialty products • Stainless steel doors and frames Sizes and performance Variations Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Elevations Fire Rated Products Custom options Special size products are available to meet the unique construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the architectural community. Contact Customer Care for these requirements at: 1-877-671-7011 (ask for estimating) or email [email protected] Installation Installation of all Steelcraft frames and doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.112012 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All Fire Rated doors must be installed and maintained in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80, and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Hardware Sizes and performance All stainless steel doors and frames are manufactured and supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as published in ANSI A250.8- 2014 (SDI 100). On-site storage Store doors under cover, in a dry area and in an upright position. All ferrous metal products should be stored where they will not be exposed to, or come in contact with water. This is particularly true of products such as doors, which have large flat surfaces on which water may collect if they are stacked horizontally. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas. These materials create a humidity chamber, which promotes blistering and corrosion. Place no more than 5 doors in a group, with all material on planking or blocking at least 4 in. (100 mm) off the ground, 2 in. (50 mm) off a paved area or the floor slab. Provide a least 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) space (wood strip). Specialty General information Steelcraft Stainless Steel doors and frames are designed to fit virtually all construction requirements for commercial and institutional building applications. Doors and Frames are shipped separately. All stainless steel product is packaged with protective pad and crated in heavy wood containers. Proper installation of Door and Frame Systems is critical to insure proper performance. It is imperative that materials are inspected thoroughly for shipping damage. If damage has occurred en route, please note it on the bill of lading and shipping documents. Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene Polystyrene U-0.15 UU U---0.15 0.15 0.15 RRR-6.73 R---6.73 6.73 6.73 Tornado Honeycomb Honeycomb Honeycomb Honeycomb Hurricane Polyurethane Polyurethane Polyurethane Polyurethane U-0.10 UU U---0.10 0.10 0.10 RRR-9.72 R---9.72 9.72 9.72 Performance • 219 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 • Technical data manual • Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Specialty products • Sound openings Sound openings 2. Automatic Door bottom: Zero #367, surface applied. General information Doors are often used to block the passage of sound from one area to another. The sound rating of a door is expressed as Sound Transmission Class (STC). The higher the STC ratings, the better the performance. STC and Industry Test Standards The Sound Transmission Class (STC) is a single-number rating of a material's or an assembly's ability to resist airborne sound transfer at the frequencies 50-5000 Hz. In general, a higher STC rating blocks more noise from transmitting through a door opening. The sound transmission loss performance is conducted on an operable 3070 door and frame assembly by a certified lab in accordance with SDI 128 and test protocols ASTM E90 (measurement of airborne sound loss of building partitions), ASTM E413 (rating sound insulation), ASTM E1332 (outdoorindoor transmission), and ASTM E2235 (decay rates for use in sound insulation). As part of test procedure, the assembly is built into a wall, dividing the sound-proof acoustical test room in to two sections. Sound is introduced into the source section of the room at different frequencies and the amount of sound, transmitted through the unit is recorded in decibels. A door assembly is given an STC rating per ASTM E413 by measuring its transmission loss over a range of 21 different frequencies between 50 and 5000 Hz. Measured transmission loss (number of blocked dB) at each frequency gets rounded and adjusted with standardized coefficients. The STC rating is than calculated based on formula, when certain conditions of sound deficiencies have been met. 3. Threshold: Zero #560 (non-ADA). Zero #566 for ADA or Zero #565 were not tested but may be used and should not change the STC (not assembly tested). #565 may provide better field results, having a wider flat area to better accommodate the auto door bottom. 4. Cushion Spring: Zero #119W/119WB (44 STC set only) applied to both jambs, top and bottom rail. Consider omitting at bottom to avoid door binding issues with the threshold (little effect to STC based on other gasketing in place - 3 layers of neoprene trapping air). Cam-lift hinges should be used if applied to the bottom of the door. When used at top, flush/filled top caps should be ordered to allow a full 1/8" gap above the door (room for 119W). Fit will be tight even with a quality installation. B Series STC - Stiffened Core Construct B Series STC - Stiffened core construction Standard B Series core: 20 gauge stiffeners • • Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural Installation is a critical factor; the gaskets must meet the face of the door and sill (floor), making a good seal. In addition any construction that passes from one area to another will also carry sound (e.g. HVAC ducts). Steelcraft’s STC rated doors are not supplied with STC labels, and required Zero seals/gasketing are not priced or ordered through Steelcraft. Door Series Core STC Rating Gasket Notes B Series B14 STC - Steel Stiffened 44 1, 2, 3 & 4 B Series B18, 16 STC - Steel Stiffened 40 1, 2, & 3 L Series L18, 16, 14 Honeycomb 35 1&3 L Series L18, 16, 14 Polystyrene 25 1&3 H Series H16, 14 Honeycomb 36 1&3 H Series H16, 14 Polystyrene 28 1&3 CE Series CE18, 16 Polystyrene 30 1&3 • Vertical interior webs located 6" (152 mm) apart • Welded to face sheet 5" (127.6 mm) on center • Stiffeners welded to each other at the top and bottom • Areas between stiffeners filled with nominal 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density fiberglass batt insulation STC Tested doors The following STC ratings have been achieved with standard Steelcraft door and frame products for the door types, cores, and gasketing shown below. Gauge does not significantly affect the results for the levels tested. Frames should be filled with sound deadening material such as fiberglass batting to ~STC 37. Above this range, grouting is recommended. Stiffeners welded to inside of face sheets Application details The following door, frame and gasket details represent the standard products tested. • Zero #560 for non-ADA applications. Used with standard 3/4" undercut. • Zero #566 for ADA applications - door requires special undercut. • Zero #119WB for STC 44 only 14 3/4" Max frame depth F16, F14, MU16 or MU14 series frames Zero #475 surface applied seal perimeter Zero #367 surface applied door bottom Threshold Gasket Notes (supplied by others): 1. Perimeter Seals: Zero #475 applies to the stop of the head and jambs. 220 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Specialty products • Sound openings Sound transmission ratings Hardware options Locks: • Cylindrical 161, 61L and Mortise 86 (sectional or escutcheon trim) lock preps are available for single door and active leaves. Solid core wood door 26 Doors Solid core wood door (perfect seal) 28 Doors (2) Solid core wood doors 33 Doors Steel door with urethane core (perfect seal) 26 Exit devices: preps are available as follows: • Single doors = Rim or Mortise exit devices Doors L18 Honeycomb door (perfect seal) 35 Doors L18 Honeycomb door (PS074 Weatherstrip) 35 • Glass (Glazed) 1/4" plate glass 26 Glass (Glazed) 1/8" insulated plate glass, 1/2" air space 32 Wall 6" concrete block 43 Wall 2" x 4" wood stud with 1/2" gypsum board 34 Wall 2 1/2" steel stud with (2) layers of 1/2" gypsum board each side 46 Inactive leaves = Surface Vertical Rods Closers: Surface applied closer reinforcements are available in both doors and frames. • • Concealed closer preparations are not available. Strikes: Strikes preparations will accommodate specified locking hardware. • EPT (Electric Power Transfer) preps are not available. Example 1 Lowest sound audible to the human ear 30 Lowest sound audible to the human ear 40 Living room, quiet office, bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic at a distance, refrigerator, gentle breeze 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet (6 meters), conversation,sewing machine 70 Busy traffic, office calculator, noisy restaurant. At the 70 decibel level, noise may begin to affect your hearing if you' re exposed to it constantly. Tornado • Electric lock preparations with conduit are available as specified. Typical Decibel Truck traffic, noisy home appliances, shop tools, lawn mower. As loudness increases, the "safe" time exposure decreased; damage can occur in less than eight hours. 100 Chain saw, stereo headphone, pneumatic drill. Even two hours of exposure can be dangerous at 100dB; and with each 5 dB increase, the "safe time" is cut in half. 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, sandblasting, thunderclap. The danger is immediate; at 120 dB exposure can injure your ears. 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane. Any length of exposure time is dangerous; noise at 140 dB may cause actual pain in the ear. 180 Rocket launching pad. Without ear protection, noise at this level causes irreversible damage; hearing loss hearing is inevitable. • 221 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Performance 90 Fire Rated Products Subway, heavy city traffic, alarm clock at two feet, factory noise. These noises are dangerous if you are exposed to them for more than eight hours. Hardware 80 Specialty Hazardous Zone Hurricane Electric hardware: Electric Hinge preparations are available as specified. • • Sound measurements The following is a quick reference to the decibel ratings and hazardous time exposures of common sounds: Elevations 19 Doors Lights and Louvers Hollow core wood door Doors STC Doors Continuous hinge preparations available when specified. Variations Product Description • Frames Hinges: • Template hinge preparations for 4 1/2" or 5" heavy weight butt hinges Sound transmission classification (STC) ratings are a measurement of the amount of sound passing through a building product. To help understand the STC ratings, the following table compares the ratings of various building products: Variations Note: Hardware preps and internal reinforcements will vary due to acoustical requirements. Frames Variations Doors Specialty products • Thermal break frames Thermal break frames FT Series Features and benefits Steelcraft FT (Frame Thermal) Series frames and elevations offer the following unique features, which enhance long term functionality and durability: 1. Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home About the product FT frames are separated at the stop by a durable polymer extrusion that serves as a thermal break. FT Series 3-sided frames and elevations are designed to meet requirements for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial and institutional buildings. Although the most common use is exterior masonry opening, these frames are installed in both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall constructions. These frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation or welded for installation as a complete unit. Installation 1. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. 2. Care should be taken throughout the installation process to maintain the thermal break designed into anchors and reinforcements. Application FT Series frames are best used for energy cost savings on exterior openings or interiors where temperature control is desired between locations. They are typically installed in wall construction types as defined in the table below Thermal Break: By separating the frame along the stop, the transfer of exterior heat or cold into your building is reduced. FT frames provide 95% better resistance to thermal conductivity over non-thermal break frames. • • Lower thermal costs and improved comfort • • Uses Galvannealed A-60 steel Jamb and Head components are each factory assembled, with 3-sided frames supplied KD or Face welded Frame and weld-in anchors are specially designed to achieve a true thermal break 2. FT thermal separator: This durable polymer extrusion provides a more secure barrier over time and is more durable in freezing conditions compared to traditional vinyl separators. 3. Die-mitered corner connections: Die-mitered corner connection at the head and jamb insure an attractive, tight and closed mitered connection. The miter includes 4 corner tabs designed with concealed connection eliminating the need for continuous profile welding. 4. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard weight .134" (3.3 mm) thick hinges to heavy weight .180" (4.7 mm) hinges. 5. Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10-2011. Specification compliance 1. 3-sided FT Frames tested to ASTM C1363 in an operable assembly with 16ga flush polystyrene door and Zero 525 Rabbeted Aluminum thermal break threshold to 0.45 U.-Factor. See "Anchoring and installation notes" for options. 2. FT elevations with mullion were tested to ASTM C1363 with common hardware preps for exterior assembly openings using 14ga thermal break frames with 16ga Polystyrene core doors, 14ga top/ bottom channels, 14ga closer, 7ga hinge reinforcements and RIM exit with 14ga reinforcements provided a U-factor of 0.49 without sidelight and 0.56 with 1/4" glass in a 24" wide sidelight. See Zero gasketing options in "Anchoring and installation notes". 3. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009). Locations are in accordance with ANSI/BHMA. 4. FT frames are not fire-rated. Frame applications Profile Steel thickness Wall construction Typical wall anchors FT16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in nailing strap anchors FT16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FT16 16 Gauge [0.053" (1.3 mm)] Existing masonry Weld-in FT EMAs bolted through both rabbets FT14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Wood or steel stud Weld-in nailing strap anchors FT14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Masonry Wire masonry FT14 14 Gauge [0.067" (1.7 mm)] Existing masonry Weld-in FT EMAs bolted through both rabbets 222 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/19/20 Home General Information Specialty products • Thermal break frames Standard construction Do not stack welded frames in storage or in transport • • Do not weld on or near separator hinge FT thermal separator Doors • Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement 9 3/4" (248 mm) Variations While our separator is durable, care should be taken in transporting and handling until frame is installed, especially with longer components and wider jamb depths. Frames • 2" (50 mm) Finished opening width Variations 2" (50 mm) FT Thermal separator Separates the door side and the non-door side of the frame. The 3-pieces are joined with screws as shown. Separator material is not paintable Lights and Louvers Equal Finished opening height Elevations Hardware interference Specific hardware preps can be reviewed by Steelcraft Engineering upon request. Installation may be limited; it is best to avoid attaching to the soffits. If unavoidable, review the drawing and dimensions in Figure 12.2 and become familiar, taking special care when drilling or attaching to this area. Steelcraft is not responsible for issues caused by modification, reinforcement or hardware installation outside of the factory. strike hinge FT Thermal Break frames must maintain the thermal separation between the door side and the non-door side of the frame. Varies 40 5/16" (1024 mm) Jamb depth 13/16" (21 mm) Throat opening 10 3/8" (264 mm) 1 15/16" 1 15/16"(49 mm) (49 mm) 2" (50 mm) hinge Hardware 1/2" (13 mm) all JD Specialty Factory installed using #6-20 STS, ~10" O.C. 1 9/16" (40 mm) Figure 12.1: Elevation 5/8" (16 mm) Opening width Frame sizing options Series FT14 Pair 1' 6"x6' 8" — 4' 0"x8' 0" (457 mm x 2032 mm — 1219 mm x 2438 mm) 4' 0"x6' 8" — 8' 0"x8' 0" (1219 mm x 2032 mm — 2438 mm x 2438 mm) Equal or unequal double rabbet Minimum Maximum 5 3/4" (146 mm) 12 3/4" (324 mm) Standard profile dimensions (variations available) Corners Face Stop Return Standard 2" (50 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 1/2" (13 mm) DIE MITERED with four (4)concealed tabs interlocking head and jambs • 223 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • Performance FT16 Single Jamb depth availability (profile) Fire Rated Products Figure 12.2: Standard double rabbet frame (factory assembled components) Opening size ranges Tornado Equal Separator section is consisten across various jamb depths Hurricane 1/2" (13 mm) all JD General Information Home Specialty products • Thermal break frames Frames Variations Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Standard hardware and corner conditions Universal Mortise Hinge Prep 4 7/8" Strike Prep (ASA) 4 1/2" (114 mm) Standard 5" (127 mm) Optional Welded Corner KD Corner Detail 4 7/8" (124 mm) 7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement General notes 1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8" (3 mm) increments. Optional 4" (102 mm) Face Head Detail 3. Available in Galvannealed A-60 steel only. 4. For KD Corners, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly. 5. FT frames are face welded only (backwelding and full profile can damage separator). 6. FT Series frames with optional 4" heads are mainly used in masonry applications when 2" f ace heads do not match course blocking. Note separator is not shown (hidden) in this illustration of the 4" head. Tornado Hurricane Elevations 2. FT Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence. Specialty Frame options FT16 Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware FT14 Architectural Frame profile Series Corner connections KD (Knock-down) SUA (Set-up & weld) Double rabbet Double rabbet Double rabbet Typical for walls 4 3/4" (121 mm) thick or greater (single rabbet not available) 4 interlocking corner tabs per factory die-miter. See the "KD Corner Detail" Available when specified, and in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100). 4" (102 mm) heads Die-mitered for use with 2" (51 mm) face double rabbet jambs. Available when specified for KD or SUA applications. Elevations 1. FT14 and FT16 Thermal Break (closed section) mullions are available for use with 3-sided FT frames to provide sidelights and partial sidelights, transoms, and borrowed lights. All anchors, reinforcements and methods to attach maintain a thermal break between interior and exterior parts of the frame opening. 2. Built-in hardware reinforcement: the FT mullion is a modified version of our typical heavy duty reinforced mullion with internal stiffener. This stiffener creates built-in reinforcements for strike and surface closer hardware. The stiffener does not change position in the frame relative to the separator and does not change or move with larger jamb depths. FT Mullion Elevation Detail 11/16" 1 15/16" 3. Options: • • • • Built-in reinforcement 2" face typ Typical stick cut, notch, and weld options. Reference tech data Elevations and price book. KD or Face weld only (take care when welding near separator material) 5 3/4" thru 12 3/4" JD 2" or 4" face with sills up to 6" face. Larger faces may require wood supports 4. Limitations: Max component length 9'11" typ., driven by 10’ long FT gasketing. No single rabbet, special profiles, special angles, UL labels, 12 ga heads, high frequency preps, or hospital stops. Call for engineering detail requests. door glass Door and bead sold separately. Glass by others. 5. Avoidance areas: See drawing/dimensions to right for avoiding the FT mullion separator and perpendicular steel edges. 224 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/28/20 Home General Information Specialty products • Thermal break frames Standard Anchoring Lights and Louvers Anchoring and installation notes 1. FT Series commercial and Institutional frames are specially designed to maintain thermal break functionality as well as for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility. Weld-in Nailing Strap Anchor for Stud Walls Elevations • • • • Doors 3/16" (5 mm) dia. wire Variations FT Weld-in Base Anchor Frames FT Existing Masonry Anchor Variations Wire Masonry Anchor FT frames supplied standard with weld-in base anchors (n/a when using EMA) Any jamb anchors needed for FT Series frames must be specified in the order All except wire are weld-in only Anchor options: Tornado • New masonry (wire anchors) Existing masonry wall (FT EMA anchors) Stud wall (nailing strap jamb anchors) Any additional field anchoring must take care to maintain the thermal break or use non-metallic materials with low thermal conductivity (e.g. wood) 2. To achieve rating provided, use with Zero 525 Rabbetted Aluminum Thermal Break Threshold or similar. 3. For additional thermal benefits, use with Steelcraft Polystyrene or Polyurethane insulated doors, insulate frame, and add Zero products: • Specialty 1/2" backbends on all JD including 5 3/4" FT anchors unique and not shown in the typical "Frames: Anchoring systems" section of manual. Hurricane • • • Zero Thermal break threshold options: 624, 625, 626, 724, 8724, 726, or 8726 • For recessed applications use 722, 723, 729, 8729, or 8730 Zero PSA self-adhesive gasketing: 188, 488, or other • Apply to separator stop above 50°F (70°-100°F ideal). Allow 72 hrs to set prior to use or conditions (min 24hrs, depending on application temperature). Hardware • Refer to Zero options under sealing solutions > downloads https://us.allegion.com/en/home/products/brands/zero-international. html Framing applications Series Steel type Building type Opening Interior Galvannealed2 Commercial FT14 Galvannealed2 Commercial Mainly Exterior Interior Mainly Exterior Heavy to extra heavy duty Extra heavy to maximum duty KD3 Corner SUA4 Corner Applications Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Typical building conditions High humidity and/or weather exposure Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2017 (SDI 100) 3 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation 2 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed 4 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 • Technical data manual • • 225 Architectural 1 Performance FT16 Usage frequency 1 Fire Rated Products 4. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted frames: Grouted frames are not recommended as this increases thermal transmission. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Frames Variations General Information Home Specialty products • Thermal break frames This page intentionally left blank. 226 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 Home General Information Doors....................................................................................................... 233 Frames....................................................................................................236 Door preps: Locks......................................................................239 ASA Prep without astragal........................................................... 250 ASA Prep with astragal.................................................................... 251 Flush bolts with astragal................................................................ 252 Flush bolts with astragal (astragal attachment detail)...253 Flush bolts without astragal.........................................................254 Flush bolts without astragal (flush bolt prep detail)........255 Surface bolts without astragal....................................................256 Closer prep........................................................................................... 257 Door preps: Hinges....................................................................258 Hinge prep.............................................................................................258 Frame preps: Strikes.................................................................259 ASA Strike prep...................................................................................259 CYL Strike prep.................................................................................. 260 Dead lock strike prep .......................................................................261 RPD Rim panic strike prep.............................................................262 Surface vertical rod strike prep ..................................................263 Universal flush bolt strike prep .................................................. 264 161 Lock prep .......................................................................................239 160 & 160-4 Lock prep .................................................................. 240 61L Lock prep .......................................................................................241 86 Lock prep ....................................................................................... 242 86 Lock prep for commercial and institutional applications 243 Frame preps: Closers................................................................265 Door preps: Exit devices..........................................................244 Electric preps: Miscellaneous.............................................. 268 Surface closer prep ..........................................................................265 Hinge prep............................................................................................ 266 Continuous hinge prep ................................................................... 267 Specialty Frame EPT Power transfer prep ............................................... 268 Juction boxes...................................................................................... 268 Door Raceway prep......................................................................... 268 Tornado Frame preps: Hinges.................................................................266 Hurricane Push/Pull Prep....................................................................................244 Rim panic prep ...................................................................................245 Vertical rod prep.................................................................................246 Special: Concealed vertical rod exit device prep................ 247 Special: Von Duprin inpact™ (94/9547) concealed vertical rod integral exit device....................................................................248 Special: Von Duprin inpact™ (94/9575) mortise lock device 249 Elevations Hardware preparations: Nomenclature.......................... 233 Door preps: Inactive leaves....................................................250 Lights and Louvers General information.........................................................................229 Locations...............................................................................................229 Specification compliance..............................................................229 Fire ratings.............................................................................................229 Doors and frames with 1 1/2 pair of hinges...............................230 Doors and frames with 2 pairs of hinges................................230 Doors and frames with 2 1/2 pairs of hinges............................. 231 Dutch doors and frame................................................................... 232 Doors Locations: Hinging, locking, closing...................................229 Variations Hardware...............................................................................................228 Hardware preparation types........................................................228 Hardware categories........................................................................228 ANSI compliance...............................................................................228 Frames General information..................................................................228 Variations Hardware preparations Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 227 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Doors Variations Variations General Information Home Hardware preparations • General information General information All Steelcraft frames, doors and stick systems are routinely prepared for various types and grades of architectural hardware. The preparations for the specified hardware are in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's registered and/ or published template information. This section of the Steelcraft TD Manual is designed to help educate users of how Steelcraft products interface and function with the major architectural hardware products. It is also intended to be a frame and door supplement to the information published by the hardware manufacturer being used and/or specified. Lights and Louvers Elevations Architectural hardware items are any device, sensor or auxiliary item attached to a frame or door, which is either specified and/ or required for the operation and functionality of the door assembly. The hardware attached to the frame and/or door can be purely mechanical, electrical (wired into the alarm and monitoring systems of the building) or pneumatic. The architect, specification writer and/or the purchaser of the door assembly specifies these hardware items. There are three (3) major types of hardware preparations to be considered. Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane • • • Fire Rated Products Mortised hardware: Any hardware device or item (including sensors) attached to the frame or door that requires a cutout and reinforcement be made prior to attaching the hardware item to the door and/or frame. Surface applied and reinforced hardware: Any hardware device or item (including sensors) attached to the frame or door which do not require a cutout be made prior to attaching the hardware item to the frame and/or door, however, the hardware manufacturer or specifier requires a reinforcement be built into the frame or door to support the attached piece of hardware or its function. Surface applied hardware: Any hardware device or item (including sensors) attached to the frame or door which does not require either a cutout or reinforcement to be made prior to attaching the hardware item to the frame and/or door. Hardware categories The architectural hardware attached to a door assembly, usually falls into one of the following device categories: • Performance • Hardware preparation types Hinging: These devices perform the functions of suspending and swinging the door in the frame. Hinging systems are usually attached to the door edge and hinge jamb. The most commonly used hinging devices are: • Butt hinges: mortised to both the door edge and hinge jamb • Continuous hinges: surface applied and reinforced to the door edge and hinge jamb • Pivots: mortised to both door edge and hinge jamb. 228 • Locking: These devices perform the functions of holding the door in a closed position by the means of a latch or lock bolt projecting from the door into a strike. The strike is located in either the frame or inactive leaf of a pair of doors. All of these devices are mortised into the door edge and the strike jamb. The most commonly used locking devices are: • • • • • Hardware Architectural • • Latches and locks Deadlocks Exit devices (some are surface applied on the door face) Auxiliary locks Closing: These devices perform the functions of mechanically closing the door once it is opened, and are mainly categorized as: • Surface closers: surface applied and reinforced on the door face and head of the frame. • Concealed closers: mortised to both door top channel and head of the frame. • Floor closers: mortised into the door bottom channel and attached into the floor. Protecting: These devices are designed to protect the frame and door against foreseen damage from abuse and function. They are mainly surface applied and internally reinforced only when specified. The most commonly used devices in this category are: • • • • Kick plates • Stops: may be concealed and reinforced when specified Push pull plates Coordinators Holders: may be concealed and reinforced when specified Weather Sealing: These devices perform the functions of limiting weather, smoke and sound penetration through the operating clearances around the installed and operable door, frame and hardware assembly. These devices are mainly surface applied. The most commonly used devices in this category are: • Perimeter weather seals: usually surface attached to the rabbet of the jambs and head • Door bottoms: mortised into the bottom of the door, or surface applied to the bottom of the door face. • Astragals: used in double door applications and surface attached to the edge of one of the doors. ANSI compliance Steelcraft hardware preparations and reinforcements are in accordance with ANSI A250.6. Locations are in accordance with ANSI/DHI A115. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 06/08/17 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Locations: Hinging, locking, closing Steelcraft's hardware locations follow the standards established by the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Fire ratings Fire ratings are not affected by hardware locations. The proper hardware must be used. Refer to the Fire Rated Section of the Steelcraft Spec Manual for hardware requirements. Lights and Louvers The ANSI A115.3 (2 3/4" [70 mm] high) strike preparation is normally supplied on frames for 1 3/8" (35 mm) thick doors. The strike preparation is also located at 40 5/16" centerline (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. Locations Elevations Steelcraft's hinge locations are listed on the elevations shown on pages 255-257. All openings for 1 3/4" (45 mm) doors up to and including 7'6" (2286 mm) in height have 1 1/2 pair of hinges. Openings over 7'6" (2286 mm) through 10'0" (3048 mm) in height have 2 pair of hinges. Openings over 10'0" (3048 mm) have 2-1/2 pair of hinges. Other hardware locations are shown on the table below: Location on Door to centerline of prep 39 3/16" (995 mm) ANSI115.2 cylindrical (bored in) locks 40 5/16" (1024 mm) 39 9/16" (1005 mm) ANSI A115.6 preassembled locks 40 5/16" (1024 mm) 39 9/16" (1005 mm) Mortise exit devices See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 2 See Note 2 48" (1219 mm) To accommodate strike Push plate Not available 44 1/4" (1124 mm) Pull plate Not available 41 1/4" (1048 mm) Combinations push & pull bars Not available 41 1/4" (1048 mm) Hospital latches 40 5/16" (1024 mm) 39 9/16" (1005 mm) Hospital arm pulls Not available 44 1/4" (1124 mm) Hinges See elevations See elevations Specialty Rim/vertical rod exit devices Deadlock Tornado Location on Frame to centerline of prep 40 5/16" (1024 mm) Hurricane Hardware ANSI 115.1 mortise lock Hardware Notes: 1. Doors The ANSI A115.1 or ANSI A115.2 (4 7/8" [124 mm] high) strike preparation is normally supplied on all frames prepared for 1 3/4" (45 mm) thick doors. The strike is located at 40 5/16"centerline (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. This strike locations allows the use of either the Mortise (ANSI A115.1) or Cylindrical (ANSI A115.2) locks. The 4 7/8" (124 mm) strike also allows the use of mortise exit devices. Specification compliance Variations Steelcraft's hardware locations are the same from product to product. Frames General information Variations Locations: Hinging, locking, closing Standard location for single doors is to match the ANSI A115.1 strike location of 40 5/16" (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. Pairs of doors are located per template to insure the devices on both leaves align. 2. Rim and vertical rod exit devices are located per template. Fire Rated Products 3. Locations on frame are from bottom of frame. 4. Locations on door are from bottom of door (with the standard 3/4" undercut). 5. Locations are for openings over 5'0". Consult factory for under 5'0". Performance • 229 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 03/07/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Locations: Hinging, locking, closing Frames Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Doors and frames with 1 1/2 pair of hinges Finished Opening Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Nominal Door Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) 9-3/4" (248mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) Net Door Height A A Nominal Door 48" Height (1219mm) (Frame Bottom to Header Rabbet) Finished Opening Height (Frame bottom to Jamb Rabbet) Table 1 A A Elevations 40-5/16" (1024mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) 10-3/8" (264mm) Tornado Hurricane 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame Finished Opening Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Specialty Hardware B Finished Opening Height (Frame B bottom to Jamb Rabbet) B Fire Rated Products Performance Dimension "A" 6'8" (2032 mm) 29 15/16" (760 mm) 7'0" (2134 mm) 31 15/16" (811 mm) 7'2" (2184 mm) 32 15/16" (837 mm) 7'6" (2286 mm) 34 15/16" (887 mm) Doors and frames with 2 pairs of hinges Nominal Door Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) 9-3/4" (248mm) Architectural Door opening height 10-3/8" (264mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) B Nominal Door Height Net (Frame Door B Bottom Height to Header Rabbet) B 9-5/8" (244mm) Table 2 Door opening height Dimension "B" 6'8" (2032 mm) 19 61/64" (507 mm) 7'0" (2134 mm) 21 19/64" (541 mm) 7'2" (2184 mm) 21 61/64" (558 mm) 7'6" (2286 mm) 23 19/64" (592 mm) 7'10" (2388 mm) 24 5/8" (625 mm) 8'0" (2438 mm) 25 19/64" (643 mm) 8'6" (2591 mm) 27 19/64" (693 mm) 8'10" (2692 mm) 28 5/8" (727 mm) 9'0" (2743 mm) 29 19/64" (744 mm) 9'6" (2896 mm) 31 19/64" (795 mm) 9'10" (2997 mm) 32 5/8" (829 mm) 10'0" (3048 mm) 33 19/64" (846 mm) 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame Notes: 1. Steelcraft standard hinge spacing for doors up to and including 7'6" (2286 mm) high is 1 1/2 pairs (3 hinges) as shown in Table 1. Information shown in Table 2 is for reference when 4 hinges are specified for those door heights. 2. Steelcraft standard for doors over 10'0" (3048 mm) is 2 1/2 pairs (5 hinges). See Table 3. 3. For special door heights, dimensions "A" and "B" will vary accordingly unless specified differently. 230 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 09/18/14 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Locations: Hinging, locking, closing Doors and frames with 2 1/2 pairs of hinges C C Net Door Height 10'4" (3154 mm) 25 31/32" (660 mm) 10'6" (3200 mm) 26 15/32" (672 mm) 10'8" (3251 mm) 26 31/32" (685 mm) 10'10" (3302 mm) 27 15/32" (698 mm) 11'0" (3353 mm) 27 31/32" (710 mm) Note: Door diagram is for reference only -- max door height is 10' (varies with series). C C Tornado 9 5⁄8" (244 mm) ¾" (19 mm) to bottom of frame Hurricane 10 3⁄8" (264 mm) C 25 15/32" (647 mm) Elevations C Nominal Door Height (Frame Bottom to Header Rabbet) 10'2" (3049 mm) Lights and Louvers Finished Opening Height (Frame bottom to Jamb Rabbet) Dimension "C" Doors C C Door opening height Variations 9 5⁄8" (244 mm) 9 ¾" (248 mm) Table 3 Frames Nominal Door Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Variations Finished Opening Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 231 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Locations: Hinging, locking, closing Variations 9-3/4" (248mm) Net Door Height D Nominal Door Height (Frame Bottom to Header Rabbet) Finished Opening 19-7/16" Height (494mm) (Frame bottom to Jamb Rabbet) 23-7/8" (606mm) Tornado Frames Hurricane 9-5/8" (244mm) 36-5/8" (937mm) E D 9-5/8" (244mm) 23-7/8" (606mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) 10-3/8" (264mm) 35-7/8" (905mm) 43-1/8" (1095mm) 3/4” (19mm) to bottom of frame Table 4 Dimension "D" Dimension "E" 6'8" (2032 mm) Door opening height 16 9/16" (421 mm) 35 13/16" (910 mm) 7'0" (2134 mm) 20 9/16" (522 mm) 39 13/16" (1011 mm) 7'2" (2184 mm) 22 9/16" (573 mm) 41 13/16" (1062 mm) Note: For Fire Rated Hardware requirements, refer to the Fire Rated Section. An additional listed latch is required in the top leaf. Fire Rated Products Performance Architectural 3/16" (5mm) 9-5/8" (244mm) Hardware Specialty Nominal Door Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Net Door Width Finished Opening Width (Rabbet to Rabbet) Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Variations Dutch doors and frame 232 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Preparation description 160 L7F Schlage mortise lock: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 652 160-4 Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.2 R7A Von Duprin Rim® exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 541 160ED Edge cutout only: (1" x 2 1/4 " front) per ANSI A115.2 161 Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.2 M4R Von Duprin® Mortise exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 556 161ED Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front): per ANSI A115.2 SV2EW Von Duprin® Vertical Rod exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 705 161EDR Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front): per ANSI A115.2 with RPD reinforcements 161EDV Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front): per ANSI A115.2 with VRPD reinforcements 161R Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.2 with RPD reinforcements 161V Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 -/8" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.2 with VRPD reinforcements 61L Bored/Cyl 2 3/4 " backset for universal Leverset: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.2 (3 1/2" minimum rose) 86 Mortise lock: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4" backset) per ANSI A115.1 86ED Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 86EDR Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 with RPD reinforcements 86EDV Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1) with VRPD reinforcements 86R Mortise lock for escutcheon trim: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.1 with RPD reinforcements 86V Mortise lock for escutcheon trim: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.1 with VRPD reinforcements RPD Internal Reinforced for surface Rim Panic Device VRPD Internal Reinforced for surface Vertical Rod Device BLANK Blank without prep or reinforcement. Must also be used to designate devices like deadlock only. Active lock is "BLANK" PP Internal Reinforcements for Push / Pull plates SPCL Special active lock prep per hardware manufacturer's template. Must also be used to designate devices like Concealed Vertical Rods, Mag Locks, etc. UNIT Unit lock prep Example: • Top line door ordering nomenclature example: L 18 UL 4 30 70 FR • Door lock prep: 61L (see below for other hardware code options) • Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. Tornado Code Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1" x 2 1/4 " front with 2 3/8" backset) per ANSI A115.2 Hurricane Preparation description Elevations Code Lights and Louvers Door lock preparation designations using catalog codes Doors Door lock preparation designations Variations Door hardware prep nomenclature options Steelcraft ordering nomenclature is described in the General Section of this manual on page 12-13. The following information deals only with the nomenclature for ordering hardware preparations in Steelcraft doors. In addition to the guide shown on page 12-13, the following is a detailed list of hardware ordering codes which will be additional suffixes to the top line Steelcraft ordering nomenclature. Frames Doors Variations Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Specialty Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 233 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 03/07/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Tornado Frames Doors Door deadlock preparation Door lock preparation designations using catalog codes Code Preparation description Code Preparation description 160-48 Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/8" backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 48" above bottom of frame D7J Schlage Deadlock: Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535 160-60 Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/8" backset per ANSI A115.2t) @ 60" above bottom of frame Example: 160-SP Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/8" backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location 160-4-48 Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 48" above bottom of frame 160-4-60 Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 60" above bottom of frame 160-4-SP Bored/Cyl: (1" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location 161-48 Bored/Cyl: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 48" above bottom of frame 161-60 Bored/Cyl: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 60" above bottom of frame 161-SP Bored/Cyl: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front with 2 3/4 " backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location 161ED-48 Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front per ANSI A115.2): @ 48" above bottom of frame 161ED-60 Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front per ANSI A115.2): @ 60" above bottom of frame 161ED-SP Edge cutout only: (1 1/8" x 2 1/4" front per ANSI A115.2): @ special location 86-48 Mortise lock: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ 48" above bottom of frame 86-60 Mortise lock: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ 60" above bottom of frame 86-SP Mortise lock: (1 1/4" x 8" front with 2 3/4 " backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ special location 86ED-48 Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 @ 48" above bottom of frame 86ED-60 Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 @ 60" above bottom of frame 86ED-SPL Edge cutout only: (1 1/4" x 8" front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.13 @ special location PP Additional push/pull reinforcements SPCL Special Deadlock prep per hardware manufacturer's template. Must also be used to designate deadlocks • Top line door ordering nomenclature example: L 18 UL 4 30 70 FR • • Door lock prep: 61L • Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60 Door deadlock prep: 161-60 (see below for other hardware code options) Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Deadlock options 234 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Inactive leaf options ASA-60 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 @ 60" above bottom of frame ASAR 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2and RPD reinforcements ASA-SP 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2@ special location ASAV 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 and VRPD reinforcements BLANK No preparation or reinforcement CYL 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2@ standard location CYL-48 2 3/4" with lip per AaNSI A115.2 located @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL-60 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2located @ 60" above bottom of frame CYLR 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2and RPD reinforcements CYL-SP 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2@ special location CYLV 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2 and VRPD reinforcements RPD Internal reinforced for surface Rim Panic Device SPCL Strike prep per template VRPD Internal Reinforced for surface Vertical Rod Device Code Preparation description DA3 (60" location) Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535(page 15) NA3 (48" location) Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535 (page 15) Example: • Top line door ordering nomenclature example: L 18 UL 4 30 70 FR • • • Door lock prep: 61L • Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60 ASA Door deadlock prep: 161-60 Door inactive leaf strike prep: ASA (see below for other hardware code options) Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13 Elevations 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 @ 48" above bottom of frame Lights and Louvers ASA-48 Example: Schlage #10-055 strike in inactive leaf Doors 4 7/8" ASA with lip @ standard location per ANSI A115.2 Variations Preparation description ASA Frames Code Door lock strike preparation designations using catalog codes Variations Door inactive leaf strike preparation Tornado Code Preparation description Code Preparation description CLOSER Closer reinforced @ hinge side on both faces 4 1/2 STD HINGE OMIT CLOSER No closer reinforcement (labeled doors with spring hinges) 4 1/2" template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge FULL WIDTH Closer reinforced. full width both faces 4 1/2 UNIVERSAL 4 1/2" universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134/.180 wt) hinge – field converted FULL WIDTH T/B Closer reinforced full width both faces top & bottom of door 4 1/2 OMIT HOLES 4 1/2" hinge prep without attaching holes 4" HINGES TOP / BOTTOM Closer reinforced @ hinge side both faces and at top and bottom of door 4" template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge 12 Gauge CLOSER Closer reinforced @ hinge side both faces 5" UNIVERSAL 5" template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge SPCL Special or concealed prep per template BLANK HINGE No prep or reinforcement BLANK HINGE W/ EDGE REINF FOR CONTINUOUS HINGE With internal edge reinforcement no edge preparations: Steelcraft's standard door width (WITH STANDARD 3/16" UNDERSIZE) Note: When ordering, downsize nominal door width accordingly. Example: • • • • Door lock prep: 61L • Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60 ASA CLOSER Door deadlock prep: 161-60 Door inactive leaf strike prep: ASA Door closer prep: CLOSER (see below for other hardware code options) Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. BLANK HINGE W/ FACE REINF FOR CONTINUOUS HINGE With internal face reinforcement no edge preparations: Steelcraft's standard door width (WITH CONTINUOUS HINGE STANDARD 3/16" UNDERSIZE). Note: when ordering, downsize nominal door width accordingly. SPCL Prep per template. SURFACE BUTT HINGE REINF Internally reinforced for surface hinge per template CONTINUOUS HINGE PER MANUFACTURERS' PART NUMBER (UNDERSIZED PER TEMPLATE) Reinforcement and door sizing per hinge manufacturer's templates • 235 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance Top line door ordering nomenclature example: L 18 UL 4 30 70 FR Fire Rated Products • Hardware Door hinge preparations Specialty Door closer preparations Hurricane Closer and hinge options General Information Home Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Tornado Frames Doors Strikes in strike jambs Frame strike preparation Common frame strike preparation using catalog codes Code Preparation description Code Preparation description ASA 4 7/8" ASA with lip located @ standard location per ANSI A115.2 S27 3 -/2" Deadlock strike located @ 60" above bottom of frame ASA-48 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 48" above bottom of frame S38 2 3/4 " Deadlock strike located @ 60" above bottom of frame ASA-60 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 60" above bottom of frame S40 3 1/2" Deadlock strike located @ 48" above bottom of frame ASA-SP 4 7/8" ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ special location above bottom of frame S41 3" Deadlock strike located @ 48" above bottom of frame BLANK No preparation or reinforcement S43 2 3/4 " Deadlock strike located @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL 2 3/4" with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ standard location S91 3" Deadlock strike located @ 60" above bottom of frame CYL-48 2 3/4" CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL-60 2 3/4" CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 60" above bottom of frame CYL-SP 2 3/4" CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ special location above bottom of frame RPD Reinforced in the soffit for surface Rim Panic Device SPCL Strike prep per template SB FACE Internally reinforced for surface bolt on face SB SOFFIT Internally reinforced for surface bolt in soffit SPCL Special flush bolt reinforcement per manufacturer's template (pairs or double doors) UNIVERSAL Universal Flush bolt strike per ANSI A115.4 Example: • Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 SJ R • Frame strike prep in strike jamb: ASA (see below for other hardware code options) • Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 SJ R ASA Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Frames 236 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Closer preps in single door frames Reinforced for top jamb closer application: located @ center of the double door opening CS Closer sleeve reinforced: Single door frame TJ FULL WIDTH CS C/L IN HEAD Closer sleeve reinforced located @ center of the double door opening Reinforced for top jamb closer application: reinforced full width of head TJ/PA CS FULL WIDTH Closer sleeve reinforced full width of head Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Single door frame OMIT CLOSER No closer reinforcement: used on labeled frames with spring hinges TJ/PA C/L HEAD Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: located @ center of the double door opening PA Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Single door frame TJ/PA FULL Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: reinforced full width of head PA C/L IN HEAD Reinforced in soffit for coordinator application: located @ center of the double door opening TJ/RA Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Single door frame PA FULL WIDTH Reinforced in soffit for coordinator application: reinforced full width of head TJ/RA C/L HEAD PA/RA Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Single door frame Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: located @ center of the double door opening TJ/RA FULL Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: reinforced full width of head PA/RA FULL Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: reinforced full width of head RA Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Single door frame RA C/L IN HEAD RA FULL WIDTH • Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 30 HD Reinforced in face for regular arm application: located @ center of the double door opening • Frame closer prep in single door frame head: PA/RA (see below for other hardware code options) Reinforced in face for regular arm application: reinforced full width of head • Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 30 HD PA/RA Closer preps in double door frames Frame closer preparation CB ACTIVE SIDE Corner bracket reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce active only CB BOTH ENDS Corner bracket reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce both openings CS ACTIVE SIDE Closer sleeve reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce active only CS BOTH ENDS Closer sleeve reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce both openings TJ BOTH ENDS Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings TJ/PA ACTIVE Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only TJ/PA BOTH ENDS Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings TJ/RA ACTIVE Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings PA BOTH ENDS Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings TJ/RA BOTH ENDS PA/RA ACTIVE Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce active only Example: PA/RA BOTH ENDS Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings PA/RA C/L HEAD Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: located @ center of the double door opening RA ACTIVE SIDE Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce active only RA BOTH ENDS Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings • Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 60 HD • Frame closer prep in double door frame head: "Surface closer prep" on page 265 (see below for other hardware code options) • Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 60 HD PA/RA BOTH ENDS Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. • 237 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/23/20 • Technical data manual • Performance Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Double door opening, reinforce active only Fire Rated Products PA ACTIVE SIDE Hardware Preparation description Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only Specialty Code TJ ACTIVE SIDE Tornado Special closer reinforcement per manufacturer's templates. Designation also used for Concealed Closers, Holders & Stops Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. Hurricane SPCL Example: Elevations Corner bracket reinforced: Single door frame Lights and Louvers Preparation description CB Doors TJ C/L IN HEAD Code Variations Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Single door frame Frames TJ Variations Frame closer preparations General Information Home Hardware preparations • Hardware preparations: Nomenclature Tornado Frames Doors Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Hinge preps in door frames Example: Frame hinge preparations • 3 1/2" template hinge prep for standard duty (.123 wt) hinge for 1 3/8" door frames Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 HJ • Frame hinge prep in hinge jamb: 5" UNIVERSAL (see below for other hardware code options) 4 1/2 HVY WT 4 1/2" template hinge prep for heavy duty (.180 wt) hinge • 4 1/2 STD WT 4 1/2" template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 HJ 5" UNIVERSAL 4 1/2 UNIV FULL 4 1/2" universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134 /.180 wt) hinge: field converted. Reinforced full width of jamb. 4 1/2 UNIVERSAL 4 1/2" universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134 /.180 wt) hinge: field converted 4 STD WT 4" template hinge prep for standard duty (.130 wt) hinge 5 UNIV FULL 5" universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.145 /.190 wt) hinge: field converted. Reinforced full width of jamb 5" UNIVERSAL 5" universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.145 /.190 wt) hinge: field converted 5" HVY WT 5" hinge prep for heavy duty (.190 wt) hinge 5" STD WT 5" hinge prep for standard duty (.145 wt) hinge BLANK HINGE No preparation or reinforcement CONT FACE REINF Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame face: internally reinforced on face CONT FACE W/O Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame face: not internally reinforced CONT RABT REINF Continuous Hinge, mounted to the frame rabbet: internally reinforced on rabbet CONT RABT W/O Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame rabbet: not internally reinforced CONT SPECIAL Continuous Hinge, located and reinforced per manufacturer's template FULL SURFACE Reinforced for butt type hinge per size and template specified SPCL Hinge prep per template Code Preparation description 3 1/2 STD WT Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Miscellaneous preps in door frames Frame coordinator preparation Code Preparation description FACE MOUNTED Coordinator (Cam action) reinforcement: face reinforced at center of frame head SOFFIT MOUNTED Coordinator (Soffit mounted) reinforcement: soffit reinforced full frame width SPCL Coordinator: reinforced per template Frame removable mullion preparations Code Preparation description DBL RABBET HM MULL PREP Removable mullion preparation for double rabbeted hollow metal mullion REM HDWE MULL REINF ONLY Removable mullion reinforcement for hardware mullion SGL RABBET HM MULL PREP Removable mullion preparation for single rabbeted hollow metal mullion 238 • Example: • Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 60 HD • • Frame closer prep in single door frame head: PA/RA • Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5 3/4 60 HD PA/RA FACE MOUNTED Frame coodinator prep in head: FACE MOUNTED (see below for other hardware code options) Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13. • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/25/20 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Locks KNOB trim or deadlock applications Doors For Bored/Cylindrical locksets conforming to ANSI A115.2 Variations • • Frames 161 Lock prep Variations Door preps: Locks 2 3/4" backset Lights and Louvers 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/8" dia. 161 for full lock prep • Prep options: 161-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 161ED for edge prep only • Prep options: 161-SPL = special location 161R = with RPD reinforcements 161V = with VRPD reinforcement 161ED-48 = 48" above bottom of frame Tornado • • • • • 161-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 161ED-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 161ED-SPL = special location 161EDR = with RPD reinforcements 161EDV = with VRPD reinforcement Specialty 4 5/8" Hardware 3 1/2" 6 1/2" Fire Rated Products Lock reinforcement detail • 16 gauge Projection welded Format Textor edge Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment • 239 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 • Technical data manual • Performance • • Hurricane • • • • • Elevations 1 1/8" 1 1/8" General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Locks Frames Variations Doors • • For Bored/Cylindrical locksets conforming to ANSI A115.2 KNOB trim or deadlock applications Backset Lights and Louvers Variations 160 & 160-4 Lock prep 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 2 1/8" dia. 1" Tornado 160 for 2 3/8" backset Prep options: 160ED for edge prep only Prep options: • • • • • • 160-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 160-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 160-SPL = special location 160ED-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 160ED-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 160ED-SPL = special location 160-4 for 2 3/4" backset Prep options: • • • 4 5/8" 160-4-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 160-4-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 160-SPL = special location Specialty Hurricane Elevations 1" 3 1/2" Hardware 6 1/2" Lock reinforcement detail • 16 gauge Projection welded Format Text or edge Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products • • 240 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Locks 61L Lock prep Variations Doors LEVER trim or deadlock applications Frames For Bored/Cylindrical locksets conforming to ANSI A115.18 Variations • • 4 5/8" 3 1/2" 2 3/4" Backset Lights and Louvers 6 1/2" 2 1/4" 61L for full lock prep Prep options: Lock reinforcement detail • 16 gauge 61L-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 61L-60 = 60" above bottom of frame • • Projection welded Format Textor edge Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment 61L-SPL = special location Tornado 61LR = with RPD reinforcements 61LV = with VRPD reinforcement Note: for locks installed in this prep must include Rose (trim with minimum 3 7/16" diameters. Hurricane • • • • • Elevations 1 1/8" Specialty 3 1/4" Hardware 2 1/8" Fire Rated Products Performance • 241 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Locks Frames Variations Doors • • For Mortise locksets conforming to ANSI A115.1 Preparation for full escutcheon trim 1-1/2˝1-1/2˝ 1-1/2˝ 7-3/16˝ 7-3/16˝ 7-3/16˝ 8˝ Tornado 86 for full lock prep options: • 86-48 = 48" above bottom of frame 86-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 86-SPL = special location 86R = with RPD reinforcements 86RV = with VRPD reinforcement 8˝ 1-1/4˝1-1/4˝ 1-1/4˝ Front Front Front 2-3/4˝2-3/4˝ 2-3/4˝ Backset Backset Backset • • • • 8˝8˝ 8˝8˝ 1-1/4˝1-1/4˝ 1-1/4˝ Front Front Front 86ED for edge prep only options: • 86ED-48 = 48" above bottom of frame • • • • 86ED-60 = 60" above bottom of frame 86ED-SPL = special location 86DR = with RPD reinforcements 86EDV = with VRPD reinforcement 4-3/4˝4-3/4˝ 4-3/4˝ Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations 86 Lock prep 9-1/2˝9-1/2˝ 9-1/2˝ 11˝11˝ Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products 11˝ Lock reinforcement detail • 14 gauge • • 242 • Projection welded Format Textor edge Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Locks 86 Lock prep for commercial and institutional applications • Nomenclature varies with lock catalogue requirements Preparation for sectional trim per Steelcraft hardware catalogs Nomenclature "SPECIAL" designates templated hardware prep is required. Lock number and template number must be specified Varies as specified 4-3/4˝ Varies Varies asas specified specified 4-3/4˝ 9-1/2˝ Lights and Louvers 8˝ Varies as specified Doors • Variations For Mortise locksets conforming to ANSI A115.1 Frames Special lock prep • • Variations 7C6 Lock prep 11˝ 9-1/2˝ 8˝ 11˝ 1-1/4˝ Front 1-1/4˝ Front • • Projection welded Format Textor edge Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment Tornado 7C6 for Schlage L9050, L9453, L9456, L9473, L9485 (RH/ LH) • 7C6 = Refer to Steelcraft Hardware Catalogs for all prep designations Lock reinforcement detail • 14 gauge Hurricane 2-3/4˝ Backset Elevations 2-3/4˝ Backset Specialty Special Designation for sectional trim when ordered by manufacturers template numbers • Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 243 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations Doors Variations General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Door preps: Exit devices Push/Pull Prep • For Push/Pull plate trim Hinge Side Lights and Louvers 4˝ (101mm) Tornado Hurricane Elevations 17˝ (432mm) 42˝ (1068mm) Notes: 1. Push Pull reinforcements are 14 gauge steel. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 2. Both faces are reinforced as shown. 244 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Rim panic prep Hinge Side Hinge Side Hinge Side Hinge Side 4-7/8˝ (124mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) 10˝ (254mm) 10˝ (254mm) 10˝ (254mm) 10˝ (254mm) Note #1 Note #1 Note #2 Note #2 Lights and Louvers 17˝ 17˝ (432mm) (432mm) 10˝ Typ. 10˝(254mm) Typ. (254mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) Doors Door Reinforcements Variations Door Reinforcements Door Reinforcements Frames For surface Rim Panic Devices Variations • Elevations RPD RPD For Rim Panic Reinforcements only RPD RPD variations RPD variations Full lock prep options: 86R = 86 lock prep for full escutcheon trim 61LR = 61L lock prep for lever trim 160R = 160 lock prep for knob trim 161R = 161 lock prep for knob trim Specialty • • • • Edge only lock prep options: • • • 86EDR = 86 lock prep with edge prep only 161EDR = 161 lock prep with edge prep only 160EDR = 160 lock prep with edge prep only RPD variation preps include the primary (standard) lock prep as specifiedAv 2. Primary lock ordering codes suffixed with the letter "R" (i.e. 86R, 86EDR) include additional exit reinforcements above and below the primary reinforcements Fire Rated Products 3. Reinforcement is made of 14 gauge material Hardware Notes: 1. Tornado RPD variations Rim Panic reinforcements on hinge side with Standard lock prep and reinforcement Hurricane For Rim Panic Reinforcements only For Rim Panic Reinforcements only Performance • 245 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Frames Doors Variations Variations Vertical rod prep • For surface Vertical Rod Panic Devices 1-1/4˝ (32 mm) Hinge Side 1-1/4˝ (32 mm) Hinge Side 4-7/8˝ (124 mm) Lights and Louvers 4-7/8˝ (124 mm) Note #1 17˝ (432 mm) 10˝ (254 mm) 10˝ (254 mm) Tornado 39-9/16” (1005 mm) for cylindrical locks (160, 161, 61L) 40-3/4˝ (1035 mm) 39-3/16” (995 mm) for mortise locks (86) 3/4” Undercut 3/4” Undercut VRPD For Vertical Rod Panic Reinforcements only. VRPD variations Vertical Rod Panic reinforcements on hinge side with standard Prep options are not available. lock prep and reinforcement Full lock prep options: • • • • • • • • Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Note #2 86V = 86 lock prep for full escutcheon trim 61LV = 61L lock prep for lever trim 160V = 160 lock prep for knob trim 161V = 161 lock prep for knob trim Edge only lock prep options: 86EDV = 86 lock prep with edge prep only 161EDV = 161 lock prep with edge prep only 160EDV = 160 lock prep with edge prep only Fire Rated Products Notes: 1. 2. Primary lock ordering codes suffixed with the letter "V" (i.e. 86V, 86EDV) include additional exit reinforcements above and below the primary reinforcements 3. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. Performance Architectural VRPD variation preps include the primary (standard) lock prep as specified. 4. Reinforcement is made of 14 gauge material 246 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Special: Concealed vertical rod exit device prep Frames Variations Doors Preparation concealed vertical rod devices Variations • Hinge Side 1-1/4˝ (32mm) 4-7/8˝ (124mm) Lights and Louvers 10˝ (254mm) Elevations Tornado Notes: 1. Hurricane 3/4˝ Undercut See note #4 Concealed vertical rod preps are always ordered as "SPECIAL", per manufacturer's templates. Specialty 2. Illustrated above are the typical internal reinforcing channels for L, B, CE, and T Series doors. 3. Top and bottom channel preparations vary per manufacturer's templates. Hardware 4. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. Fire Rated Products Performance • 247 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Frames Variations Special: Von Duprin inpact™ (94/9547) concealed vertical rod integral exit device Hinge Side 1-1/4˝ (32mm) Lights and Louvers Doors Variations 2-3/4˝ (70mm) backset Mounting channel (16 Gauge) 38-7/8˝ (987mm) Mounting bracket (8 Gauge) Tornado Hurricane Elevations See Note #2 Opening for vertical rod Specialty 3/4˝ Undercut See note #4 Notes: 1. Available in 18 and 16 gauge only. 2. Minimum nominal door width is 2'6" • • 24 1/16" for doors under 2'10" in nominal door width. 30 1/16" for doors 2'10" and over in nominal door width 4. Illustrated above are the typical internal reinforcing channels for L and T Series doors. 5. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware 3. Cross bar (prep) width: 248 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/28/20 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Exit devices Special: Von Duprin inpact™ (94/9575) mortise lock device Variations Frames Variations Doors Hinge Side Lights and Louvers See Note #2 Mounting channel (16 Gauge) Elevations 47-3/8˝ (1203 mm) Mounting bracket (8 Gauge) 38-7/8˝ (987 mm) Tornado Specialty Notes: 1. Hurricane 3/4” Undercut See note #4 Available in 18 and 16 gauge only. 2. Minimum nominal door width is 2'6" 3. Cross bar (prep) width: 24 1/16" for doors under 2'10" in nominal door width. Hardware • • 30 1/16" for door 2'10" and over in nominal door width 4. Illustrated above are the typical internal reinforcing channels for L and T Series doors. Fire Rated Products 5. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. 6. Prep requires special strike location in frames. Performance • 249 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/19/20 • Technical data manual • Frames Door preps: Inactive leaves ASA Prep without astragal • • For 4 7/8" lip strike Preparation for full inactive leaf with astragal Lights and Louvers Doors Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Variations Variations General Information Home 3-3/8˝ Lip 7 5/8” 39-9/16˝ (See Note 2) Tornado Hurricane Elevations 4-7/8˝ Specialty ASA Strike Prep Detail • 16 gauge reinforcement 3/4˝ Undercut Notes: 1. Prep is for fully mortised 4 7/8" ASA strike, commonly used on a wide inactive leaf. 2. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Elevation Detail with ASA Strike 250 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves ASA Prep with astragal Variations Doors Preparation for full inactive leaf with astragal Frames For 4 7/8" lip strike Variations • • Lights and Louvers 8˝ Elevations Tornado Astragal attachment Detail Specialty Strike Prep Elevation Detail Hardware Notes: 1. "Z" Astragal is required. Prep is for fully mortised 4 7/8" ASA strike. • • • Hurricane ASA in astragal is at 39-9/16" See Note #2 Cut outs on the edge of the door are for clearance only. 4-7/8˝ Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment. Attaching tabs for strike attachment are included on the astragal. 2. Center line of bottom prep is located 39 9/16" above the bottom edge of the door, unless otherwise specified Fire Rated Products 3-3/8˝ Lip 3. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcraft's standard 3/4" undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly. Performance Final Assembly Detail • 251 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Frames Variations Doors • • • Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair Cutouts for Flush bolts in inactive leafs For Flush Bolts (Manual or Automatic) conforming to ANSI A115.4 Hinge Side Hinge Side 1-1/4˝ x 7-1/4˝ edge cutout for flush bolts Refer to page 281 39-3/16˝ 1-1/4˝ x 8˝ edge cutout for strike Refer to page 279 for 86ED Prep Tornado Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Flush bolts with astragal Inactive leaf with astragal Note: option does not have a strike preparation on the edge Inactive leaf with astragal ASA Prep options: Notes: • • • • Strike for primary lock: 1. Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment. 2. Attaching tabs for flush bolts and strikes are included on the astragal. Cut outs on the edge of the door are for clearance only. 3. Details above, address inactive leafs when ordered as individual leafs. 4. When ordering double doors as pairs specify the primary lock and auxiliary locks on the active leaf. Primary Strike designations for the inactive leaf are not required, however strikes for auxiliary locks must be specified. Architectural ASA = 4 7/8" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame CYL = 2 3/4" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame BLANK = no prep but deadlock above SPECIAL = Special strike per manufacturer's template Strike for deadlock lock: • • • • • • ASA-48 = 4 7/8" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame ASA-60 = 4 7/8" strike 60" above bottom of frame CYL-48 = 2 3/4" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL-60 = 2 3/4" strike 60" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-48 = 48" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-60 = 60" above bottom of frame Strike for both primary lock and deadlock lock: Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty 3/4˝ Undercut Specify nomenclature coded for both locks Example: ASA x ASA-60 = primary strike @ 40 5/16" and deadlock strike @ 60" above bottom of the frame 252 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Flush bolts with astragal (astragal attachment detail) (See Note 3) Elevations 7-1/4˝ Cutout Lights and Louvers 1-1/4˝ Cutout Doors For Flush Bolts (Manual or Automatic) conforming to ANSI A115.4 Variations Preparation for Flush bolts and strikes in the inactive leaf and Astragal Frames Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair Variations • • • 6-3/4˝ Tornado Hurricane (See Note 2) Astragal attachment Detail Specialty Flush bolt Elevation Detail Notes: "Z" Astragal is required. Prep is for fully mortised Flush Bolts (manual or auto). • • • Hardware 1. Cut outs on the edge of the door are for clearance only. Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment Attaching tabs for Flush bolts attachment are included on the astragal. Fire Rated Products 2. Center line of bottom prep is located 12" above the bottom edge of the door, unless otherwise specified 3. Top prep location varies as specified. Standard location options are 12", 18", 24", 30" or 36" from the top edge of the door. Performance Final Assembly Detail Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • • 253 Architectural Details are subject to change without prior notice. General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Frames Variations Doors • • • Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair Cutouts for Flush bolts in inactive leafs For Flush Bolts (Manual or Automatic) conforming to ANSI A115.4 Flush bolt preps with attaching tabs typical Refer to page 283 for details 39-9/16˝ Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Flush bolts without astragal 3/4˝ Undercut Inactive leaf without astragal Note: option does not have a strike preparation on the edge Hardware Inactive leaf without astragal ASA Prep options: Strike for primary lock: Notes: Fire Rated Products Strike prep with attaching tabs Refer to page 278 for details 1. Flush bolt and strike preparations are fully mortised into the in active leaf door edge. 2. Details above, address inactive leafs when ordered as individual leafs. 3. When ordering double doors as pairs specify the primary lock and auxiliary locks on the active leaf. Primary Strike designations for the inactive leaf are not required, however strikes for auxiliary locks must be specified. • • • • ASA = 4 7/8" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame CYL = 2 3/4" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame BLANK = no prep but deadlock above SPECIAL = Special strike per manufacturer's template Strike for deadlock lock: • • • • • • ASA-48 = 4 7/8" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame ASA-60 = 4 7/8" strike 60" above bottom of frame CYL-48 = 2 3/4" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL-60 = 2 3/4" strike 60" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-48 = 48" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-60 = 60" above bottom of frame Strike for both primary lock and deadlock lock: Architectural Performance Specify nomenclature coded for both locks Example: ASA x ASA-60 = primary strike @ 40 5/16" and deadlock strike @ 60" above bottom of the frame 254 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/4/16 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Flush bolts without astragal (flush bolt prep detail) For Flush Bolts (Manual or Automatic) conforming to ANSI A115.4 (See Note 3) Doors Preparation for Flush bolts and strikes in inactive leaves Variations Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair Frames Used in a wide inactive leaf Variations • • • • Lights and Louvers Elevations 6-3/4˝ 9˝ Tornado Hurricane 1˝ (See Note 2) Specialty Flush bolt Elevation Detail Flush bolt Prep Detail • 16 gauge reinforcement 1. Hardware Notes: Prep is for fully mortised Flush Bolts (manual or auto) 2. Center line of bottom prep is located 12" above the bottom edge of the door, unless otherwise specified. Fire Rated Products 3. Top prep location varies as specified. Standard location options are 12", 18", 24", 30" or 36" from the top edge of the door. Performance • 255 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Frames Variations Surface bolts without astragal • • Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair Surface Bolt reinforcements in inactive leafs Hinge Side 8˝ Hinge Side Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Variations 4-3/4˝ Tornado Hurricane 39-9/16˝ Specialty 3/4˝ Undercut Inactive leaf without astragal Note: option does not have a strike preparation on the edge Strike for primary lock: 1. Details above, address inactive leafs when ordered as individual leafs. 2. When ordering double doors as pairs specify the primary lock and auxiliary locks on the active leaf. Primary Strike designations for the inactive leaf are not required, however strikes for auxiliary locks must be specified. 3. Surface bolt reinforcement data: • • Reinforcements are 14 gauge steel Both faces are reinforced at the top and bottom on the lock edge • • • • ASA = 4 7/8" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame CYL = 2 3/4" strike @ 40 5/16 above bottom of frame BLANK = no prep but deadlock above SPECIAL = Special strike per manufacturer's template Strike for deadlock lock: • • • • • • ASA-48 = 4 7/8" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame ASA-60 = 4 7/8" strike 60" above bottom of frame CYL-48 = 2 3/4" strike @ 48" above bottom of frame CYL-60 = 2 3/4" strike 60" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-48 = 48" above bottom of frame SPECIAL-60 = 60" above bottom of frame Strike for both primary lock and deadlock lock: Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Notes: Architectural Inactive leaf without astragal ASA Prep options: Specify nomenclature coded for both locks Example: ASA x ASA-60 = primary strike @ 40 5/16" and deadlock strike @ 60" above bottom of the frame 256 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Door preps: Inactive leaves Closer prep Variations Doors 20˝ (508mm) Frames For Surface Closers Internally reinforced on both faces Variations • • 3/4˝ (19mm) 6˝ (152mm) Hinge Side Hinge Side Hinge Side Lights and Louvers Elevations Tornado • SPECIAL = special size reinforcement • TOP/BOTTOM = standard reinforcement at top and bottom FULL WIDTH = 14 gauge reinforcement full door width FULL WIDTH TB = 14 gauge reinforcement full door width at top and bottom All surface closer reinforcements are 14 gauge unless otherwise specified. Hardware • • Notes: 1. Closer Prep options: Full Width Top & Bottom Shown Specialty Closer for surface closers Prep options: Top & Bottom Hurricane Standard 2. Reinforcement heights are as follows: 6" = all door designs except doors with G, LG or FG glass lights • 4 7/8" = doors with G, LG or FG glass lights Fire Rated Products • 20˝ Closer Reinforcement Detail • 14 gauge steel • 257 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • Performance 6˝ Frames Door preps: Hinges Hinge prep • • 1/4˝ Backset 1/4˝ Backset 4-1/2˝ 5˝ 4-1/2” Universal Hinge Detail 5” Universal Hinge Detail For templated mortise hinges Internally reinforced with 7 gauge (.187") Lights and Louvers Doors Hardware preparations • Door preps: Hinges Variations Variations General Information Home Tornado 4˝ Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 1/4˝ Backset 4” Hinge Detail L20 & CE 20 Series Only Standard hinge prep elevation detail Hinge options: • When no hinge prep is specified door is prepped for 4 1/2" universal hinges: • • 5" HINGE = 5" Universal hinge: see below 4" HINGE = 4" standard duty template hinge Note: L20 & CE 20 Series only • • SPECIAL = Special hinge prep per template BLANK HINGE = No hinge preps, standard door width 10˝ Fire Rated Products 9-3/16˝ Architectural Performance 1-1/4˝ 4-1/2˝ & 5˝ Universal Hinge Detail 7 Gauge Reinforcement .187” thick 258 • 1-1/8˝ 4” Hinge Detail Reinforcement .125” thick • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Doors Reinforcement Variations Typical Preparation Frames ASA Strike prep Variations Frame preps: Strikes Lights and Louvers 4-7/8˝ Elevations Hardware The normal lip on the strike is 1 1/4" (32 mm). This allows the strike lip to extend beyond the frame face providing a guide for the latch bolt. The lip is omitted on deadlock strikes. Fire Rated Products Reinforcement The reinforcement used is a specially formed 16 gauge steel part and is projection welded to the door rabbet of the strike jamb. The reinforcement includes extruded attaching holes to provide adequate threads for the strike plate screws. The reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box that is deep enough to receive the 1" (25 mm) throw latch bolt or deadbolt. Performance Template Lock manufacturers template should be reviewed carefully to insure the strike being used will function in the preparation. Although Steelcraft's preparation meets or exceeds the ANSI standard, some manufacturer's strikes may not fit properly in the cutout or provide enough lip extension. • 259 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • Specialty Fire ratings The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes can be used in fire rated frames with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. Tornado Description ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes are 4 7/8" (124 mm) high and 11/4" (32 mm) wide. The centerline of the strike is located 40 5/16" (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. This location will function with the ANSI. A115.1 and A115.2 locks and the mortise exit devices. The location for deadbolts must be adjusted (normally 48" [1219 mm] from the bottom of the frame) to match the deadlock being used. The centerline of the strike is located 15/16" (24 mm) from the stop of the strike jamb. Specification compliance The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Hurricane General information The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes are designed to function with the ANSI A115.1 and 115.2 locks and mortise exit devices. Some mortise and bored-in deadlocks will function with these strikes. General Information Home Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Frames Variations Doors Typical Preparation Lights and Louvers Variations CYL Strike prep Reinforcement Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations 2-3/4˝ General information The ANSI A115.3 strike is designed to function with the ANSI A115.2 and 115.3 locks and bored-in deadlocks. Description ANSI A115.3 strike is 2 3/4" (70 mm) high and 1 1/8" (28 mm) wide. The centerline of the strike is located 40 5/16" (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. This location will function with the ANSI A115.2 and A115.3 locks. The location must be adjusted (normally 48" [1219 mm] from the bottom of the frame to match the deadlock being used. The centerline of the strike is located 15/16" (24 mm) from the stop of the strike jamb ANSI standard, some manufacturer's strikes may not fit properly in the cutout or provide enough lip extension. Specification compliance The ANSI A115.3 strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Fire ratings The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes can be used in fire rated frames with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. The normal lip on the strike is 1 1/4" (32 mm). This allows the strike lip to extend beyond the frame face providing a guide for the latch bolt. The lip is omitted on deadlock strikes. Reinforcement The reinforcement used is a 14 gauge steel part and is projection welded to the frame rabbet. The reinforcement includes extruded attaching holes to provides adequate threads for the strike plate screws. The reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box welded to the reinforcement that is deep enough to receive the 1" (25 mm) throw latch bolt or deadbolt. Template Lock manufacturers template should be reviewed carefully to insure the strike being used will function in the preparation. Although Steelcraft's preparation meets or exceeds the 260 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Dead lock strike prep Frames Variations Doors Reinforcement Variations Typical Preparation Lights and Louvers Elevations 14 Gauge (1.7mm) Reinforcement Tornado Specification compliance The deadlock strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Hurricane Specialty General information Deadlock strikes are normally rectangular shaped non-lip type strikes that are designed to work with bored-in or mortise deadlocks. A lip strike can be used if the cutout for the deadbolt is located properly and is the correct size. Hardware Description The deadlock strike preparation is a rectangular shaped cutout in the door rabbet of the strike jamb. The centerline of the deadlock strike is located 48" (1219 mm) from the bottom of the frame and the door preparation adjusted to match the strike. Fire Rated Products Reinforcement The reinforcement used is a formed 14 gauge steel plate that is welded to the door rabbet of the strike jamb. The reinforcement provides adequate threads for the strike plate screws. In addition the reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box that is deep enough to receive the 1" (25 mm) throw deadbolt. Template Deadlock strike manufacturer's template should be reviewed carefully for the preparation required in the frame. Performance • 261 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Frames Variations Doors 14 Gauge (1.7mm) Reinforcement Lights and Louvers Variations RPD Rim panic strike prep 44-9/16" (1312mm) Tornado Hurricane Elevations 8-1/2" (216mm) Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Bottom of frame General information Steelcraft's rim exit device strike preparation is designed to function with all rim exit devices. Description The preparation is designed to accept the surface mounted strike supplied by the exit device manufacturer. The strike jamb is reinforced only and all drilling and tapping is done in the field by others. Specification compliance The rim exit device strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door vand Hardware Institute (DHI). Fire ratings RPD strikes are used in fire rated frames in conjunction with doors equipped with Rim Fire Exit Hardware, in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. The centerline of the preparation is located per the exit device manufacturer's template. Reinforcement The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel plate 8 1/2" (216 mm) long by minimum 2" (950 mm) wide, welded to the soffit of the strike jamb. A dust (mortar) guard is not provided. Template Exit device manufacturer's template should be reviewed. 262 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Surface vertical rod strike prep Variations Frames Variations Doors 14 Gauge (1.7mm) Reinforcement Located in the Frame Head Lights and Louvers Elevations 14" (356mm) Tornado Hurricane Specialty Description The preparation is designed to accept the surface mounted strike supplied by the exit device manufacturer. The head of the frame is reinforced only and all drilling and tapping is done in the field by others. The preparation is located in the soffit area and in the center of the frame head. Specification compliance The vertical rod exit device strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Fire ratings Vertical Rod strikes are used in fire rated frames in conjunction with pairs of doors equipped with Surface Vertical Rod Fire Exit Hardware, in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. Fire Rated Products Reinforcement The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel plate 14" (356 mm) long by 2" (50 mm) wide, welded to the soffit of the frame header. The plate is held to the door side of the jamb. A dust (mortar) box is not provided. Performance Template Exit device manufacturers template should be reviewed carefully to insure the strike being used will function in the preparation. • 263 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • Hardware General information Steelcraft's vertical rod exit device strike preparation is designed to function with all vertical rod exit devices. General Information Home Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Strikes Lock Reinforcement Frames Lights and Louvers Doors Universal Flush Bolt Strike Preparation Variations Variations Universal flush bolt strike prep Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Strike Plate 14 Gauge (1.7mm) Reinforcement General information Steelcraft's Universal flush bolt strike preparation is designed to be non-handed. The preparation includes a cutout, reinforcement and strike plate that will function with all ANSI flush bolts. Description The preparation includes a cutout located in the door rabbet of the frame header that is large enough to cover both right hand and left hand active openings. A reinforcing plate that is offset to accept a reversible strike/filler is welded into the door rabbet of the frame header. A prime painted strike/filler plate is supplied installed. To change hands it is necessary to remove the strike/filler plate and reinstall for the other hand using the same strike/filler plate and screws. Specification compliance The flush bolt strike preparation meets or exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Fire ratings Universal Flush Bolt strikes are used in fire rated frames in conjunction with pairs of doors equipped with inactive leaf flush bolts, in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. Notes: 1. The flush bolt strike/filler plate is prime painted and installed at the factory for right hand openings. 2. For left hand openings, remove the plate and reinstall as required. Reinforcement Reinforcement: The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel plate of such design to function properly with the flush bolt. The reinforcement is drilled and tapped at the factory. The reinforcements are welded to the door rabbet of the frame header. Strike Plate: Preparation includes a universal prime painted strike plate with attaching screws. A dust (mortar) box is provided. Template Flush bolt manufacturer's template should be reviewed carefully to insure the bolt being used will function in the preparation. 264 • 26 Gauge (0.0mm) Dust Box • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Closers 2" x 14" (50mm x 356mm) 1-1/2" x 14" (38mm x 356mm) Door 3" (76mm) Door Lights and Louvers 3" (76mm) Doors Parallel Arm (PA) Closer Reinforcement 14 Gauge Variations Regular Arm (RA) Closer Reinforcement 14 Gauge Frames Surface closer prep Variations Frame preps: Closers Top Jamb (TJ) Closer Reinforcement 14 Gauge 1-1/2" x 14" (38mm x 356mm) Elevations 3" (76mm) Door Parallel arm closers are used on exterior and interior openings. The closer is mounted on the door face on the push side of the opening. The closer arm is mounted to the 1 9/16" rabbet or the soffit of the head member. Steelcraft identification: PA. • Top jamb mounted closers are used on interior and exterior openings. The closer is mounted on the head of the frame on the non-door head face on the push side of the opening. The closer arm is mounted to the door face. Steelcraft identification: TJ. Fire Rated Products • Note: Frames are not supplied with the closer or holder. Performance The location of the individual reinforcement is such that the degree of opening or the size of the closer or holder does not affect the preparation. Reinforcements for surface mounted holders are similar to the PA mounting for a closer. The holder feet are attached to the soffit of the frame head. • 265 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 • Technical data manual • Hardware Regular arm closers are used on interior doors. The closer is mounted on the face of the door on the pull side of the opening. The closer arm is mounted to the face of the head member. Steelcraft identification: RA. Fire ratings Closer reinforcements are required in all fire rated products. If the reinforcement is omitted, a special marking is required (see Fire Rated Section for information). Specialty • Specification compliance The closer preparation in both frames and doors meets or exceed the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). Tornado Description The reinforcement is welded to the inside face or rabbet of the frame (depends on the closer or holder mounting method). The locations of the reinforcement for each mounting type are as follows: Reinforcement The reinforcement used in the frame is a 14 gauge (1.7 mm) steel plate 1 7/8" x 14" (48 mm x 356 mm) long. Hurricane General information The use of closer reinforcements allows for the surface mounting of a closer or holder on a frame. The extra material that is added to the inside of the frame head provides sufficient material for drilling and taping for the closer or holder mounting screws. Frames Variations Doors Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Hinges Frame preps: Hinges Hinge prep 1-1/2" (38mm) Lights and Louvers Variations General Information Home 9-3/16" (233mm) Elevations 4-1/2"(114mm) or 5" (127mm) Tornado General information Standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) and optional 5" (127 mm) butt hinges are normally used in 1 3/4" (45 mm) doors. Either hinge will support doors up to 4'0" (1219 mm) wide and 10'0" (3048 mm) high (quantity will vary, refer to pages 249-250). The preparation in the door and frame are described as the "Universal" preparation. This means the preparation will convert from a standard to a heavy weight hinge prep by removing the break-off spacer in the field. Description Both the standard 4 1/2" (114 mm) and the optional 5" (127 mm) hinges come in standard and heavy weight. • 4 1/2" (114 mm) = Standard .134" (3 mm) Heavy .180" (5 mm ) • 5" (127 mm) = Standard .140" (4 mm) Heavy .190" (5 mm) 7 Gauge (4.7mm) Universal Hinge Reinforcement Reinforcement The reinforcement used in the door and frame are 7 gauge (4.7 mm) steel and are projection welded to the rabbet of the hinge jamb. The reinforcements include an auxiliary steel spacer. Leave the spacer in place and the standard weight hinge can be used. Remove the spacer and the heavy weight hinge can be used. Refer to the appropriate frame series to insure the patented universal hinge is available. Specification compliance Both the 4 1/2" (114 mm) and 5" (127 mm) hinge preparations meet or exceed the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI). Fire ratings The 4 1/2" (114 mm) or 5" (127 mm) hinge can be used in fire rated products with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. Hinges used must be the "TEMPLATED" Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane 5/16" (8mm) Backset 266 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 4/30/08 Home General Information Hardware preparations • Frame preps: Hinges Continuous hinge prep Variations Doors Half mortise Frames Half surface Variations Full mortise Lights and Louvers Elevations Full mortise (attached to the door edge and frame rabbet) Half surface (attached to the door face and frame rabbet) Half mortise (attached to the door edge and frame face) Full surface (attached to the door and frame faces) Reinforcements include a full length mortar guard (dust box) that can be ordered with or without reinforcing. Mortar Guards are available for full or half mortise continuous hinges (not surface) and are installed as illustrated. Template Hinge manufacturer's information should be reviewed carefully to insure the correct attachment and that the hinge is capable of meeting the requirements of your opening. • 267 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 08/14/17 • Technical data manual • Performance Fire ratings Fire rated continuous hinges are available for openings with ratings from 20 minutes to 3 hours. Check the hinge manufacturer's information on this requirement. Fire Rated Products Attachment to the door and frame can be by sheet metal screws or machine screws. All holes are field drilled or field drilled and tapped. The clearance on the hinge side of the door is adjusted depending on the hinge template. When machine screws are used or when specified additional reinforcement for both the door and frame may be required. The reinforcement is 14 gauge steel, welded to the inside of the door or frame as required by the attachment. Using the hinge as a template, or the template supplied, field drill and tap the proper place on the door and frame for the machine screws and attach the hinge. Hardware Description The type of attachment to the door identifies continuous hinges. The attachment can be Reinforcement When sheet metal screws are used, a reinforcement in both door and frame is not required. Using the hinge as a template or the template supplied, field drill the proper place on the door and frame for the screws and attach the hinge. Specialty General information Continuous hinges are generally used on large heavy doors. They are also used when an opening is subjected to high frequency usage. • • • • Tornado shown with reinforcing plate Hurricane Full length Mortar Guard Full surface Frames Electric preps: Miscellaneous Frame EPT Power transfer prep Typical Frame preparation 10.6" min Hinge reinforcement 9" Reinforcement Power transfer 16 gauge (2.5 mm) reiforcements Elevations Tornado Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Typical hardware assembly Junction box Lights and Louvers Doors Hardware preparations • Electric preps: Miscellaneous Variations Variations General Information Home General information Power transfers are used to provide wiring to a swinging door for electric locks, exit devices etc. Double Wide box option In/out top access. Conduit by others. Description Power Transfers are mortised into the door rabbet of the hinge jamb and into the hinge edges of the door. Top covers on typical junction boxes are removable for installation of conduit connectors and general access Fire ratings EPT Power Transfers are considered auxiliary hardware items and can be used on in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours. Reinforcement The reinforcements are 16 gauge steel plates welded to the jamb. The plate is drilled and tapped for the necessary mounting screws. A dust (mortar) box or junction box is included with this preparation. 4.1" Juction boxes Junction boxes are provided for EPT's and most electrical hardware reinforcements. Knockouts are designed to support both 1/2" or 3/4" conduit. Frame conduit by others. A typical junction box (above) is approximately 10.4” x 2” x 1.6” plus 1/2” welding tabs. Typical hinge reinf is 9.2” long. There may be limitations on requests for hardware or location based on the size of the frame and available space. Double Wide box is available with an engineering detail request on most frames. 2 punchouts on top and bottom of the box creates easier access in and out of one end when wire is fed from above after frame install. Punchouts in both ends for access in heads. Min JD 5 3/4” double, 6” equal, 4.25” single rabbet. Min face 1.75”F, 2” DW/MU. No 14ga DW/MU. Door Raceway prep Raceways for doors use standard flexible 3/4" conduit. Doors without steel stiffened cores run horizontally from near the center of the 2nd hinge from the bottom of the door to the top or bottom of the lock prep. Raceway conduit in doors with steel stiffened cores run from just below the cutout for a power transfer (if applicable) or 2nd hinge from bottom down the edge of the door, around the bottom of the core and reinforcements, up the lock edge to the lock prep for all door heights. Guide brackets are typically welded near the back of the lock reinforcement to terminate the conduit. The conduit connector is attached with castle nut or tack welded in place to lead wires appropriately. 268 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/19/20 Home General Information Variations Doors Three sided frames................................................................... 276 General information......................................................................... 276 Approvals ..............................................................................................277 Profile variations................................................................................ 284 Doors................................................................................................285 General information.........................................................................285 Approvals.............................................................................................. 287 Transom and side lights and/or panels..................................300 General information........................................................................300 Approvals.............................................................................................. 301 Fire window frames.................................................................. 305 Tornado Smoke and draft control doors and frames per NFPA 105 and UL 1784................................................................. 313 Hurricane Smoke barrier doors and frames ........................................ 313 Elevations General information........................................................................ 305 Approvals............................................................................................. 306 Smoke and draft control.................................................................. 311 Frames (steel)..................................................................................... 312 Doors (steel)......................................................................................... 312 Hardware................................................................................................ 312 Gasketing................................................................................................ 312 Fire rated wall....................................................................................... 312 Hourly ratings........................................................................................ 312 Approved products............................................................................ 312 Listing information covered........................................................... 312 Installation............................................................................................. 312 Lights and Louvers Specialty Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms used in this section....................................................................................................270 Fire door assembly components................................................. 271 The AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction).................................. 271 Installation............................................................................................. 271 Functions of fire door assemblies............................................... 271 Fire rated steel frames and doors............................................... 271 Listing agencies...................................................................................272 Doors, frames, and walls.................................................................272 Steps to follow.....................................................................................272 Fire testing.............................................................................................272 Steelcraft frames and doors approved for positive pressure. 273 Guidelines & requirements............................................................ 273 Astragals................................................................................................ 273 Clearances ........................................................................................... 273 Closing devices................................................................................... 273 Coordinators........................................................................................ 274 Dutch doors.......................................................................................... 274 Exit devices........................................................................................... 274 Gasketing & edge seals................................................................... 274 Glass & glazing.................................................................................... 274 Hinges..................................................................................................... 274 Labels...................................................................................................... 274 Locks....................................................................................................... 274 Louvers................................................................................................... 275 Latch throw.......................................................................................... 275 Pairs of doors....................................................................................... 275 Protective plates & plant-ons...................................................... 275 Smoke & draft..................................................................................... 275 Temperature rise doors................................................................... 275 Vision light requirements............................................................... 275 Frames General information.................................................................. 270 Variations Fire rated products Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 269 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Section Rev. 10/04/16 • Technical data manual • Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Fire rated products • General information General information Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms used in this section Term • AHJ - Authority Having Jurisdiction • • • • • • • • • • • • • ANSI - American National Standards Institute DHI - Door and Hardware Institute FEH - Fire Exit Hardware (Exit devices which are listed for both fire and panic applications) FM - Factory Mutual IBC - International Building Code ITS/WHI MPD - Mortise Panic Device NFPA - National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 80 - Nationally accepted standard for the use and installation of fire frames and doors RPD - Rim Panic Device SD - Steel Door Institute UL - Underwriters Laboratories VRPD Hourly Ratings Door 3 hour (180 minutes) 1 1/2 hour Specialty 1 hour (60 minute) 3/4 hour (45 minute) 1 1/2 hour (90 minute) Hardware - Vertical Rod Panic Device Hourly ratings Steel fire doors are rated by time (hours or minutes) that a door assembly can withstand exposure to fire test conditions. Hourly (minute) ratings are shown below: (90 minute) 3/4 hour (45 minute) 20 minute Description Wall 4 hour Opening in walls separating buildings or dividing a building into fire areas. 2 hour Openings in enclosed or vertical communications through buildings. These could be stairwells or elevator shafts. 1 hour Openings in corridors and room partitions dividing building into areas of occupancy. Historically, the 1 hour ratings have been wood door ratings. Steel doors are starting to be used in these openings depending on the AHJ. 1 hour Openings in corridors and room partitions. 2 hour Openings in walls where there is the potential of severe fire exposure from the exterior of the building. 1 hour Openings in walls where there is the potential of moderate to light fire exposure from the exterior of the building. 1 hour Openings in corridors where smoke and draft control is required. Fire door assemblies: Steelcraft fire rated doors, three sided frames, transom and/or sidelight frames and fire window frames are required to comply with building codes and the local AHJ. This section of the manual has been compiled as an aid to help understand the ratings of the door and frame products, and to provide a broad overview of the products Steelcraft offers to meet the increasingly stringent needs of the fire protection community. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products - Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey 270 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/30/08 Home General Information Fire rated products • General information Fire door assembly components Listed doors: Doors are required to be labeled with the appropriate fire door label. The fire door label carries an hourly rating. Doors can be labeled with a higher hourly rating than required, but, it is not acceptable to substitute a door with a lower hourly rating than required. • Listed hardware: Most hardware components are also required to be labeled with the appropriate fire label. The location and type of label will vary with the device being used. The required minimum hardware components for a fire door assembly are as follows: Approved hinge(s): may be butt hinges, pivots, continuous hinges or other approved hinge constructions. Hinges generally are not labeled. • Listed closing device: may be surface mounted or concealed attachment to the door and frame. • Fire rated wall: Wall construction must be fire rated as dictated by the building code and the AHJ. The AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction) Installation Fire rated steel frames and doors Manufacturers of steel frames and doors choose from several methods of classifying their product as Fire Doors. Municipalities, state governments, insurance regulations and building codes vary in the requirements for Fire Doors. Users of fire doors can specify the type of label that offers the desired fire protection. Regardless of the label chosen, serious consideration should be given to the company manufacturing the product and the performance expected. The National Fire Protection Association publishes NFPA Pamphlet 80, which is the generally accepted standard throughout the United States for the installation of fire doors and windows. This standard is generally accepted by state fire code officials and municipal building officials. Some of the topics covered in NFPA Pamphlet 80 are: • allowable glass area in doors for different locations and ratings • • • maximum sizes for various kinds of fire doors latching device and hinge quantity dimensional requirements, as they relate to different ratings, sizes and types of fire door classifies a door or a frame only if it meets the following conditions Fire Rated Products It is the responsibility of the architect and/or specification writer to specify the proper materials for complete safety. They should be aware of the issues that constitute maximum safety in Fire Frames and Doors. All persons responsible for the design, installation and operation of any building involving people or valued property should insist upon the type of labeled door and frame that will afford the maximum fire protection. Hardware Installation of all Steelcraft doors and frames shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, and ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames, ANSI A250.11 and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA 80, and/or the local AHJ. The same length of protection from the fire is not required of all openings in buildings. The location in the building determines the length of time that the door must withstand a fire. It is the responsibility of the building code and the AHJ to indicate the type of Fire Doors Assemblies that are to be used at the required locations in a building. Specialty The local AHJ must be the final authority in fire door assembly issues. Steelcraft Fire Doors and Fire Door Frames are produced under the listing programs of Underwriters' Laboratories Incorporated (UL) Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) and FM Global (FM). When a fire starts, it is most important to evacuate the people safely from the building. After evacuation, the doors must serve as a fire and smoke barrier. It is a well known fact, that in a fire more people are killed by either smoke asphyxiation or by panic, than by the fire. Tornado • 4. Protect life and property by reducing smoke hazards. Hurricane Listed latch or locking device: may be single point locks, latches, fire exit devices or other listed devices. 3. Inhibit the spread of fire and smoke throughout the building or to an adjacent building. Elevations • 2. Provide ready egress from a fire area during a fire. Lights and Louvers • Serve as a regular door at all times. Doors Listed frames: Frames are required to be labeled with the appropriate fire door frame label. The frame label carries an hourly rating, which is generally valid for any rating up to and including the rating on the label. 1. Variations • Fire Doors must serve four main functions: Frames Required Fire Door Assembly components are as follows: Functions of fire door assemblies Variations Care should be taken in the selection of the components used in a fire door assembly. If any of the listed components are omitted, or if a non-rated component is substituted, the door assembly rating will be violated. Fire rated components (with the exception of the wall) are listed in the UL Certifications Directory or the IT/WHI Directory of Listed Products. Performance • 271 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Fire rated products • General information Frames Variations Listing agencies There are currently three (3) listing systems available from Steelcraft. 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Testing and Certification Program. UL is an independent agency with testing, listing, in-plant inspection, and labeling capabilities. Tornado Doors The manufacturer's design has been accepted by UL (under their performance standard UL10C or UL9) which uses NFPA Pamphlet 80 as the basis for their decision. • The door or frame is manufactured in accordance with the accepted design in the presence of a UL inspector. • The product passes the UL10C or UL9 fire test conducted by UL. • UL finds that the product meets the additional criteria (such as durability, stability, etc.) in addition to passing the fire test. • It is subject to a continual follow-up service, including unannounced, in-plant inspections during the manufacturing process to be sure that the frames and doors continue to be made exactly the same as tested. 2. Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey (ITS/WHI) Fire Testing and Certification Programs. ITS/WHI is an independent agency with testing, listing, in-plant inspection, and labeling capabilities. • The manufacturer may, at their option, submit drawings of the product to be tested to ITS/WHI for review. If potential problem areas are noted ITS/WHI will notify the manufacturer of these so that he may consider design changes. • IT/WHI personnel witness manufacturing of the product to be tested and verify components and assembly methods. • The product is then tested by ITS/WHI to determine if it meets the stringent requirements of the fire door test standards. • A factory follow-up inspection, listing and labeling agreement is issued. This agreement allows ITS/WHI to make unannounced in-plant inspections. 3. FM Global/Approvals follow-up certification programs. FM Global is an independent underwriting agency with listing, in-plant inspection, and labeling capabilities. • • Examine and test production samples • A factory follow-up inspection, listing and labeling agreement is issued. This agreement allows FM to make unannounced in-plant inspections. Examine manufacturing facilities and audit quality control procedures. Frames and doors are normally rated at three-quarters of the rating of the walls. If the rating for the wall is 4 hours, the rating for the door and frame is generally 3 hours. If the rating for the wall is 2 hours, the rating for the door and frame would be 1 1/2 hours, etc. There are two current exceptions to this practice: 20 min. openings used for smoke control applications and 1-hour openings. Both used in 1-hour walls. The reason that door and frame assemblies are normally rated at 75% of the total ratings of the wall is that the actual fire testing program for walls is completely different than that of frames and doors and the requirements and acceptance criteria vary. It should also be noted that the severity of fire is generally considered to be less at a door opening than at a wall. Normally doorways are open for passage of pedestrians and walls have a tendency to have furniture and other items stored against them. Steps to follow The following steps should be followed in specifying fire door requirements: 1. Investigate the appropriate building code(s). 2. Determine the fire resistance of the wall or partition in which the opening is to be located and select a door assembly (frame, door and hardware) having a proper fire-protection rating. The effectiveness of the entire assembly as a fire barrier may be destroyed if any component is omitted or one of substandard quality is used. 3. Make sure that fire doors, frames and hardware are produced under the auspices of a nationally recognized certification agency. 4. Insure products comply with the AHJ. 5. Insure products comply with NFPA 80. This pamphlet is the widely accepted standard for the use and installation of fire frames and doors. Fire testing Steel frames and doors have historically been subjected to full scale fire tests as a standard method for evaluating their performance and integrity relative to fire protection of property and life safety. Hollow metal doors were first submitted to Underwriters Laboratories for investigation and fire exposure testing in 1904. The agencies now associated with the testing, listing and labeling of products are two well known entities, Underwriters Laboratories and ITS/Warnock Hersey. While the agencies have remained a constant in the industry, the standards against which products are evaluated are undergoing significant changes. This document will provide an overview of the changes and describe how Steelcraft has positioned their product line in compliance with NFPA 252 and UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies or NFPA 257 and UL9 Fire Tests of Fire Window Assemblies.. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations • Doors, frames, and walls 272 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • General information • Astragals may not be required on double egress or other applications with 1 1/2 hour or less ratings. Refer to the appropriate listing pages in this section. Steelcraft products do not require the use of intumescent seals to comply with UL10 C or NFPA252. 2. Astragals must be steel overlapping type. Weather stripping astragals rated for 3 hours (180 minutes) do not satisfy the astragal requirements for steel fire doors. Guidelines & requirements 3. When astragals are used on pairs of doors equipped with fire exit hardware, a coordinator must be used to insure proper closing and latching sequence. All fire door applications are subject to product and component limitations and requirements. The following are general guidelines in the use and selection of fire rated assemblies and their components Listed or approved fire door components are published and listed in Underwriters Laboratories' "Certifications Directory", the ITS/Warnock Hersey "Directory of Listed Products" or the online FM "Approval Guide". 3. Every labeled swing type fire door must include an approved self latching device, closing device and hinges. 6. Astragals can be either screw attached or welded to the appropriate door. 4. Viewers must be listed in the Underwriters Laboratories "Certifications Directory", the ITS/Warnock Hersey "Directory of Listed Products" or the online FM "Approval Guide". 7. Astragals are not used on pairs of doors with an open back strike. 5. The actual fire rating of a Fire Door Assembly is the rating of the least rated component (door, frame or hardware) All clearances must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet # 80. Closing devices 1. An approved closing device must be installed on every swinging fire door. Exception: • 2. Fire doors must be internally reinforced for closing devices. Exceptions: Internal reinforcement is omitted if the closer is attached with sex bolts. • Internal reinforcement is omitted if spring hinges are used. 3. Overhead stops may be used if they do not inhibit the door from closing and latching. 5. Labeled opening may incorporate concealed closers and stops. Fire Rated Products 4. Door holder/release devices are permitted when acceptable to the AHJ. These fail-safe devices release the door in the event of fire. Hardware • Specialty The inactive leaf of mechanical equipment room doors may omit a closer. Verify acceptance with the local building code and the AHJ. Tornado 7. The local AHJ is the final authority in application acceptance. Clearances Hurricane 6. Approved electronic monitoring devices can be used on fire doors. Elevations 2. Only labeled doors and frames can be used in a fire rated opening. 5. An astragal can not be used on pairs of doors swinging in the same direction equipped with double vertical rods, since the astragal will prevent the operation of one of the door leaves. Since 3 hour (180 minute) rated openings require an astragal, double vertical rod applications can not be used in pairs swinging in the same direction. Lights and Louvers 1. 4. An astragal may be used on a pair of doors equipped with a mortise exit device on the active leaf and a vertical rod on the inactive leaf. Doors Astragals are required per the manufacturer's published listings. Variations 1. Frames The products that conform to the positive pressure criteria (UL10 C) or NFPA252 are shown on the following sheets. These products also conform to the negative pressure test criteria (ASTM E152, UL10 B, etc.) and may be used in areas that do not require positive pressure fire frames and doors. Astragals Variations Steelcraft frames and doors approved for positive pressure Performance • 273 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Fire rated products • General information Tornado Frames Doors Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Coordinators 1. A coordinator is required if an astragal or projecting latch bolt prevents the inactive door from closing before the active door. Specialty Hardware 1. 3. When astragals are used on pairs of doors equipped with fire exit hardware, a coordinator must be used to insure proper closing and latching sequence. Dutch doors 1. The upper and lower leaf may latch into the frame or the upper leaf may latch into the lower leaf, which latches into the frame. 2. The opening must include a closing device located on the upper leaf, and a horizontal astragal which will coordinate the closing and latching of the bottom leaf. Doors up to 60 inches in height shall be provided with 2 hinges and an additional hinge for each additional 30" of door height or fraction there of. 2. Steelcraft doors over 96 inches may be prepared for .134" standard weight hinges. 3. Listed continuous hinges, electric hinges and pivots can be used on Steelcraft fire rated doors. 4. Doors with 4" hinges are limited to 20 gauge and a maximum door size of 3'0" x 7'0". Labels 1. 3. A label is required on each leaf of a dutch door and one on the frame. Steelcraft doors and frames can be supplied with a variety of metal or Mylar fire labels, attached by permanent adhesive. Other methods of attachment have been welding, rivets or drive screws. 2. Labels are attached only at the factory or at an authorized labeled distributors' shop. Exit devices 1. The proper quantity of hinges must be used. Based on NFPA Pamphlet 80: • 2. A coordinator is not required if both leafs of a pair of doors closes and latches independently of each other. Listed Fire Exit Hardware must be used. These exit devices are listed for both fire and panic applications. 2. The door size must not exceed the maximum listed size for the individual hardware manufacturers' listing for the device being used. 3. Doors which are reinforced for Fire Exit Hardware must bear a label which states "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware". 4. Vertical rod FEH may not be used on single doors. The exception would be a listed 3 point exit device. 5. Pairs of doors, swinging in the same direction, with vertical rod FEH on both leaves can not be used in 3 hour (180 minute) applications. 6. Rim FEH can not be installed with blade strikes in double door applications. 7. Rim FEH in pairs must include the use of a listed hardware mullion. 3. All jobsite labeling must include a field (jobsite) inspection by the labeling agency and may require involvement of the AHJ. 4. Fire rated doors with continuous hinges have the fire label attached in the top channel of the door. Locks 1. The door size must not exceed the maximum listed size for the individual hardware manufacturers' listing. 2. Dead locks may not be used on doors which are in a means of egress. Locks with deadbolts that are interconnected with latch bolts are retracted simultaneously when the latch bolt is retracted may be used with in a means of egress. 3. Deadbolts may be used on doors in addition to an active latch bolt on doors not in the means of egress, or as otherwise permitted by the AHJ. Gasketing & edge seals 1. Only listed gasket material can be used. Refer to the UL Fire Resistive directory or the ITS/WHI Directory of Listed Products. 2. Smoke and draft control assemblies must include gaskets listed for smoke and draft control. 3. Steelcraft fire rated doors do not require the use of edge seal (intumescent) systems. Glass & glazing 1. Only approved glass can be installed in a fire door assembly. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hinges 274 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • General information Louvers 4. Fire ratings for doors equipped with a louver can be either 1 1/2 hour (90 minutes) 1-hour (60 minutes) or 3/4 hour (45 minutes). 5. Maximum listed louver size 24" x 24" (one louver per door) 6. Location in the door: Located in bottom half Minimum 12" from door bottom Minimum 5 1/2" from door edge to cutout. 7. Louvers cannot be installed in a means of egress and in: The upper half of the door Smoke & draft 1. 2. Only gaskets listed for smoke and draft control may be used on smoke and draft control assemblies. 3. Gaskets must be listed for the appropriate door type (hollow metal, wood, etc.). 4. Wood doors which do not have an integral intumescent seal in the door edge, may require an intumescent edge seal and draft control gasket attached to the frame. Review the wood door manufacturer's listing and requirements. Temperature rise doors 20 minute doors Smoke & draft opening 1. Latch throw 1. Single doors: • All components used in a Smoke and Draft Control assembly must pass a 20 minute without hose stream test. 1/2" latch bolt throw for all door series, gauges and fire ratings. Steelcraft T Series doors prepared for single point latches, rim or mortise FEH are labeled for 250°F temperature rise and may be used in either 250°F or 450°F temperature rise location. 2. Doors prepared for vertical rod (CVR or SVR) or INPACT™ devices carry a 450°F temperature rise label and can only be installed in 450°F temperature rise location. Elevations • • • 2. Plant-ons can be used if covered by a manufacturer's listing service. Lights and Louvers • • • Protection plates or kick plates can be a maximum 48" x 48" in size and attached to both faces of a door (3 hour maximum fire rating). Doors 3. Fire Exit Hardware can be used on doors equipped with a louver, but only where approved by code. 1. Variations 2. Glass lights are not permitted in doors equipped with louvers. Protective plates & plant-ons Frames Any listed automatic fusible link louver can be used on a Steelcraft labeled door. Variations 1. Vision light requirements A Series = 5/8" 1. B Series a. B18, B16 = 5/8" b. B14 = 5/8" For pairs of doors up to and including 1 1/2hour (90 minute) and 3/4" over 1 1/2 hour L Series: a. L20, L18, L16 = 5/8" up to 3 hours 2. Any listed fire door vision kit can be used in a Steelcraft door. Vision kits should be listed for the appropriate door construction (hollow metal, wood, etc.) used. 3. Steelcraft vision kits are not approved for use in any other door manufacturers' doors b. L14 = 5/8" For pairs of doors up to and including 1 1/2 hour (90 minute). 3/4" over 1 1/2 hour • T Series = 3/4" Hardware Pairs of doors 1. Specialty • Glass cannot be installed in exterior locations subject to severe fire exposure. Tornado • • Hurricane 2. Pairs of doors The inactive leaf of doors must be provided with selflatching top and bottom bolts or automatic flush bolts or labeled two point latches. Manual flush bolts either mortised or surface may be used on doors to rooms not normally occupied by humans. Fire Rated Products 2. Double egress doors can only be provided with concealed or surface vertical rod FEH. 3. Open back strikes can be used on pairs of doors (L18/16/14, CE18/16, B18/16/14). Maximum height of 8'0" and a maximum 1 1/2 hour (90 minute) ratings. Astragals can not be used in this application. • 275 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance 4. Two doors in the same frame separated by a hollow metal mullion are considered to be two single doors applications. Frames Doors Lights and Louvers Elevations Tornado Hardware Specialty Hurricane Fire rated products • Three sided frames Three sided frames General information Typical Typical Typical Typical Elevations Elevations Elevations Elevations Typical Elevations Single Single Single Single Single Dutch Dutch Dutch Dutch Dutch Pair Pair Pair Pair Pair Removable Removable Removable Removable Mullion Mullion Mullion Mullion Removable mullion Double Double Double Double Egress Egress Egress Egress Double egress Multiple Multiple Multiple Multiple Opening Opening Opening Opening Multiple opening Variations Variations General Information Home Fire rated three sided frame The three sided frames covered in this section have been tested in accordance with UL10C and NFPA252-1999, and listed by either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) and FM Global (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on the following pages. Three sided frames are designed to be set on the floor and anchored to the wall construction. All frame anchoring must be in accordance with the installation instructions for the appropriate frame construction. Three sided frames configurations Labeled three (3) sided frames are available in the following configurations: • • • Single opening: hinge jamb, strike jamb and head. • Double egress: a unique contoured frame (profiles) with two hinge jambs and a head. This opening configuration is used in corridor applications and consists of a pair of doors, each swinging in the opposite direction. • • • Dutch doors: hinge jamb, strike jamb and head, used in storeroom applications. Double opening: two hinge jambs and a head. Commonly referred to as pairs swinging in the same direction. Double swing with a mullion: two hinge jambs, a head and a mullion (stationary or removable). This opening configuration is actually considered as two single door openings. Multiple opening: a unique application having a combination of hinge and/or strike jambs, vertical mullions and head. Communicating openings: an application including a door(s) mounted in both rabbets, usually used in the hospitality markets and installed between adjoining rooms. Approved frame series Frames covered in this section are F, FN, FE, FP, FS, DE, DW, K, KS, C, CK, MU and MS. Regardless of the frame series being used, all frames must be installed into a fire rated wall. Listing information covered All listings covered in this section are for reference and assistance in developing overall parameters of approvals. Several variables such as hardware, wall construction, installation and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturer' s listings will take precedence. Fire Rated Products All listings shown in this section conform to the requirements of UL 10C & NFPA252 test requirements. Installation Installation of all Steelcraft framing systems shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA-840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ. Architectural Performance Details are subject to change without prior notice. 276 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/22/18 Home General Information Fire rated products • Three sided frames Approvals 3 HR Max Stud Max. KD Weld UL ITS/WH FM 20 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed FN16, FN14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" Not Listed MU16, MU4 3 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 9'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed FP14 5 3/4 10 3/4 X X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed FS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" FS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" Not Listed MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 9'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed DW16, DW14 3 1/2 14 X N.A. 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 8'10" 4'0" x 8'0" K16, K14 3 1/2 14 X N.A. 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 8'10 4'0" x 8'0" KS16 4 12 X N.A. Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed C 4 5/8" 13 1/8" N.A. X Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed CK 4 5/8" 13 1/8" X N.A Not Listed 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed Tornado 3 FS16 Hurricane F16, F14 Elevations 1 1/2 HR (90 Min) Max Min. Maximum Sizes (Door Openings) Lights and Louvers Stud Series Corner Doors Masonry Listings Jamb Depth Variations Wall Applications Frames Frame Series Maximum Rating Variations Three sided frames for single door F, FN, and C Series frame construction FN Double rabbet F C Single rabbet Casing-ready (welded) Specialty F Masonry wall applications Stud wall (drywall) applications Hardware MU Series frame construction MU Double rabbet masonry Single rabbet (narrow double) Fire Rated Products MU DW, K and CK Series frame construction DW K K Double rabbet Single rabbet (narrow double) CK Casing-ready (knock-down) Minimum Hardware Requirements: • Strike for single point latch • • Closer Performance DW Approved hinges Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/28/18 • Technical data manual • • 277 Architectural Notes: 1. Frames over 9'0" in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame. 2.4" heads are approved for all applications. General Information Home Fire rated products • Three sided frames Frames Doors Frame Series Maximum Rating 3 HR Max Elevations Stud 1 1/2 HR (90 Min) Max Stud Listings Jamb Depth Series Tornado Hurricane Wall Applications Masonry Lights and Louvers Variations Variations Three sided frames for double doors Min. Corner Max. KD Maximum Sizes (Door Openings) Weld UL ITS/WH FM F16, F14 3 20 X X 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 8'0" FS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed FN16, FN14 4 1/2 14 X X 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 8'0" F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 10'0" Not Listed MU16, MU4 3 1/2 14 X X 8'0"x 9'0" 8'0"x 9'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed FP14 5 3/4 10 3/4 X X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 8'0"x 8'0" 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed FS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 8'0"x 8'0" 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 8'0"x 8'0" 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 8'0" FS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed F12 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 8'0"x 10'0" 8'0"x 10'0" Not Listed MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 8'0"x 9'0" 8'0"x 9'0" Not Listed MS16 4 12 N.A. X Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed DW16, DW14 3 1/2 14 X N.A. 8'0"x 9'0" 8'0"x 8'10" 8'0"x 8'0" K16, K14 3 1/2 14 X N.A. 8'0"x 9'0" 8'0"x 8'10 8'0"x 8'0" KS16 4 12 X N.A. Not Listed 8'0"x 8'0" Not Listed C 4 5/8" 13 1/8" N.A X Not Listed 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed CK 4 5/8" 13 1/8" X N.A Not Listed 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F, FN, and C Series frame construction Specialty F Series Frame Construction F FN F Double rabbet Double Rabbet FF C FN Masonry Wall Applications Single Single Casing-ready (welded) Rabbetrabbet Double Rabbet Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware MU Series frame construction MU Series Frame Construction MU MU MU MU Double rabbet masonryNarrow Single rabbet (narrow double) Double Double Rabbet DW, K and CK Series Rabbet frame construction DW and K Series Frame DW DWConstruction K K DW Double rabbet K DW K rabbet Single (narrow double) Narrow Double Rabbet 1. CK Flush, surface or automatic bolt in head 2. Vertical rod inactive or both leafs • Casing-ready (knock-down) Notes: Double 1. Frames over 9'0" in height and installed in stud walls Rabbet require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame. 2.4" heads are approved for all applications. 278 • Minimum Hardware Requirements: • Strike(s) depending on application for either: Closer(s) depending on hardware applications and AHJ 1. Active leaf 2. Both leafs • Approved hinges • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 11/28/18 Home General Information Fire rated products • Three sided frames Maximum Rating Masonry 3 Hr Max Stud Listings Jamb Depth Series Min. Corner Max. KD Maximum Sizes (Door Opening) Weld UL ITS/WHI FM F16, F14 3 20 X X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" FN16, FN14 4 1/2 14 X X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 9'0" Not Listed FP14 5 3/4 10 3/4 N.A. X 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 N.A. X 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 3 14 X X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 9'0" Not Listed 2. 4" heads are approved for all applications. 1. Removable hardware mullion Tornado Maximum 3 hour rating. Check hardware manufacturer's listings for maximum ratings & height. 2. Removable Steelcraft Hollow metal mullion • 2" face: only F Series Frame Construction • 1 1/2 hour rating maximum, 8'0" maximum height • Application for either FEH or listed latching hardware Rabbet Double • 2" face minimum, 4" face maximum Double Rabbet Rabbet • Maximum 3 hr. rating F Narrow Double Rabbet Closer for both leafs Approved hinges C Double Rabbet Single rabbet Casing-ready (welded) Fire Rated Products Double rabbet MU MU Strike for both leafs Hardware FN Minimum Hardware Requirements: • Listed hardware mullion or Steelcraft hollow metal mullion • • • Seriesframe Frameconstruction Construction F, FN, andMU C Series F Removable Mullion MU Series frame construction MU Double rabbet masonry Single rabbet (narrow double) • 279 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance MU Specialty F FN F 3. Frames with fixed (welded) Steelcraft mullions are considered to be two (2) single door frames. Single Hurricane • • Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Masonry Wall Applications 3. Three sided frame options for double doors: Elevations Notes: 1. Frames over 9'0" in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame. Lights and Louvers Stud 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max Frame Series Wall Applications Doors Removable hollow metal mullion: for either Rim or Mortise FEH or listed latching hardware applications (8'0" x 8'0" maximum). Variations Removable hardware mullion: for Rim FEH on each leaf application. Mullion must be fire rated Frames • • Variations Three sided frames for double doors with mullions Double doors with removable mullions are used at entrances to buildings, corridor and equipment room applications. There are 2 types of removable mullion applications: Frames Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Three sided frames for double egress Double Egress frames are designed to separate corridors into fire areas. The frame incorporates a pair of doors, which swing in opposite directions, without the use of a center mullion. Once the door and frame are installed, the doors line up in the center of the frame. • FE Series Double Egress Frames: The jamb profile reduces the corridor width by 5 1/4" (133 mm). Swing clear hinges cannot be used with a standard FE Series frame. A special profile FE Series frame can accommodate swing clear hinges. • DE Series Double Egress Frames: The DE Series frame is designed to maximize corridor clear opening width. The jamb profile accommodates the use of swing clear hinges which is a major consideration in areas where the code requires a minimum clear opening width in corridor applications. Maximum Rating Frame Series Wall Applications Masonry 3 Hr Max Stud 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max Masonry/Stud Listings Jamb Depth Series Min. Corner Max. KD Maximum Sizes (Door Opening) Weld UL ITS/WHI FM FE16, FE14 5 3/4 14 X X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" Not Listed DE16, DE14 (Notes #3,4) 5 3/4 14 N.A, X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" Not Listed FE16, FE14 5 3/4 14 X X 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed DE16, DE14 (Notes #3,4) 5 3/4 14 N.A. X 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" Not Listed FE16, FE14 5 3/4 14 X X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" Not Listed DE16, DE14 5 3/4 14 N.A. X 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" Not Listed Notes: Double Egress frame options 1. Frames over 9'0" in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame. Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Masonry Wall Applications 2. Net head width is 1/8" narrower than standard double door frames. Tornado Hurricane Fire rated products • Three sided frames Variations Variations General Information Home 3. Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH is the only approved latching hardware. FE and DE Series Double Egress Frame Construction 4. DE Series frame depth refers to the frame depth of the head section. Head 5. DE Series frames must be supplied welded Masonry Wall Applications Specialty Jambs 6. Mullions are not approved 7. 4" heads are approved for all applications. FE Double Egress FE and DE Series Double Egress Frame Construction Head Head Jambs DE Double Egress • • Closers both leaves Approved hinges FE Double Egress Jambs Fire Rated Products Hardware Jambs Minimum Hardware Requirements: • Vertical rod on both leaves Head Architectural Performance DE Double Egress 280 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications General Information Fire rated products • Three sided frames Masonry/Stud Jamb Depth Min. Max. Corner KD Maximum Sizes (Overall frame Width & Height) Weld UL ITS/WHI FM F16, F14 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 12'8" x 8'4" 12'8" x 8'4" Not Listed MU16, MU14 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 12'8" x 8'4" 12'8" x 8'4" Not Listed FN16, FN14 4 3/4 14 N.A. X 12'8" x 8'4" 12'8" x 8'4" Not Listed 2. Hollow metal hinge mullions must be welded in place Doors Masonry Series Variations 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max Wall Applications Frames Maximum Rating Masonry Wall Applications Listings Frame Series Variations Three sided frames for multiple door openings Multiple opening frames include 3 or more doors in one frame and are usually used in corridor applications which lead to theater or arena locations. 3. Face dimensions: F Series and FN Series Frame Construction Double F FN Single Rabbet Minimum Hardware Requirements: Rabbet • Strike for each leafs Mullion face dimensions = 2" minimum 4" maximum 4. Elevation options: • Series Single doors MU Frame Construction • 4'0" x 8'0" max door size • Double doors (vertical mullion optional) MU • MU 8'0" x 8'0" max door size • doors mustNarrow swing in same direction Double • Frames can not include transoms or side lights or panels Double Rabbet Rabbet 5. 4" heads are approved for all applications. F Series and FN Series Frame Construction Closer for each leafs F Notes: Three sided frame options for multiple door openings: 1. Double Rabbet Frames must be welded F Single Rabbet Tornado Approved hinges MU FN Hurricane • • Double Rabbet Jambs & head 4" maximum Elevations F • • Lights and Louvers Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Masonry Wall Applications Double Rabbet Specialty Elevation Variations MU Series Frame Construction MU FN MU Double Rabbet Narrow Double DoubleSingle and Double Door Applications Rabbet Rabbet Single Door Applications Hardware ies Frame Construction e et Home Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Masonry Wall Applications Elevation Variations Double Door Applications Fire Rated Products Performance Single Door Applications Single and Double Door s • 281 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Fire rated products • Three sided frames Three sided frames for dutch door frames Dutch door frames are designed for use with Steelcraft labeled dutch doors, and are used in storeroom areas. Maximum Rating Frame Series Wall Applications Series Doors Variations Lights and Louvers 1 1/2 HR (90 Min) Max Corner KD Weld Maximum Sizes (Door Openings) Min. Max. UL ITS/WH FM F16, F14 3 20 X X 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single FN16, FN14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single Stud F16,F14 3 14 X X 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single Masonry/Stud MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 N.A. X 4'0" x 7'2" Single 4'0" x 7'2" Single Not Listed Masonry/Stud MU16, MU14 3 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 7'2" 4'0" x 7'2" Not Listed Masonry 3 HR Max Listings Jamb Depth Notes: ThreeFsided frame options for dutch doors: Series Frame Construction 1. Strike preparations are required for both the top and bottom leafs, unless the top leaf latches into the bottom leaf. F 2. 4" Face heads FNapplications F are approved for all Elevations Single Masonry Wall Applications F Series Frame Rabbet Construction Double Double Rabbet Rabbet F MU Series Frame F Construction FN Single Tornado Hurricane Double MURabbet MURabbet Masonry Wall Applications Double Rabbet Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Narrow Double MU Series Double Frame Construction Rabbet Specialty MU MU Narrow Double Rabbet Minimum Hardware Requirements: • • • Strike for top and bottom leaf (see note 1). Closers (top leaf) Approved hinges Fire Rated Products Hardware Double Rabbet Rabbet Performance Architectural Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications 282 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 09/30/13 Home General Information Fire rated products • Three sided frames Stud Min. Max. KD Maximum Sizes (Door Openings) Weld UL ITS/WH FM F16, F14 4 1/2 20 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" FN16, FN14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" MU16, MU14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 5'0" 4'0" x 5'0" Not Listed F16, F14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" MU16, MU14 4 1/2 14 N.A. X 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" Not Listed F16, F14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" MU16, MU14 4 1/2 14 X X 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 9'0" Not Listed DW16, DW14 4 1/2 14 X N.A. 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 8'10" 4'0" x 8'0" K16, K14 4 1/2 14 X N.A. 4'0" x 9'0" 4'0" x 8'10" 4'0" x 8'0" Notes: Three sided frame options for single doors: Elevations s Frame Construction F Series 1. Frame FramesConstruction over 9'0" in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame. F Double Rabbet 2. 4" heads are approved for all applications. FN FN F IBC currently allows for the omission of closers on 3. The communicating door assemblies in hotel/motel applications. Double Double Rabbet Masonry Wall Applications Masonry Wall Applications Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Double Tornado F FN Double Rabbet Double Rabbet Double Rabbet MU Construction Series Frame Construction d K Series Frame DW and K Series Frame Construction Masonry Wall Applications Stud Wall (Drywall) Applications Minimum Hardware Requirements: 1. Strike for single point latch 2. Closer (see note 2) Specialty Double Rabbet MU Hurricane 4. Rabbet For DW & K Rabbet Series, doors must be hung on opposite jambs. ries Frame Construction F Series Frame Construction MU Series Frame Construction MU Lights and Louvers Stud Series Corner Doors 3 HR Max Listings Jamb Depth Variations Masonry 1 1/2 Hr (90 Min) Max Frame Series Wall Applications Frames Maximum Rating Variations Three sided communicating frames Communicating openings: an application including a door(s) mounted in both rabbets, usually used in the Hospitality markets and installed between adjoining rooms. 3. Approved hinges Double Rabbet DW K Double Rabbet MU Hardware DW K Double Rabbet Fire Rated Products DW and K Series Frame Construction DW K Performance Double Rabbet • 283 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Fire rated products • Three sided frames Frames Doors Variations Variations Profile variations The following frame profile variations or options may be specified on 3 sided frames and are approved as noted below by UL, ITS/ WH and FM. For hourly ratings and approved opening sizes, refer to the appropriate frame applications pages of this manual. Frame Applications Profile Variation Single swing Pairs Hospital Stops F, FN, MU, DW, K F, FN, MU, DW, K Equal Rabbet F, FN, MU, DW, K Lead Lined* F, MU Pairs with Removable Mullion Double Egress Multiple Opening Dutch (Single swing) N. A. N. A. F, MU F, MU F, FN, MU, DW, K, F, FN, MU, DW, K N. A. F, MU F, MU F, MU N. A. N. A. N. A. N. A. *For masonry wire anchoring applications only with all others being subject to the authority having jurisdiction. Lights and Louvers F Series Frame Construction F Tornado Single Rabbet FN Double Rabbet MU Series Frame Construction MU Double Rabbet MU Narrow Double Rabbet DW and K Series Frame Construction DW K Double Rabbet DW K Narrow Double Rabbet Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Double Rabbet F 284 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 05/31/15 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors Variations Frames Variations Doors Doors General information Fire rated steel doors Doors covered in this section have been tested in accordance with NFPA252 & UL10c, and listed by either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) or FM (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on the following pages. • 1 hour (UL or ITS/WH only) • Standard listed wire glass: one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf max. • Firelite or other appropriately listed glass: • • Multiple lights permitted 3/4 hour • Standard listed wire glass: • • 3 hour • • Firelite or other appropriately listed glass: • UL & ITS/WH allow one (1) light with 100 in2 (.06 m2) maximum visible glass. Maximum visible width of 12" (305 mm), maximum height of 33" (838 mm). UL & ITS/WH available up to 2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36", max height 78" (Dezigner trim max height 54", max area 1296 in2). • Multiple lights permitted. • 1 1/2 hour Standard listed wire glass: one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf max. • Firelite or other appropriately listed glass: • max. UL: provided each light does not exceed the 1850 in2 maximum. • ITS/WH: provided each light does not exceed the 1850 in2 max: maximum combined glass area may not exceed the published maximum glass area listing of the glass manufacturer. Louvers Fire rated door can be prepared for one listed fire rated louver located in the bottom half of the door. Doors with louvers can only be located in equipment and mechanical areas of the building. FM does not allow the use of louvers in fire rated doors. Basic guidelines on louvers for UL & ITS/WH are as follows: • • • 3/4 hour, 1 hour and 1 1/2 hour listings. 24" x 24" maximum louver size Glass lights can not be used in conjunction with louvers Door viewers 1 1/2 hour maximum fire listings. 3/4" maximum hole size. 2 viewer preps maximum per door, minimum 12" apart. • 285 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Performance • • • Fire Rated Products • 2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36", max height 78" (Dezigner trim max height 54", max area 1296 in2). Hardware UL & ITS/WH available up to 1850 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36", max height 54" (Dezigner trim max area is 1296 in2). Multiple lights permitted: Standard listed wire glass: • FM maintains one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf • 20 minutes without hose stream test: (UL&ITS/WH only) Specialty • Tornado FM maintains no glass with 3-hour rating. Hurricane FM maintains 1296 in2 per door light max: multiple lights permitted, provided the 1296 in2 maximum per light is not exceeded. Firelite or other appropriately listed glass: • 1296 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36", max height 54". Multiple lights permitted, provided each light does not exceed the 1296 in2 maximum. • Standard listed wire glass cannot be used. • • • • Available up to 2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36", max height 78" (Dezigner trim max height 54", max area 1296 in2) Elevations Lights Fire rated doors can be prepared for listed glass lights. The required hourly rating will dictate the approved glass lights available. (NOTE: Glass manufacturers listings and local/ project-specific code requirements should be confirmed for each project. Maximum sizes will vary per rating/ manufacturer.) Basic guidelines on glass are as follows: • Lights and Louvers Listed Steelcraft doors are for all commercial building applications. Variations in hardware and glass lights must be considered in the selection of the correct door construction. Tornado Frames Doors Fire rated products • Doors Approved door series Regardless of the door series being used, all doors must be installed with labeled hardware, and into labeled frames and firewalls. Door constructions covered in this section are listed below: • • • A14 Series: full glass with beveled edges • H & HE Series: specifically designed for hurricane code applications • L Series: laminated core with beveled edges and either honeycomb or polystyrene cores • PW Series: specifically designed for tornado code applications. • SL Series: laminated core with square edges and either honeycomb or polystyrene cores • T Series: specially designed for maximum 250° F or 450° F temperature rise applications. 100 in2 max visible listed glass. • TH Series: 250°F or 450°F temperature rise for hurricane code applications - 100 in2 max visible listed glass • LS Series: laminated core with beveled edges and stainless steel face sheets Door light designs Fire rated doors are available in the following door designs: • F = Flush door with no glass cutout. 3 hour maximum listing. • V = Vision light with a nominal 100 in2 located in the upper half of the door. 3 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 1 1/2 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass). • N3, N4, N5 = Narrow light variations, which are 100 in2 exposed glass area, and located at eye level, near the lock edge. 3 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 1 1/2 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass). • N = Narrow light varies with the door height, exceeds 100 in2 of exposed glass area, and is located near the lock edge. 1 1/2 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass). • LNL = Long narrow light, exceeds 54" visible glass height. 1 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). Fire rating not available with standard wire glass, or with FM label. • G = Half glass light (size will vary with the door size) located in the upper half of the door. 1 1/2 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass). • FG = Full glass light. 1 hour maximum listing on L, A14 & H Series doors. • FG2 / FG3 = Full glass with multiple lights (size will vary with the door size). 1 1/2 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH: see notes on WH limitations on page 317). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass). • Door viewers = Must be fire rated construction. 1 1/2 hour maximum. 3/4" diameter hole maximum. B Series: welded steel stiffened core with beveled edges CE Series: laminated core with beveled edges and panel embossed face sheets Temperature rise ratings The Steelcraft doors are rated for temperature rise as follows: • T & TH series: 250°F or 450°F temperature rise @ 30 minutes • All other series: > 650°F @ 30 minutes Listing information covered All listings covered in this section are for reference and assistance in developing overall parameters of approvals. Several variables such as glass lights, hardware, wall construction and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturer listings will take precedence. Installation Installation of all Steelcraft doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ. Note: When steel top caps (screw-in) are applied to a fire labeled door with a continuous hinge prep or pocket pivots, the fire certification label is located underneath the cap. See other cap options and label locations in "Weather seals" on page 151. Details are subject to change without prior notice. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home 286 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 10/04/16 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors Approvals 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" FM L14 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 7'2" 4'0" x 8'0" LS18, LS16 N/A 4'0" x 8'0" N/A B18, B16 4'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A T18, T16, T14 4'0" x 9'0" N/A 4'0" x 8'0" T20 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A SL18 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" N/A B14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A TH16, TH14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A H16, H14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A L-20 3'0" x 7'2" 3'0" x 7'2" N/A SL-20 3'0" x 7'2" 3'0" x 7'2" N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2, HD2A) 3'8" x 7'0" N/A N/A Minimum Hardware Requirements: • Single point lock/latch CE18* (E6) 3'8" x 7'0" N/A N/A Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4, HE16 (E6) 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A 86, 86ED, 86 w/sectional trim CE20 (E6) 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A L18, L16 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" B14 4'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A L20 3'0" x 8'0" 3'0" x 8'0" N/A SL20 3'0" x 8'0" 3'0" x 8'0" N/A CE20 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A A14 (FG2, FG3) 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A A14 (FG) 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A Lights and Louvers Closer Tornado Approved hinges Hurricane • • Elevations Specialty 1 Hr (60 min) Max ITS/WHI L18, L16 Doors 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max UL Variations 3 Hr Max Maximum Door Size Door Series Frames Maximum Rating Variations Single doors with single point locks and latches Notes: 1. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information Details are subject to change without prior notice. Hardware 2. Embossed 6 panel CE18 series door design is available and listed up to and including 3'8" x 7'0" door size. All other CE Series doors designs are available as noted above. Fire Rated Products Performance • 287 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Fire rated products • Doors 3 Hr Max Tornado Frames Maximum Door Size Door Series UL ITS/WHI FM L18, L16 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" L14 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 7'2" 4'0" x 8'0" B18, B16 4'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A T18, T16, T14 4'0" x 9'0" N/A 4'0" x 8'0" SL18 4'0" x 8'0" 4'0" x 8'0" N/A B14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A TH16, TH14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A H16, H14 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T20 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A L20 3'0" x 7'2" 3'0" x 7'2" N/A SL20 3'0" x 7'2" 3'0" x 7'2" N/A HE16 (E6) 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE20 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 3'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 3'8" x 7'0" N/A N/A LS 18, LS16 N/A 4'0" x 8'0" N/A CE18, CE16 (HD 2 & HD2A) 3'8" x 7'0" N/A N/A 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max L18, L16 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 10'0" 4'0" x 8'0" B14 4'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A CE20 (E6) 3'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max A14, (FG2, FG3) 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A 1 Hr (60 min) Max A14 (FG) 4'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A Minimum Hardware Requirements: • RPD or MPD Fire Exit Hardware • • Closer Approved hinges Notes: 1. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information Details are subject to change without prior notice. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Maximum Rating Variations Variations Single doors with fire exit hardware 288 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors UL ITS/WHI FM 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" L14 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 8'0" SL18 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T18, T16, T14 8'0" x 9'0" N/A 8'0" x 8'0" TH16, TH14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A H16, H14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T20 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2, HD2A) Minimum Hardware Requirements: Active leaf 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A • LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0" x 8'0" N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A Single point lock/latch Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4, 86, 86ED, 86 w/ sectional trim L18, L16 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" Closer L14 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 8'0" L20 6'0" x 7'2" 6'0" x 7'2" N/A SL20 6'0" x 7'2" 6'0" x 7'2" N/A CE20 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max A14 (FG2, FG3) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A 1 Hr (60 min) Max A14 (FG) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A • • • • • • • Tornado Inactive leaf Closed back strike Auto flush bolts Approved hinges Closer Coordinator is required Note: flush bolt sets omit bottom bolt, using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per hardware manufacturer's listing approval. Specialty For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information Approved hinges Hurricane 1. Astragal Required Elevations Notes: ASTRAGAL REQUIRED Lights and Louvers 1 1/2 Hr (90 minute) Max Doors Maximum Door Size Door Series L18, L16 Rating 3 Hr Max Variations Maximum Rating Frames • Inactive leaf: closed back strike and surface or flush bolts • Coordinator required Variations Pairs with astragal: Swing in the same direction • Active Leaf: single point lock or latch Hardware Details are subject to change without prior notice. Fire Rated Products Performance • 289 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 • Technical data manual • Frames Variations General Information Home Fire rated products • Doors Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction • Active Leaf: single point lock or latch • Inactive leaf: closed back strike and surface or flush bolts • Coordinator required Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Maximum Rating 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max ITS/WHI FM B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A L18, L16 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" SL18 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0" x 7'2" N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2, HD2A) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A Astragal not required For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information Details are subject to change without prior notice. Tornado Elevations UL Notes: 1. Minimum Hardware Requirements: Active leaf • Single point lock/latch Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4, 86, 86ED, 86 w/ sectional trim • • Closer Approved hinges Inactive leaf • • • • • Specialty Hurricane Maximum Door Size Door Series Wide inactive leaf Closer Strike preparation Auto flush bolts Approved hinges Coordinator is required Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Note: flush bolt sets omit bottom bolt, using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per hardware manufacturer's listing approval. 290 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors UL ITS/WHI FM L18, L16 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" L14 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 8'0" LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0" x 8'0" N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T18, T16, T14 8'0" x 9'0" N/A 8'0" x 8'0" CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16, HD2, HD2A 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A L18, L16 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" L14 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 8'0" A14 (FG2, FG3) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A A14 (FG) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A Astragal Required Minimum hardware requirements: Active leaf • • • Elevations 1 Hr (60 min) Max Maximum Door Size Door Series Lights and Louvers 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max Doors Rating 3 Hr Max Variations Maximum Frames • Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, closed back strike • Coordinator required Variations Pairs with astragal: Swing in the same direction • Active Leaf: Mortise FEH Mortise FEH Closer Approved hinges • Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH. (LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available based on hardware manufacturer's listing approval (1 1/2 hour maximum) • • Closer For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information 2. Pairs for 3 hour rating, the Inactive leaf with Surface or Concealed Vertical rod must be top and bottom latching (NO LBR) 3. Pairs for 1 1/2 hour rating can be equipped with LBR devices if the hardware manufacture is approved for that application. Approved hinges Coordinator is required Specialty 4. Mortise Fire Exit Devices x Closed back strike, w/Surface or Flush Bolts. Flush Bolts sets omit bottom bolt, using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per hardware manufacturer's listing approval Tornado 1. Hurricane Notes: Inactive leaf 5. Open back strike not permitted on this application Details are subject to change without prior notice. Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 291 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 • Technical data manual • Frames Doors Lights and Louvers Variations Variations General Information Home Fire rated products • Doors Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction w/OBS • Active Leaf: Mortise FEH • Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, OBS (open back strike) Maximum Rating 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max ITS/WHI FM L18, L16, L14 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0" x 7'2" N/A SL18 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 7'2" N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16, HD2, HD2A OBS 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A Open Back Strike For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information OBS Details are subject to change without prior notice. Without Astragal Minimum hardware requirements: Active leaf • • • Tornado Elevations UL Notes: 1. Mortise FEH Closer Approved hinges Inactive leaf (Wide Inactive Leaf) • Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH. (LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available based on hardware manufacturer's listing approval • • • Open back strike preparation Closer Approved hinges Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Specialty Hurricane Maximum Door Size Door Series 292 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors Maximum Rating 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max Door Series Doors Coordinator Required Variations Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, closed back strike (CBS) Frames • • Variations Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction w/CBS • Active Leaf: Mortise FEH Maximum Door Size UL ITS/WHI FM 8'0" x 8'0" N/A 8'0" x 7'2" SL18 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2 & HD2A) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A OBS Closed Back Strike Lights and Louvers L18, L16, L14 Details are subject to change without prior notice. CBS Elevations Without Astragal Minimum hardware requirements: Active leaf Mortise FEH Closer Tornado Approved hinges Inactive leaf (Wide Inactive Leaf) Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH. Closed back strike preparation Closer Approved hinges (LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available based on hardware manufacturer's listing approval Coordinator is required Specialty • • • • Hurricane • • • Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 293 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 07/31/14 • Technical data manual • Frames Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction • Active Leaf: Vertical Rod FEH • Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH Maximum Rating 1 1/2 Hr (90 minute) Max Tornado Specialty Hurricane Elevations Lights and Louvers Doors Fire rated products • Doors Variations Variations General Information Home Maximum Door Size Door Series UL ITS/WHI FM B18, B16, B14 8'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A L18, L16 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 8'0" L14 8'0" x 9'0" N/A N/A PW14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T18, T16 8'0" x 9'0" N/A 8'0" x 8'0" T14 8'0" x 9'0" N/A N/A SL18 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" N/A TH16 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A H16 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A HE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0 x 8'0" N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2 & HD2A) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max A14 (FG2, FG3) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A 1 Hr (60 min) Max A14 (FG) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A Astragal NOT allowed Minimum Hardware Requirements: Active leaf • • • Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH Closer Approved hinges Inactive leaf (Wide Inactive Leaf) Notes: 1. Pairs of doors without an astragal are not listed or available for 3 hour applications. Astragals can not be used in this hardware application. 2. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information 3. Maximum 450°F degree on all temperature rise doors. • • • Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH Closer Approved hinges (LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available based on hardware manufacturer's listing approval. 4. Paladin (PW14-Series) tornado resistant doors require Von Duprin WS9927(F) or 237 (F) vertical rod FEH. LBR option is not available. Architectural Performance Fire Rated Products Hardware Details are subject to change without prior notice. 294 • • Technical data manual • Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 Home General Information Fire rated products • Doors ITS/WHI FM L14 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 7'2" 8'0" x 8'0" SL18 8'0" x 8'0" 8'0" x 8'0" N/A B18, B16 8'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A B14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A H16, H14 8'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A T18, T16, T14 8'0" x 9'0" N/A 8'0" x 8'0" T20 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE18, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A L20 6'0" x 7'2" 6'0" x 7'2" N/A SL20 6'0" x 7'2" 6'0" x 7'2" N/A HE16 (E6) 6'0" x 8'0" N/A N/A CE20, CE16 (E6) 6'0" x 7'0" N/A N/A LS18, LS16 N/A 8'0" x 8'0" N/A CE18, CE16 (HD2 & HD2A) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A CE18 (E6) 7'4" x 7'0" N/A N/A L18, L16 8'0" x 10'0" 8'0" x 9'0" 8'0" x 8'0" B14 8'0" x 10'0" N/A N/A 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max A14, (FG2, FG3) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A 1 Hr (60 min) Max A14 (FG) 8'0" x 8'0" N/A 3 Hr Max 1 1/2 Hr (90 min) Max RHM Removable Hardware Mullion Removable Hardware Mullion Minimum Hardware Requirements: • RPD, Rim FEH Closer N/A • • N/A • Approved hinges Fire rated and listed removable hardware mullion Notes: 1. Pairs of doors with removable mullions are treated and listed as 2 single doors 3. Removable mullions must be listed. Maximum door size depends on the hardware manufacturer's approved and listed mullion height. Details are subject to change without prior notice. Specialty 2. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information Tornado 8'0" x 8'0" Hurricane 8'0" x 8'0" Elevations 8'0" x 10'0" Lights and Louvers L18, L16 Doors UL Variations Maximum Door Size Door Series Frames Maximum Rating Variations Pairs with removable hardware mullion: Swing in the same direction • Rim FEH x Rim FEH Hardware Fire Rated Products Performance • 295 Architectural Book Rev. 12/02/20 • Page Rev. 7/31/14 • Technical data manual • General Information Home Fire rated products • Doors Frames Variations Pairs with Steelcraft rem">
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
